Home

"2.3.2 PT Programming" in the

1. Networking Item KX TDA30 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 TIE Line Routing and Modification Table 32 entries Leading Number 3 digits PBX Code 7 digits NDSS Monitored PBXs 8 NDSS Registered Extensions for Monitor PBX 250 CTI Item KX TDA30 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 PC Console 2 8 PC Phone 24 64 128 Password Hem KX TDA30 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 System Password for Installer 4 10 characters System Password for Administrator for PC Programming 4 10 characters System Password for User for PC Programming 4 10 characters System Password for Administrator for PT Programming 4 19 digits System Password for User for PT 4 10 digits Programming Manager Password 4 10 digits Feature Guide 387 388 3 1 Capacity of System Resources Programmer Code Hem KX TDA30 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 Installer Level Programmer Code 4 16 characters Administrator Level Programmer Code 4 16 characters User Level Programmer Code 0 16 characters Feature Guide 3 2 Exclusive Features Table 3 2 Exclusive Features Table The KX TDA30 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 and KX TDA600 support certain features only available for that PBX model The table below lists the features that are available depending on the PBX model KX TDA100 KX TDA30 KX TDA200 KX T
2. 8 9 0 INTERCOM Notes e Itis possible to store a Memory Dialling feature number at the beginning of the Memory Dialling numbers e Itis possible to store several feature numbers in one Memory Dialling location Conditions e Trunk Access by Memory Dialling A specific Trunk Access number can be stored with the telephone number in Memory Dialling However Feature Guide 97 1 6 Memory Dialling Features if Memory Dialling is done after selecting a trunk the stored Trunk Access number is ignored and the telephone number is sent using the selected trunk 98 Feature Guide 1 6 Memory Dialling Features 1 6 1 2 One touch Dialling Description A PT user can access a person or feature by pressing a single button This is activated by storing the number e g extension number telephone number or feature number in a One touch Dialling button Conditions e One touch Dialling Button A flexible button can be customised as a One touch Dialling button e Full One touch Dialling There is no need to go off hook before pressing the One touch Dialling button PT Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 19 2 Flexible Buttons 3 1 Capacity of System Resources User Manual References 1 2 2 Easy Dialling Feature Guide 99 1 6 Memory Dialling Features 1 6 1 3 KX 1T7710 One touch Dialling Description The Message button and One touch butto
3. Tenant 1 Company A j Tenant 3 Company B P mmm mg vuam Floating Extn No 500 Th II ee vip Extn 102 8 Caller s Identification Notification to the VPS When receiving a trunk call the PBX sends the caller s identification number name to the VPS 9 DID Number Notification to the VPS When receiving a trunk call with a DDI DID number or an MSN the PBX sends the DDI DID number or MSN to the VPS The number will be sent to the VPS even if the call reaches the VPS after redirection by for example the Intercept Routing feature 10 Status Notification to the VPS After the call is redirected by the VPS the PBX sends the status of the redirected extension e g busy to the VPS 11 Paging by the VPS The VPS can perform the Paging feature using the recorded message 1 14 1 Paging 12 Live Call Screening LCS APT or PS user can monitor his own mailbox while a caller is leaving a message and if desired answer the call by pressing the LCS button When the caller is leaving a message in the mailbox monitoring can be carried out in two ways each PT user can choose which through personal programming Live Call Screening Mode Set PS users cannot choose the way only Private mode is available for them Hands free mode The user can monitor the call automatically through the built in speaker Private mode The user will hear a warning tone To monitor the call the user goe
4. Feature Guide 17 1 1 Incoming Call Features 18 Trunk Card Type Channel Type Gees DIL DID DDI MSN E1 DR2 Vv v E amp M C Vt Vv E amp M P vr vw E amp M Vt BRI CO Vv Was vw PRI CO Vv v vr Enable default W Enable Available Destinations Destination Availability Wired Extension PT SLT ISDN Extension T1 OPX Vv PS Y Incoming Call Distribution Group Vv PS Ring Group Vv Floating Extension no for SVM Vv VM Group DTMF DPT Vv External Pager TAFAS Vv DISA Y Analogue ISDN Remote Maintenance Vv Idle Line Access no Phone no Trunk Group Access no Trunk Group no Phone no Other PBX Extension TIE with no PBX Code Vv Other PBX Extension TIE with PBX Code Intercept Routing After setting distribution it may also be necessary to set the following features Feature Guide 1 1 Incoming Call Features Feature Description amp Reference Intercept Routing No Answer IRNA If a called party does not answer a call within a preprogrammed time period Intercept time it is redirected to the preprogrammed destination gt 1 1 1 6 Intercept Routing Busy DND If a called party is busy or in DND mode the call is redirected to the preprogrammed destination gt 1 1 1 6 Intercept Routing No Destination If a destination is not assigned the call is red
5. 2 1 29 3 Virtual Private Network VPN Distribution Method One of the following methods can be assigned to each trunk port Method Description amp Reference Direct In Line DIL Directs a call to a preprogrammed single destination e g the operator gt 1 1 1 2 Direct In Line DIL Direct Inward Dialling DID Directs a call with a DID number from a DID line to a preprogrammed destination DID is also known as Direct Dialling In DDI gt 1 1 1 3 Direct Inward Dialling DID Direct Dialling In DDI Multiple Subscriber Number MSN Ringing Service Directs a call with an MSN from an ISDN line to a preprogrammed destination 1 1 1 4 Multiple Subscriber Number MSN Ringing Service Destination Change with the Caller s Identification Number The Calling Line Identification CLI Distribution feature works in conjunction with the DIL DID DDI MSN features Feature Description amp Reference Calling Line Identification CLI Distribution Directs a call to a CLI destination if the caller s identification number has been assigned in the Caller ID Table gt 1 1 1 5 Calling Line Identification CLI Distribution Available Distribution Feature for Each Optional Trunk Card Type Trunk Card Type Channel Type Feature DIL DID DDI MSN ELCOT LCOT p DID p Ti LCOT P GCOT e DID V Fe TIE E amp M e S
6. Depending on system programming calls can be directed to the longest idle extension This is known as Automatic Call Distribution ACD Priority Hunting An idle extension is searched for using the preprogrammed order for the group 1st Priority 2nd Priority 3rd Extn Extn Extn Extn A B C D Always starts searching from the first assigned extension Ring All extensions in the group ring simultaneously Delayed Ringing Delayed ringing or no ringing can be programmed for each extension in the group The call can be answered by pressing the flashing button even if no ring or a delayed time is set Y vy Extn Extn Extn Extn A B C D A Rings immediately simultaneously Delayed Ringing Rings after a specified time delay Feature Guide 49 1 2 Receiving Group Features 50 2 Call Waiting for Incoming Call Distribution Group Group Call Waiting When there are no available extensions in an incoming call distribution group the group members can receive the Call Waiting tone To use this feature e Select the Group Call Waiting mode through system programming This determines the distribution method for waiting calls e Member extensions must assign the Call Waiting mode individually or they will not be notified gt 1 1 3 3 Call Waiting How the Grou
7. Q gt Overflow Feature ae a Sends a busy tone Busy on Busy or b Redirects to the overflow destination D Queuing Feature gt Five calls are waiting in a queue Manual Queue Redirection 10 Se The longest waiting call in a queue Group Call Distribution 3 can be redirected to the overflow Calls are distributed by the assigned method Only three extensions agents can answer the call for Busy on Busy A X Supervisor Extension destination by pressing the Hurry up button The button shows the Hurry up status Extn Extn Extn Extn Extn l Extn Extn 100 101 102 103 104 105 105 Monitors or controls the Incoming Call Log in Log out incoming call distribution Distribution Group 1 S tat Floating extension no 601 SS Ee Name Sales 10 1 2 2 4 Queuing Feature 11 1 2 2 8 Supervisory Feature 12 1 2 2 7 Log in Log out 1 Group Call Distribution 1 2 2 2 Group Call Distribution Incoming calls are distributed using one of the following methods Distribution Method Description Uniform Call Distribution Calls are distributed evenly to a different extension each time a call is UCD received Priority Hunting An idle extension is searched for in the specified order always starting from the same location Ring All extensions in the i
8. kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Check in 01 JAN 00 06 31PM Check out 03 JAN 00 07 03AM Room 202 Mr Smith 01 01 00 06 52PM 202 01 Call amount 0012 24 30 00084 50 001 02 01 00 06 07PM 202 01 123456789 10 12 00010 20 1234567890 02 01 00 07 30PM 202 01 012345678901234 06 36 00006 60 12345 02 01 00 08 45PM 202 01 0011234567890123 03 00 00003 00 12345 Telephone 104 30 Tax 000 48 Minibar 4 00 Tax 000 36 Tax Total Tel 41 3 12 34 56 78 Fax 41 3 12 34 56 78 E Mail 12345678 hoteltdapbx ch 1 A programmable title e g hotel name 2 The check in time 3 The check out time If the guest has already been checked out the check out time will be shown If not the time that the bill was printed will be shown 4 The extension number and name 5 A list of all calls made and call charges using the same format as SMDR output Pattern B gt 1 25 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR 6 The total charge for each charge item and tax including the preprogrammed tax rate Feature Guide 273 1 26 Hospitality Features 274 7 The combined charges of all three charge items currency of the charge and tax 8 The sheet number the number of times that the current guest s charge data has been printed out and then cleared 9 A programmable footer e g the contact information of the hotel It is possible to select the language used on the guest bill Walking COS If g
9. 1 20 1 3 Advice of Charge AOC Call Forwarding CF by ISDN Forwards an incoming call to another outside party using the ISDN service of the telephone company 1 20 1 4 Call Forwarding CF by ISDN P MP gt 1 20 1 5 Call Forwarding CF by ISDN P P Call Hold HOLD by ISDN Puts one ISDN call on hold 1 20 1 6 Call Hold HOLD by ISDN Feature Guide 211 1 20 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN Service Features 212 Service Description amp Reference Call Transfer CT by ISDN Transfers an ISDN call to an outside party Call Transfer with Announcement and Call Transfer without Announcement are available 1 20 1 7 Call Transfer CT by ISDN Three party Conference Establishes a three party conference call using the ISDN service of 3PTY by ISDN the telephone company 1 20 1 8 Three party Conference 3PTY by ISDN Malicious Call Identification An extension user can ask the telephone company to trace a MCID malicious caller Information on the malicious call will be received later on 1 20 1 9 Malicious Call Identification MCID Completion of Calls to Busy VI an outside called party is busy an extension can receive callback Subscriber CCBS ringing when the called party becomes free 1 20 1 10 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber CCBS ISDN Centrex Service An extension user can have access to th
10. 2 Modify Command CH 12 CH Example Dialled number 0123456789 Modification 042345 6789 m Gg e 12 Remove 6 digits 12 Add the number Trunk Access no is ignored ai IC Add SE SCH Access code oO Optional Assignment Authorisation Code for a Tenant An Authorisation code can be assigned for each carrier and each tenant Authorisation Code for a Trunk Group An Authorisation code can be assigned for each trunk group and each carrier Feature Guide 129 1 9 Automatic Route Selection ARS Features Itemised Billing Code An Itemised Billing code can be assigned for each extension and for each verification code If a call is not made from an extension e g DISA or TIE and no verification code is used the Itemised Billing code assigned in the location 1 of the verification code will be used Conditions WARNING The software contained in the ARS feature to allow user access to the network must be upgraded to recognise newly established network area codes and exchange codes as they are placed into service Failure to upgrade the on premise PBXs or peripheral equipment to recognise the new codes as they are established will restrict the customer and users of the PBX from gaining access to the network and to these codes KEEP THE SOFTWARE UP TO DATE WITH THE LATEST DATA e Dialled Number on SMDR It is possible to choose to print either the user di
11. Installation Manual References KX TDA30 2 5 7 MEC Card KX TDA100 KX TDA200 2 3 2 MEC Card KX TDA0105 KX TDA600 102 Feature Guide 2 3 2 EMEC Card KX TDA6105 PT Programming Manual References 001 System Speed Dialling Number 002 System Speed Dialling Name 509 TRS Barring Level for System Speed Dialling Feature Guide References 3 1 Capacity of System Resources User Manual References 1 2 2 Easy Dialling 1 12 1 Using the Call Log 1 12 2 Using the Directories 3 1 2 Settings on the Programming Mode 3 3 Customising Your System System Programming 1 6 Memory Dialling Features Feature Guide 103 1 6 Memory Dialling Features 1 6 1 6 Quick Dialling Description An extension user can access an extension or feature by simply dialling a 1 4 digit Quick Dialling number Conditions General e Quick Dialling is convenient in cases such as the following Room service calls in a hotel Calling another branch via the public network e Quick Dialling numbers follow the flexible numbering plan gt 2 3 6 Flexible Numbering Fixed Numbering e The following example shows how Quick Dialling numbers can be stored and utilized Location No Quick Dialling No Desired Number Quick Dialling 01 110 9110 Trunk Call Quick Dialling 02 5 3016 Room Service Quick Dialling 03 2011 90123456789 Another Branch Installing an EMEC MEC
12. 410 Feature Guide Wrap up 60 X XDP Parallel Mode Wireless 254 XDP gt EXtra Device Port 340 XDP Digital 140 Index Feature Guide 411 Panasonic Communications Co Ltd 1 62 4 chome Minoshima Hakata ku Fukuoka 812 8531 Japan Copyright This material is copyrighted by Panasonic Communications Co Ltd and may be reproduced for internal use only All other reproduction in whole or in part is prohibited without the written consent of Panasonic Communications Co Ltd 2005 Panasonic Communications Co Ltd All Rights Reserved PSQX3659YA KK0805BM1105
13. AL N 1 Remove the 2 Add 001 first 2 digits iy Modification is completed sore is EE 03344556677 001987654321 3 2 Caller ID Table Assignment The System Speed Dialling Table is also used as the Caller ID Table In each location of the table the following items can be assigned a Telephone number Trunk Access number caller s telephone number b System Speed Dialling name caller s name shown on the display or SMDR c CLI destination used for CLI feature When a caller s modified telephone number matches a telephone number the Trunk Access number is disregarded in the table the call is sent to the assigned CLI destination Example Location System Speed System Speed Dialling ae Dialling No Telephone No Name 2 CLI Destination 000 90123456789 ABC Company 200 001 Feature Guide 1 17 Caller ID Features 4 001 System Speed Dialling Number 2 002 System Speed Dialling Name 3 3 Caller s Name Reference A name can also be shown on the display or SMDR The PBX searches for the name in the following order 1 Personal Speed Dialling data of the original called extension 2 System Speed Dialling Caller ID Table 3 Caller ID name received from the public line Caller ID Name Reference If the name is not found it will not be displayed Conditions General Caller ID signalling type can be selected through syst
14. User Manual References 1 7 10 Checking the Time Service Status 2 1 2 Time Service Mode Control 354 Feature Guide 2 2 System Configuration Software 2 2 5 Operator Features Description Any extension or Incoming Call Distribution ICD group can be designated as an operator This PBX supports the following types of operators Type Description PBX operator An extension or incoming call distribution group can be assigned as a PBX operator for each time mode day lunch break night Tenant operator An extension or incoming call distribution group can be assigned as a tenant operator The tenant operator may be the extension or incoming call distribution group of another tenant Example Extension 110 in tenant 1 is the tenant operator of tenant 3 Operator Call An extension user can call an operator by dialling the preprogrammed Operator Call feature number The destination of the Operator Call depends on the following Ifthe Tenant Service is not in use The call is directed to the PBX operator according to the corresponding time mode Ifthe Tenant Service is in use The call is directed to the extension s tenant operator If a tenant operator is not assigned the call is directed to the PBX operator In this case the current time mode of the extension s tenant is used to determine the PBX operator that the call is directed to If neither a tenant operator nor a PBX operator is as
15. 1 2 2 8 Supervisory Feature Log in Log out Monitor The supervisor extension can monitor the Monitor and Remote log in log out status of the group members Control Remote Conirol The supervisor extension can change the status of the members 1 2 2 8 Supervisory Feature Conditions e One extension can belong to multiple incoming call distribution groups e ICD Group button An Incoming Call Distribution ICD Group button can be assigned on a flexible button for each incoming call distribution group It receives the incoming calls to the group One extension can have more than one ICD Group button of the same or different incoming call distribution groups Multiple ICD Group If all ICD Group buttons in the same incoming call distribution group are occupied the next incoming call will be held in a queue or will overflow If the ICD Group button is not assigned incoming calls will arrive at the INTERCOM or CO button The mode of ICD Group buttons can be selected through system programming as follows Standard Mode ICD Group Button Mode An extension can have an ICD Group button for an incoming call distribution group that the extension does not belong to through system programming However the ICD Group button will not receive calls to that group Enhanced Phantom Button Mode An extension can join an ICD Group just by creating a button for that group even if the extension was not previously registered as
16. 1 2 2 8 Supervisory Feature e Log in Log out Information on SMDR Log in Log out information can be printed out on SMDR gt 1 25 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR PT Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 19 2 Flexible Buttons Feature Guide 61 1 2 Receiving Group Features User Manual References 1 8 1 Leaving an Incoming Call Distribution Group Log in Log out Wrap up 62 Feature Guide 1 2 Receiving Group Features 1 2 2 8 Description Supervisory Feature An extension preprogrammed as a supervisor Supervisor extension can monitor and control each member s status within the incoming call distribution group using a 6 line display PT Feature Description Incoming Call Queue Monitor The supervisor extension can monitor the status of an incoming call distribution group with the display Remote Control Log in Log out Monitor and Monitor The supervisor extension can monitor the log in log out status of the incoming call distribution group members through the corresponding DSS button light Remote Control The supervisor extension can change the status of the members by pressing the corresponding DSS button Example lt Incoming Call Queue Monitor Display gt 31 Jan 08 13AM FRI 601 Sales Section Date and time Floating extension number name of incoming call distribution group The number of queuing calls t queu
17. 1 7 3 Call Monitor Description Allows an extension user to listen to a busy extension user s existing conversation The user can hear the conversation but the user s voice is not heard If desired interrupting the call to establish a three party conference call is available Conditions e COS programming determines extension users who can use this feature e This feature is available only when the busy extension is in a conversation with another extension or outside party e This feature does not work when the busy extension is in one of the following conditions a Executive Busy Override Deny 1 7 2 Executive Busy Override or Data Line Security 1 10 5 Data Line Security has been set b While receiving OHCA 1 7 4 3 Off hook Call Announcement OHCA or Whisper OHCA gt 1 7 4 4 Whisper OHCA c During a Conference call gt 1 13 1 Conference Features d During a doorphone call 1 16 1 Doorphone Call e While Live Call Screening LCS or Two way Record is activated 1 23 3 Voice Mail DPT Digital Integration f During Consultation Hold e This feature stops when the busy extension user presses the following buttons during a conversation gt 1 19 1 Fixed Buttons and 1 19 2 Flexible Buttons FLASH RECALL button HOLD button TRANSFER button CONF Conference button DSS button EFA button Two way Record button Two way Transfer button One touch T
18. 17 1 17 2 18 18 1 18 2 19 19 1 19 2 19 3 1 19 4 1 20 1 20 1 1 20 1 1 1 20 1 2 1 20 1 3 1 20 1 4 1 20 1 5 1 20 1 6 1 20 1 7 1 20 1 8 1 20 1 9 1 20 1 10 1 20 1 11 1 20 1 12 1 21 1 21 1 1 22 1 22 1 1 23 1 23 1 1 23 2 1 23 3 1 24 1 24 1 1 24 2 wech sch sch mb sch ee gh ee sch mb sch sch sch sch sch sch sch ee ee ch mb sch wk sch COMET ON eerste Eege Eege 153 Privacy Releases rsieivsceincitives tient chen ageet ieee liu dined Stadt eet Rani eee 155 Paging Ke TEE 156 Paging cate a Se a oe cae cee Seca ca tence atte cee 156 Broadcasting Features si ssisccicsecscsssnstasassieseescsdseansancessssdssnnacsenadseesacnaasadssesisentadacnansestace 158 Ee ele 6 eee ne or mee rr ee ee eo ee eer ee eae ee ere 158 Optional Device Features acc ccciscctccectacascsaccctssncstdnegscensciseaccatecessxcsceessccagectasuesciceaassacees 161 Do rphone leese ee EE 161 Reg COD D 163 Trunk Answer From Any Station TIAEAG na 164 Background MUSIC BGM sisisssaicennaiectedaaseacenteiaastalaiuaseseneveencaaneiererbeunsxtaveecaeniadusmiaceems 165 Outgoing Message OM 166 Direct Inward System Access DIANA 169 Automatic Fax Transter eee e eee e eee e eee e eee ttnt ttnn tae saa aaa eae seeeeceeeeseenseseeeeeeneene 177 Built in Simplified Voice Message VM 179 External SONS ON Eed 184 External Relay Control EEN 186 Caller ID Feature Sivas iscscaas css eege EENS EES 188 Caller ID sas acre es earen ee
19. Automatic Number Identification ANI Caller s information which is sent from an E1 or T1 line 1 21 1 E1 Line Service 1 22 1 T1 Line Service 2 Service Features Features Description amp Reference Calling Line Identification CLI Distribution Directs a DIL DID DDI MSN call to a CLI destination if the caller s identification Caller ID CLIP ANI has been assigned to the Caller ID Table gt 1 1 1 5 Calling Line Identification CLI Distribution Incoming Call Log Caller s information is automatically recorded in the call log of the called extension This information is used for confirming the caller calling the caller back and or storing the number and name in the Personal Speed Dialling 1 17 2 Incoming Call Log 188 Feature Guide 1 17 Caller ID Features 3 Number Name Assignment 3 1 Automatic Caller ID Number Modification This PBX automatically modifies the incoming caller s number according to preprogrammed tables The modified number will be recorded for calling back This PBX supports 4 modification tables each of which can be used for any number of trunk groups Each table has 10 locations for local international calls and one for long distance calls The PBX checks the local international call data first If a match is not found the long distance call data is applied Example lt Table Selection gt Trunk Modifi
20. TIE Line Network PBX 1 PBX 2 PBX Code 951 PBX Code 952 952 9 211 4567 xa ee ed e TIE Line Interface TRG 2 gt ji Outside Party Extn 1011 211 4567 Dials 7 952 9 211 4567 or 802 952 9 211 4567 Explanation 1 Extension 1011 of PBX 1 dials the TIE line access number 7 PBX code 952 Idle Line Access number of PBX 2 9 and telephone number 211 4567 or dials the Trunk Group Access number of PBX 1 8 trunk group number 02 TRG2 PBX code 952 Idle Line Access number of PBX 2 9 and telephone number 211 4567 2 The callis connected to the outside party 211 4567 through PBX 2 which has PBX code 952 Feature Guide 289 1 29 Networking Features b Trunk Call through Other PBXs by the ARS feature Example lt Extension Number Method Access without PBX Code gt Telephone Company ET WE P Outside Party Extn 1011 Extn 2011 211 4567 Dials 9 211 4567 e Explanation 1 Extension 1011 of PBX 1 dials the Idle Line Access number of PBX 1 9 and telephone number 211 4567 2 PBX 1 modifies the call adds the Idle Line Access number of PBX 2 9 and sends the call to PBX 2 through the TIE line trunk group TRG 2 according to the ARS programming of PBX 1 3 PBX 2 sends the call to the outside party 211 4567 290 Feature Guide 1 29 Networking Features lt PBX Code Method Access with
21. Telephone Company go St 5 Trunk TIE Line Network e 5a g Forwarded Transferred Intercepted to 7 952 201 1 Outside Caller l JE E Ca Extn 1011 Extn 2011 7 Dials 123 4567 Explanation An outside caller dials 123 4567 The call reaches the destination extension 1011 of PBX 1 and the call is forwarded transferred or intercepted to extension 2011 of PBX 2 through the TIE line Feature Guide 287 1 29 Networking Features 2 2 TIE to Trunk Access The PBX sends TIE line calls to the trunks of another PBX through the TIE lines a Trunk Call through Other PBXs by Making a TIE Line Call Method Example lt Extension Number Method Access without PBX Code gt Telephone Company e e e ai Si pa ai pa pi ai e e mi at mi pi ai elt mi pi a pa mp S TIE Line Wun c mA P vs Outside Party Extn 1011 Extn 2011 211 4567 Dials 802 9 211 4567 Explanation 1 Extension 1011 of PBX 1 dials the Trunk Group Access number of PBX 1 8 trunk group number 02 TRG2 Idle Line Access number of PBX 2 9 and telephone number 21 1 4567 2 PBX 1 sends the call to PBX 2 through the trunk group TRG 2 TIE line 3 PBX 2 sends the call to the outside party 211 4567 288 Feature Guide 1 29 Networking Features lt PBX Code Method Access with PBX Code gt Telephone Company e e e e e e Trunk
22. ecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeenenaeeeeeeeeeeenneeeeeeeeees 275 1 27 2 Extension Feature Clear ttrt ttrt ArErE E EEEE E EEEE EEEE neeE EnEn nnan EEEE EEE 277 1 27 39 Walking TENUOUS EE 278 1 27 4 Timed Reminder cee cecceecceee cee ceeeeeeeeeeeeceeeceeeeeaeesaeeseseeseaeaeaesaesaeesaeeaaeeaaeeaeeeaeeeaeeeeeeaeeees 279 1 28 Audible Tone Features is icicsicsisccseccsietcccecsccsedsscestscassescessssavteasuasssavteccvesessascassetascatissnses 280 1 281 Dal Tone ee 280 1 282 Confirmation TONEssscnnann an E N A 282 1 29 Networking Features iis sssacscsncncnsssceaterssiensnssessnsasscaneasesessnanesenienseasesentesdeanenseneaseaaieaneiesd 284 ET Me VIE a vo ea oaa a E aA N aa aaie a Rna ai 284 1 29 2 Voice over Internet Protocol VoIP Network 306 1 29 3 Virtual Private Network VPN ssessseseesssssssssrsrsesssserrrrtttttrrrrrrtttteerrrnnnttnsssttrnnnnnnssreennna 309 1 29 4 QSIG Standard Feste 80 deed 311 12041 QSIG Standard Features GUMMAPNY ss sessssesneesstnenttetttettttntttnnttnnnttnttt tnnt ASNEEEAEEEAEEEEEEE AES EEn EEEE Enne Ennen 311 1 29 4 2 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP and Calling Connected Name Identification Presentation CNIP CONP by OSI G vise csecesevds dteseviesciepeevaiine a a E dere 313 1 29 4 3 Call Forwarding CF by OI 315 1 29 44 Call Transfer C1 by QS Graine E pastas R EN TE ENN EN 317 1 29 4 5 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber CCBS by OO 319 1 29 5 QSIG Enhanced Fe
23. ARS 126 S S CO Line Access 94 Screening Live Call LCS 244 Second Call Notification to Busy Extension 109 Security Mode DISA 169 Sensor External 184 Setup Automatic 366 Setup Quick 365 SMDR gt Station Message Detail Recording 259 Software Upgrading 377 Special Carrier Access Code 91 Speed Dialling Personal System 102 Splitting Call 149 Station Hunting gt Idle Extension Hunting 43 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR 259 Station Password Lock gt Extension PIN Lock 275 Station Programme Clear gt Extension Feature Clear 277 Station Speed Dialling gt Personal Speed Dialling 102 Subaddressing 211 Supervisory Feature 63 SVMLog 181 SVM gt Built in Simplified Voice Message 179 System Configuration and Administration Features 339 System Configuration Hardware 340 System Configuration Software 342 System Data Control 358 System Speed Dialling 102 System Speed Dialling TRS Barring Override by 114 T T1 Line Service 231 TAFAS gt Trunk Answer From Any Station 164 Tenant Service 348 Tenant to Tenant Call Block 349 Terminate 136 Terminated Hunting 43 Third Party Call Control 333 Three party Conference 3PTY by ISDN 223 TIE Line Service 284 Feature Guide 409 Index Time Service 351 Timed Reminder 279 Toll Restriction TRS 114 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring 114 Tone Audible 280 Tone Call Waiting 111 Tone Confirmation 282 To
24. Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber CCBS by QSIG 319 Computer Telephony Integration CTI 333 Conference 152 153 158 Confirmation Tone 282 Connected Line Identification Presentation COLP 214 Connected Line Identification Presentation COLP by QSIG 313 Connected Line Identification Restriction COLR 214 Connected Name Identification Presentation CONP by QSIG 313 CONP by QSIG gt Connected Name Identification Presentation by QSIG 313 CONR gt Connected Name Identification Restriction 314 Consultation Hold 137 144 149 COS gt Class of Service 342 CPC gt Calling Party Control Signal Detection 143 CT by ISDN gt Call Transfer by ISDN 222 CT by QSIG gt Call Transfer by QSIG 317 CTI gt Computer Telephony Integration 333 D Data Line Security 135 DDI gt Direct DiallingIn 22 Delayed Ringing 49 Denied Code Tables 114 Diagnostics 378 Dial Tone 280 Dial Tone Transfer 121 Dial Type Selection 85 Dialling Digit Restriction during Conversation 138 Dialling One touch 99 DID gt Direct Inward Dialling 22 Digital XDP 140 DIL gt Direct In Line 20 Direct Dialling In DDI 22 Direct In Line DIL 20 Direct Inward Dialling DID 22 Direct Inward System Access DISA 169 Direct One touch Answering 74 Direct Recording 180 Direct Trunk Access 94 Directed Call Pickup 76 Directory Call Extension Dialling 81 Directory Call Speed Dialling 102 Direct
25. Es call is routed to ne RK call is routed to nd The call is routed to the Routing No Destination Calling Line Identification CLI Distribution If the CLI routing is enabled and the caller s identification number is assigned in the Caller ID Table the call will not be routed to the MSN destination but routed to the CLI destination Feature Guide 25 1 1 Incoming Call Features Programming Example of MSN Table for ISDN BRI Port 1 A table can be programmed for each ISDN BRI port Each BRI port has 10 MSN locations CLI Destination Location No Name Day Lunch Ss Day Lunch 01 123 A Compan Enable Disable 101 100 4567 pany 02 123 Le Compan Enable Disable 102 100 2468 pany i 10 Note Tenant number and VPS trunk group number can also be assigned in the MSN table Tenant number is used to determine the time mode day lunch break night for the corresponding MSN VPS trunk group number is used in Voice Mail DPT Digital Integration 1 23 3 Voice Mail DPT Digital Integration Explanation If the MSN 123 4567 is received from BRI port 1 1 Checks the number in the table Matches the number in location 01 2 Checks the time mode In Day mode CLI is enabled Route to CLI destination In Lunch mode CLI is disabled Route to MSN destination extension 100 Conditions e To use this feature the MSN service must be assigned as the distribution me
26. FWD DND External Works for incoming trunk calls FWD DND Both Works for all incoming calls Button Status The FWD DND button shows the current status as follows Light Pattern Status default Red on FWD on Slow red flashing DND on Off FWD DND off The functions assigned to the on and flashing patterns can be changed through system programming Group FWD Button Types The FWD feature for the incoming call distribution group can be customised on a flexible button Multiple types of Group FWD buttons can be customised on an extension Type Description FWD for Incoming Call Group FWD Internal Works for incoming intercom calls Distribution Group Group FWD External Works for incoming trunk calls Group FWD Both Works for all incoming calls Button Status The Group FWD button shows the current status as follows Light Pattern Status default Red on FWD on Off FWD off Feature Guide 71 1 3 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND Features FWD DND Setting by Fixed FWD DND button Pressing the fixed FWD DND button in idle status allows the extension user to set the following items for FWD DND FWD DND for trunk calls The FWD DND status for trunk calls to that extension can be switched temporarily without clearing the FWD destination During setting the LED of the button shows the current trunk call FWD DND sta
27. Feature Guide Log in log out setting of the PS ring group from the incoming call distribution group is also disregarded 1 24 Portable Station PS Features PS Ring Group Incoming Call Distribution Group PS Ring Group EN n 7 lt gt s ae S e SE When the PS ring group is called using the floating extension number the group becomes busy to other callers using the floating extension number However the individual group members may be called directly using their extension number e lfaPSinaPS ring group has set the DND feature for trunk calls the PS will not ring when an intercom call or a trunk call arrives at the PS ring group gt 1 3 1 3 Do Not Disturb DND es Forcalls directed to PS ring groups the PBX will handle at most two calls simultaneously The third call cannot arrive at a PS ring group until one of the first two calls is answered or a caller hangs up PT Programming Manual References 620 Incoming Call Distribution Group Member Feature Guide References 3 1 Capacity of System Resources Feature Guide 251 1 24 Portable Station PS Features 1 24 3 PS Directory 252 Description A PS user can store numbers and or names in the directory A stored number is dialled by selecting a name or number in the directory Depending on the PS model the PS user can use the following directories for easy operation Type Description PS Dialling Directory Makes a call
28. LCOT Disconnect Time Feature Guide References 1 19 2 Flexible Buttons Feature Guide 1 10 Conversation Features 1 10 7 External Feature Access EFA Description Normally an extension user can only access features within the PBX However when performing External Feature Access EFA the extension user performs features outside of the PBX such as using the transfer services of the telephone company or host PBX When EFA is performed the PBX sends a flash recall signal to the telephone company or the host PBX gt 1 5 4 8 Host PBX Access Code Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX This feature is only available on trunk calls This feature is performed by pressing the EFA button or the FLASH RECALL button that is set to EFA mode gt 1 10 6 Flash Recall Terminate Conditions e Flash Recall Time The Flash Recall time can be assigned for each trunk port e EFA Button A flexible button can be customised as the EFA button e Itis possible to perform this feature by entering the feature number while the current call is placed on Consultation Hold e g is going to be transferred to an extension of the host PBX Consultation Hold a condition that a party is in when an extension is calling other parties in order to perform Call Transfer Conference or Call Splitting In Consultation Hold the original call is treated as if it is on hold allowing the extension to call a third party all on one line In Cal
29. MOD 224 Manager Features 356 Manual Queue Redirection 55 MOD gt Malicious Call Identification 224 Memory Dialling Features 96 Message Features 195 Message Waiting 195 Message Absent 198 Message Outgoing OGM 166 Message Printing 266 Monitor Call 108 MSN gt Multiple Subscriber Number Ringing Service 25 Multiple FWD 68 Multiple Subscriber Number MSN Ringing Service 25 Multiple VPSs 326 Music on Hold 150 Music Background BGM 165 Mute 133 N NDSS gt Network Direct Station Selection 320 Network Direct Station Selection NDSS 320 Network ICD Group 328 Networking Features 284 No Line Preference 75 93 Numbering Fixed Flexible 368 O Off hook Call Announcement OHCA 112 Off hook Monitor 132 OGM gt Outgoing Message 166 OHCA gt Off hook Call Announcement 112 OHCA Whisper 113 Index One touch Answering Direct 74 One touch Dialling 99 One touch Dialling Full 99 One touch Transfer 145 Operator Call 355 Operator Features 355 Operator Hotel 271 Outgoing Calllog 101 Outgoing Message OGM 166 Outside Destinations in Incoming Call Distribution Group 52 Overflow Feature 58 P Paging 156 Paging Deny 156 Paging DND 70 157 Paging Group 156 345 Parallelled Telephone 140 Password 363 Pause Insertion 88 PC Console 336 PC Phone 336 PC Programming 358 Personal Identification Number PIN Extension 275 Personal Identification Number PIN Verification Code
30. Personal System 1 16 8 Built in Simplified Voice Message SVM 1 17 2 Incoming Call Log c Walking Extension gt 1 27 3 Walking Extension d Extension Dial Lock gt 1 8 3 Extension Dial Lock e Walking COS gt 1 8 5 Walking COS f Walking COS through DISA 1 16 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA If an extension user has assigned an extension PIN this feature cannot be used without the PIN Conditions WARNING There is a risk that fraudulent telephone calls will be made if a third party discovers a personal identification number PIN verification code PIN or extension PIN of the PBX The cost of such calls will be billed to the owner renter of the PBX To protect the PBX from this kind of fraudulent use we strongly recommend a Keeping PINs secret b Selecting complex random PINs that cannot be easily guessed c Changing PINs regularly e Extension PIN Lock If the wrong PIN is entered three times the line will be disconnected If the wrong PIN is entered a preprogrammed number of times successively that extension will become locked and even entering the correct PIN will not unlock it Only an extension assigned as the manager can unlock it In this case the PIN will be unlocked and cleared This feature is also known as Station Password Lock e Remote Extension PIN Clear If an extension user forgets his PIN a manager can clear the PIN Then the extension user can assign a new PIN e Extensio
31. acaller hangs up b the recording time for the voice message reaches the preprogrammed limit Default 120 seconds c the recording space for the SVM card reaches the limit In cases b and c the caller will hear a notification tone and the line will be disconnected New voice messages cannot be recorded in a message box when a the total recording time or number of voice messages for the SVM card exceeds the limit b the number of voice messages for an extension exceeds the limit c the destination of a call has been changed more than once d the desired message box is already in use by another user e a call is received at an ICD Group and the message box of the first extension assigned to that group is not available or no extension is assigned as the first member of the group Recording Greeting Messages If an extension user tries to record a new greeting message to his message box when the card is already full the user will hear a reorder tone Display Lock A display PT user can lock the SVM Log display to prevent the user s information from being viewed and voice messages from being played back at any extension through personal programming Display Lock In this case the Incoming Outgoing Call Log displays and the Personal Speed Dialling number display are also locked An extension personal identification number PIN 1 27 1 Extension Personal Identification Number PIN is required to lock unlock the display
32. amp Reference Caller ID Caller s number is sent from an analogue trunk 1 17 1 Caller ID Calling Line Identification Presentation CLIP Caller s number is sent from an ISDN line 1 20 1 2 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP ANI Automatic Number Identification Caller s number is sent from an E1 or T1 line 1 21 1 E1 Line Service 1 22 1 T1 Line Service CLI always works in conjunction with the following call distribution methods a DIL b DID DDI c MSN Ringing Service Each trunk for DIL and the DID DDI MSN number can enable or disable the CLI feature for each time mode day lunch break night 2 2 4 Time Service When the call has Caller ID information and the CLI is enabled for the time mode the call will be handled by the CLI method Programming Example of System Speed Dialling Table for CLI Location wer System Speed Dialling Telephone No system ee CLI Destination No Name 000 901234567890 ABC Company 200 001 1 001 System Speed Dialling Number 2 002 System Speed Dialling Name Feature Guide 1 1 Incoming Call Features Explanation If the caller s number is 0123 456 7890 The Trunk Access number is disregarded 1 Checks the number in the table Matches the number in location 000 2 The call is routed to the CLI destination extension 200 Conditions e Aut
33. and KX TDA600 1 Channel Type LCOT GCOT DID TIE OPX The T1 card supports five different channel types to provide connection at minimum expense One of the five channel types can be assigned to one of the 24 channels of the T1 card individually according to tariffs and customer needs 2 T1 Features The following table shows the features available for each channel type Feature Table 1 2 3 4 5 Channel Type TIE DID DIL OPX ANI LCOT vi GCOT Vv DID Vv Y Vv TIE E amp M Vv Vv Vv Y OPX Y w Available Explanation ee Feature Description 1 TIE Line Service Refer to the TIE Line Service feature gt 1 29 1 TIE Line Service 2 Direct Inward Dialling Refer to the DID feature gt 1 1 1 3 Direct Inward Dialling DID DID Direct Dialling In DDI 3 Direct In Line DIL Refer to the DIL feature gt 1 1 1 2 Direct In Line DIL Feature Guide 231 1 22 T1 Line Service Features 232 Number in the Table Feature Description 4 Off Premise Extension An SLT which is installed off site can perform as if it were OPX installed locally The SLT makes and receives a call through the PBX An extension number can be given to the OPX and extension data such as COS is also applied Example Telephone Company gt I L 4 SLT T1 LCOT T1 OPX Jas T1 Card l J SCH i Extn
34. the PBX will transfer the call to the VM group and dial the mailbox number of the desired extension with the required command after the VPS answers the call Therefore the caller can leave a message without knowing the mailbox number Performance of Pressing the VM Transfer Button and Entering an Extension Number Transmitted Command In AA Service Mode In VM Service Mode Switching to VM command Recording Recording message command H H Mailbox message command 6 H H Mailbox No No Feature Guide 1 23 Voice Mail Features Example Trunk Call mailbox number Switching to VM command os 6 103 Transfer with VM Transfer button extension number 103 Extension Operator VPS In AA service mode VM Port 1 VM Port 2 VM DTMF i Group d VM Port X VM Port 3 d Listening to a Recorded Message If the VPS receives a message the VPS will set the Message Waiting feature on the corresponding telephone to notify the extension user that there is a message waiting in his mailbox The Message button light of the extension will turn on gt 1 18 1 Message Waiting thereby notifying the extension user that there is a message waiting in his mailbox When the Message button light turns on pressing the button allows the extension user to play back the messages stored in his mailbox without dialling such as a ma
35. using separate lines e When the extension user is having a conversation with one party the other party is in consultation hold User Manual References 1 4 3 Talking to Two Parties Alternately Call Splitting Feature Guide 149 1 12 Holding Features 1 12 4 Music on Hold Description Music can be played to a party that has been put on hold The following music sources are available a Internal music source b External music source c Cyclic tone Music Source Assignment KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 BGM1 BGM2 and cyclic tone can be selected as Music on Hold through system programming External music port 1 is assigned to BGM 1 It is possible to select whether external music port 2 internal music source 1 or internal music source 2 is assigned to BGM2 Having two external music ports for example allows the use of the BGM feature gt 1 16 4 Background Music BGM while assigning a separate external music source e g company message advertisement to Music on Hold BGM Number and the Music Source BGM No Music Source 1 External music port 1 External music port 2 internal music source 1 or internal music 2 source 2 Separate music sources can be assigned for the Music on Hold and the BGM features KX TDA30 Only one external music port is available If BGM is selected it is possible to select whether external music port internal music port 1 or internal music port 2 is assi
36. 01 45 6789 DDI No 01 45 6789 Forward Destination Forward Destination of Trunk Calls 01 23 4567 of Trunk Calls 01 23 4567 Conditions This feature complies with the following European Telecommunication Standard ETS specification e ETS 300 207 Diversion supplementary service e The availability of this feature is dependent on the contract with the telephone company e This feature can be enabled or disabled on each ISDN port of the PBX This feature is available when the same trunk group is used for the incoming call and the forwarded call PT Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 3 1 1 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND SUMMARY Feature Guide 219 1 20 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN Service Features 1 3 1 2 Call Forwarding FWD User Manual References 1 5 1 Forwarding Calls 220 Feature Guide 1 20 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN Service Features 1 20 1 6 Call Hold HOLD by ISDN Description An ISDN call can be put on hold using the ISDN service of the telephone company instead of the PBX feature This can be a part of a Call Transfer CT by ISDN 1 20 1 7 Call Transfer CT by ISDN and Three party Conference 8PTY by ISDN gt 1 20 1 8 Three party Conference 83PTY by ISDN This feature allows an ISDN call to be held and a call to be made to another outside party using only one communication channel of ISDN A PT user can e
37. 1 19 1 Fixed Buttons Description PTs DSS Consoles and Add on Key Modules are provided with the following feature Line Access buttons Depending on your device type some buttons may not be provided As for buttons on PSs please refer to the Operating Instructions for each PS PT and Add on Key Module Button Usage T Used to adjust the ringer speaker handset and headset abre volume and the display contrast Navigator Key and Jog Dial v can also be used to select data from the Call Directory and the System Feature Access Menu on the display ZON Navigator Key Jog Dial Volume Key av ENTER Used to confirm the selected item CANCEL Used to cancel the selected item PROGRAM PROG Used to enter and exit the programming mode Used to disconnect the current call and make another call without hanging up Flash Recall mode or Terminate mode or used to send a flash recall signal to the telephone PLASHRECALL R company or host PBX to access their features External Feature Access mode This button can also be used as a CANCEL button while on hook HOLD ES Used to place a call on hold Feature Guide 199 1 19 Proprietary Telephone PT Features 200 Button Usage SP PHONE Used for hands free operation Also used to switch between Speakerphone ngs handset and hands free operation MONITOR A Used
38. 1 29 2 Voice over Internet Protocol VoIP Network Automatic Rerouting of VoIP Calls to Public Trunks e 1 29 5 2 Centralised Voice Mail e 1 29 6 1 PS Roaming by Network ICD Group e 1 32 1 Cellular Phone Features SUMMARY Changed Contents e 1 2 2 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features SUMMARY ICD Group button e 1 2 2 7 Log in Log out Wrap up Timer e 1 3 1 1 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND SUMMARY e 1 4 1 4 Hands free Answerback e 1 5 5 2 Line Preference Outgoing e 1 6 1 6 Quick Dialling e 1 11 1 Call Transfer One touch Transfer Feature Guide 403 3 4 Revision History 404 1 13 1 2 Conference 1 16 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA End of Call Detection 1 29 4 1 QSIG Standard Features SUMMARY 1 29 5 1 Network Direct Station Selection NDSS 2 3 2 PT Programming 2 3 6 Flexible Numbering Fixed Numbering 3 1 Capacity of System Resources KX TDA3920 SD Memory Card for Software Upgrade to Enhanced Version only Features 1 2 2 2 Group Call Distribution Automatic Call Distribution ACD 1 2 2 3 Outside Destinations in Incoming Call Distribution Group 1 16 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA DISA Automatic Walking COS DISA Call Transfer from Outside Destination 1 29 6 1 PS Roaming by Network ICD Group 1 29 1 TIE Line Service TIE Call by Own PBX Extension Number 1 29 5 1 Network Direct Station Selection NDSS 1 29 5 2 Centralised Voice Mail 1 31 1 Computer Telepho
39. 1 29 Networking Features e Even if the telephone company does not support the VPN service it is possible to use the same kind of service when making a call by TIE line service programming and or Quick Dialling programming gt 1 6 1 6 Quick Dialling Quick Dialling Programming Example Location No Quick Dialling No Desired No Quick Dialling 01 2345 extension no of other PBX 9 123 4321 Public no of extension 2345 Explanation When an extension user dials 2345 he is connected to extension 2345 of other PBX whose public number is 123 4321 PT Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 29 1 TIE Line Service 310 Feature Guide 1 29 Networking Features 1 29 4 QSIG Standard Features 1 29 4 1 QSIG Standard Features SUMMARY Description QSIG is a protocol which is based on ISDN Q 931 and offers enhanced PBX features in a private network The QSIG network supports private communications by the TIE line service method The following features are available for an ISDN QSIG or VoIP private network For ISDN system programming is required to specify whether each feature excluding Calling Line Identification Presentation CLIP is available for each port of the private network Service Table Service Description amp Reference Calling Line Identification Presentation CLIP Sends the caller s number to the QSIG network when making a
40. 1 Tenant Member The tenant members consist of extension user groups One extension user group can belong to only one tenant Therefore one extension can belong to only one tenant 2 2 2 Group 1 2 Time Service Each tenant has a Time Table The Start and or End time of each time mode day lunch break night can be set for each day of the week The Time Table numbers correspond to the tenant numbers respectively gt 2 2 4 Time Service Example Tenant 1 Tenant 2 Extension Extension User Group 1 User Group 5 Extension Extension User Group 2 User Group 6 Extension User Group 3 Extension User Group 4 Use Time Table 1 Use Time Table 2 2 System Management Each of the following system management items can be assigned to each tenant a Tenant Operator extension number floating extension number of incoming call distribution group none gt 2 2 5 Operator Features b ARS Mode Off Local Access All Access System 1 9 1 Automatic Route Selection ARS c Music Source for Music on Hold System BGM Number Cyclic Tone gt 1 12 4 Music on Hold d System Speed Dialling System Extended for KX TDA30 or System Tenant Exclusive for KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 gt 1 6 1 5 Speed Dialling Personal System Hardware Requirement An EMEC or MEC card Programming Example Tenant No Operator ARS Mode Music Source system S peed Dialling 1 Extn 101 Local Access System s S
41. 124 Personal Speed Dialling 102 Pickup Dialling gt Hot Line 105 Pickup Group Call 76 344 PIN Lock Extension 275 PIN gt Extension Personal Identification Number 275 PIN gt Verification Code Personal Identification Number 124 Port Configuration Extension 340 Portable Station PS Connection 247 Portable Station PS Features 247 Power Failure Connections 378 Power Failure Restart 380 Power Failure Transfer 378 Predialling 79 Prime Line Preference 75 93 Printing Message 266 Priority Hunting 49 Privacy Release 155 Proprietary Telephone PT Features 199 PS Directory 252 PS Feature Buttons 253 PS Ring Group 249 346 PS Roaming by Network ICD Group 329 PS gt Portable Station Features 247 PT Programming 361 PT gt Proprietary Telephone Features 199 Pulse to Tone Conversion 85 Q QSIG Enhanced Features 320 QSIG Standard Features 311 Queue Redirection Manual 55 Queuing Feature 54 Quick Dialling 104 Quick Setup 365 R Recall 136 Recording into the VPS Two way 244 Recording Direct 180 Redial Automatic 101 Redial Interrupt 101 Redial Last Number 101 Relay Control External 186 Remote Control 63 Remote Extension Dial Lock 120 Remote Station Lock Control gt Remote Extension Dial Lock 120 Reverse Circuit 86 Revision History 392 Ring 49 Ring Tone Pattern Selection 39 RingTones 390 Ringing Line Preference 75 Room Status Control 271 Route Selection Automatic
42. 2323 5000Euro 0002 2222 John White 9876543210 3 4545 3000Euro 1 120 Verification Code 2 121 Verification Code Name 2 122 Verification Code Personal Identification Number PIN Se 123 Verification Code COS Number PT Programming Manual References 120 Verification Code 121 Verification Code Name 122 Verification Code Personal Identification Number PIN 123 Verification Code COS Number Feature Guide References 1 8 2 Budget Management 1 9 1 Automatic Route Selection ARS 2 2 1 Class of Service COS 2 2 6 Manager Features 3 1 Capacity of System Resources User Manual References 1 2 7 Calling without Restrictions 3 2 2 Manager Programming Feature Guide 125 1 9 Automatic Route Selection ARS Features 1 9 Automatic Route Selection ARS Features 1 9 1 Automatic Route Selection ARS Description ARS automatically selects the carrier available at the time an outgoing trunk call is made according to preprogrammed settings The dialled number will be checked and modified to connect the appropriate carrier Carrier Selection Procedure Flowchart The numbers in the flowchart correspond to the Programming Procedures on the following pages A trunk call is made No Normal Trunk Access Is the ARS mode CO enabled Sends the telephone number to the user selected carrier Is the dialled number found in the Yes Leading Number
43. 8 6 Verification Code Entry Remote Extension Sets or cancels the Extension Dial Lock on Required Dial Lock an extension remotely 1 8 3 Extension Dial Lock Dial Tone Transfer Changes the TRS Barring level of the Not required extension temporarily Example An extension user can call a manager to release the restricted outgoing call e g international call 1 8 4 Dial Tone Transfer Outgoing Message OGM Records and plays back outgoing Not required messages OGMs 1 16 5 Outgoing Message OGM Time Service Switches the time mode day lunch break Not required night manually 2 2 4 Time Service 356 Feature Guide 2 2 System Configuration Software S Manager Feature Description amp Reference Password BGM External Sets the External BGM on and off Not required 1 16 4 Background Music BGM Trunk Busy Out Clear Clears the Busy Out status of a trunk Not required 1 5 4 6 Trunk Busy Out NDSS Monitor Release Removes the monitor function from an Not required NDSS button 1 29 5 1 Network Direct Station Selection NDSS Conditions WARNING There is a risk that fraudulent telephone calls will be made if a third party discovers a personal identification number PIN verification code PIN or extension PIN of the PBX The cost of such calls will be billed to the owner renter of the PBX To protect the PBX from this kind o
44. After that the extension user can make his call Example An extension user can call a manager to release the restriction on outgoing calls e g international calls 3 Make a trunk call 2 Change TRS Barring level ETH Toll Restriction 1 Call gt Call Barring button Guest Room Manager Trunk call restricted Conditions e The modified TRS Barring level only applies to the next one call placed at the user s extension e Toll Restriction Call Barring Button A manager extension must store the desired TRS Barring level in the Toll Restriction Call Barring button A flexible button can be customised as the Toll Restriction Call Barring button PT Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 19 2 Flexible Buttons User Manual References 2 1 3 Restriction Level Control Dial Tone Transfer Feature Guide 121 1 8 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring Features 1 8 5 Walking COS Description A user can enter his extension number and extension personal identification number PIN 1 27 1 Extension Personal Identification Number PIN at another extension to make the following types of call using his Class of Service including TRS level overriding the other extension s Class of Service e Trunk call e TIE line call e Intercom call e External Relay Control gt 1 16 10 External Relay Control After performing Walking COS the following features are also
45. Buttons User Manual References 1 2 1 Basic Calling 1 2 6 Alternating the Calling Method Alternate Calling Ring Voice 1 12 2 Using the Directories 3 1 2 Settings on the Programming Mode Feature Guide 81 1 5 Making Call Features 1 5 4 Trunk Call Features 1 5 4 1 Trunk Call Features SUMMARY Description An extension user can use the following features when making a trunk call Feature Description amp Reference Emergency Call A user can dial the preprogrammed emergency numbers regardless of the restrictions imposed on the extension gt 1 5 4 2 Emergency Call Account Code Entry A user can enter an account code to identify outgoing calls for accounting and billing purposes 1 5 4 3 Account Code Entry Pulse to Tone Conversion A user can temporarily switch from Pulse mode to DTMF mode to access special services 1 5 4 4 Dial Type Selection Pause Insertion A user can insert a preprogrammed Pause time into a dialling number by pressing the PAUSE button or it is automatically inserted between the user dialled code e g Host PBX Access code or Special Carrier Access code and the following digits 1 5 4 7 Pause Insertion 1 5 4 8 Host PBX Access Code Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX 1 5 4 9 Special Carrier Access Code 82 Feature Guide 1 5 Making Call Features 1 5 4 2 Emergency Call Description An exten
46. COLR Assignment for Each Port Each service can be enabled or disabled on each ISDN port of the PBX CLIR Button and COLR Button It is possible to switch between CLIP and CLIR by pressing the CLIR button and COLP and COLR by pressing the COLR button A flexible button can be customised as the CLIR or COLR button The CLIP COLP number must match the telephone number provided by the telephone company Otherwise it will be ignored or replaced by another number When using a private network the extension number assigned for each extension through system programming is sent for CLIP COLP gt 1 29 4 2 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP and Calling Connected Name Identification Presentation CNIP CONP by QSIG PT Programming Manual References 003 Extension Number 422 BRI Subscriber Number 606 CLIP COLP Number Feature Guide References 1 19 2 Flexible Buttons User Manual References 1 7 4 Displaying Your Telephone Number on the Called Party and Caller s Telephone Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP 1 7 5 Preventing Your Telephone Number Being Displayed on the Caller s Telephone Connected Line Identification Restriction COLR 1 7 6 Preventing Your Number Being Displayed on the Called Party s Telephone Calling Line Identification Restriction CLIR Feature Guide 215 1 20 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN Service Features 1 20 1 3 Advice of Charge AOC
47. CS software data Flash ROM on the CS Conditions e The software version of the EMPR or MPR can be confirmed through system programming Installation Manual References KX TDA100 KX TDA200 2 3 1 MPR Card KX TDA600 2 3 1 EMPR Card PT Programming Manual References 190 Main Processing MPR Software Version Reference Feature Guide 377 2 4 Fault Recovery Diagnostics 2 2 4 1 378 4 Fault Recovery Diagnostics Power Failure Transfer Description When the power supply to the PBX fails specific SLTs and or ISDN terminal devices are automatically connected to specific trunks Power Failure Connections The PBX will switch from normal operation to the Power Failure Connections and all existing conversations will be disconnected Only the trunks handled by Power Failure Connections can be used during a power failure Conditions General Only trunk calls can be made during a power failure All other features do not work DC Power Source If the DC power is available from backup batteries even if the AC power fails the PBX will remain fully operational KX TDA600 The analogue trunk cards and extension cards as well as the number of PFT ports ports which can be used for Power Failure Connections are as follows Trunk Cards ELCOT16 4 PFT ports Extension Cards EMSLC16 4 PFT ports ESLC 16 4 PFT ports DHLC8 2 PFT ports SLC 8 2 PFT ports Only connect one extension c
48. CT Mailbox 201 Di my desk right now d d Mailbox 202 Ser e Extn 20 Extn VPS Fwd to VPS 202 Explanation Extension 201 does not answer the outside call so the call is forwarded to the VPS and answered by mailbox 201 If the outside caller leaves a message the VPS sends a Message Waiting notification to the extension using Enhanced QSIG information over the private network When forwarding the call PBX 2 sends any received call information Caller ID number name DDI number along with the VM trunk group number to use applicable time mode and extension number and forwarding reason of the original destination extension to PBX 1 as Enhanced QSIG information Multiple VPSs More than one PBX in the network can have a VPS connected and each VPS can provide voice mail services for extensions connected to other PBXs in the network Conditions Hardware Requirement The KX TDA6920 KX TDA0920 or KX TDA3920 SD Memory Card for Software Upgrade to Enhanced Version must be installed in the PBX connected to the VPS and in all PBXs that will use this feature All PBXs in the network must be TDA series PBXs Only KX TVA KX TVM series VPSs connected using DPT integration support this feature Only extension numbers of 4 digits or less using the Extension Number Method are supported gt 1 29 1 TIE Line Service Mailboxes for extensions connected to other PBXs in the network must be set up manually An
49. C__ Check in button C Room105 CL Check out button When in Room Status Control mode the hotel operator s extension is treated as a busy extension similar to when performing PT programming Callers to that extension will hear a busy tone Feature Guide 271 1 26 Hospitality Features All other operations including pressing other Room Status Control buttons will be ignored In addition the lights of fixed and flexible buttons do not show their normal display pattern In order to perform other operations the hotel operator must exit Room Status Control mode Conditions An EMEC or MEC card must be installed to use guest billing functions A maximum of one for KX TDA30 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 or four for KX TDA600 hotel operators can be assigned Only one of each type of Room Status Control button can be assigned Extensions associated with rooms must be one of the following types PT including IP PT SLT ISDN Extension T1 OPX PSs cannot be checked in and out as room extensions It is recommended that the extension number of a room extension is the same or similar to the room number for convenience The previous guest s billing data is only cleared when an extension is set back to Check in status Thus it is possible to edit guest charge data and reprint the bill at any time until another guest is checked in to the same room If enabled through system programming the check in and check out informatio
50. Call Log System programming is required for this operation e Ifthe Outgoing Call Log is used to redial an outside party or a number already stored in the Outgoing Call Log is manually redialled again the number will be stored in the call log multiple times However calls made using the REDIAL button are not stored in the Outgoing Call Log again e Itis possible to change the number of records that can be stored at each extension through system programming PT Programming Manual References 205 Automatic Redial Repeat Times 206 Automatic Redial Interval Feature Guide References 3 1 Capacity of System Resources User Manual References 1 2 3 Redial 1 12 1 Using the Call Log Feature Guide 101 1 6 Memory Dialling Features 1 6 1 5 Speed Dialling Personal System Description An extension user can make calls using abbreviated dialling for frequently dialled numbers which are stored in the PBX extension data or the PBX system data Personal Speed Dialling is also known as Station Speed Dialling Conditions General e Any number e g telephone number feature number can be stored in a speed dialling number A name can be assigned to each Personal Speed Dialling number through personal programming and System Speed Dialling number e Call Directory Speed Dialling Display PT users can make a call by selecting stored names on the display Personal Speed Dialling e Display Lock An extension user ca
51. Configuration 427 BRI TEI Mode Feature Guide References 1 29 4 QSIG Standard Features Feature Guide 213 1 20 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN Service Features 1 20 1 2 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP Description Calling Line Identification Presentation CLIP The PBX can send a preprogrammed telephone number to the network when an extension user makes a call The called party can see the number on his telephone display before answering the call Connected Line Identification Presentation COLP The PBX sends a preprogrammed telephone number to the network when the extension user answers an incoming call The caller can see the number of the answering party on his telephone display when the call is answered CLIP Example 1 Dials 2 12345678 87654321 is displayed V PBX i e gt jt Caller Called party CLIP COLP No 12345678 CLIP COLP No 87654321 COLP Example 1 Dials de d Called party 111222333 2 A IS CLIP COLP No 111222333 PBX ea i FWD IRNA etc vt CLIPICOLP No 3 111222444 S SS is displayed 111222444 2 Answers the call CLIP COLP Number The telephone numbers sent to the network for CLIP COLP can be assigned as follows e CLIP COLP number for each ISDN port subscriber s number e CLIP COLP number for each extension e CLIP COLP number for each incoming call
52. DND 1 3 1 1 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND SUMMARY Description When an extension user cannot answer calls e g he is busy or not at his desk it is possible to forward or refuse calls using the following features 1 Call Forwarding FWD 2 Do Not Disturb DND 1 FWD Extensions and incoming call distribution groups can forward their incoming calls to preset destinations gt 1 3 1 2 Call Forwarding FWD 2 DND Callers to an extension will hear a tone to inform them that the extension user is not available gt 1 3 1 3 Do Not Disturb DND 3 FWD DND Button Group FWD Button The FWD DND fixed button or a customised flexible button can display the FWD DND setting status of the extension 1 3 1 4 FWD DND Button Group FWD Button Conditions e FWD and DND are set for intercom calls including doorphone calls and trunk calls including a call from an extension that placed a trunk call on a consultation hold separately Feature Guide 65 1 3 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND Features 1 3 1 2 Call Forwarding FWD Description Extensions and incoming call distribution groups can forward their calls to preset destinations There are several different types of forwarding and the circumstances under which the calls are forwarded for each type differ as follows Type Circumstance All Calls Any time Follow Me When an extension user fails to set this feature before leavi
53. DND gt 1 3 1 3 Do Not Disturb DND is set for incoming calls it is programmable whether your extension receives paging through system programming PT Programming Manual References 640 Extension User Groups of a Paging Group 641 External Pagers of a Paging Group Feature Guide References 3 1 Capacity of System Resources User Manual References 1 6 1 Paging 1 6 2 Answering Denying a Paging Announcement Feature Guide 157 1 15 Broadcasting Features 1 15 Broadcasting Features 1 15 1 Broadcasting Description A PT user can call multiple parties assigned as members of a group broadcasting group to make a voice announcement After one member answers the call the caller can begin to make an announcement Other members telephones will continue to ring and each member can listen to the announcement by answering the call The caller will hear a confirmation tone every time the members answer the call During the announcement the voices of members will not be heard However the caller can allow specific members to speak making a conference call A maximum of four parties can participate in the conference call simultaneously This conversation can be heard by the other members Broadcasting Group Eight broadcasting groups can be programmed and a maximum of 31 members can be assigned to each group The available destinations as members of the broadcasting group are as follows Destination Availabili
54. Example of Queuing Time Table Queuing Time Sequence Table No Sequence 01 Sequence 02 Sequence 03 Sequence 04 01 OGM 01 6x5s OGM 03 Overflow 02 2 OGM 02 6x5s OGM 04 None 03 631 Sequences in Queuing Time Table If a call has not reached a destination by the time the final sequence is completed the call will be disconnected 54 Feature Guide 1 2 Receiving Group Features Explanation for Queuing Time Table 01 Queuing Time Table 01 Th i Sequence 01 Sequence 02 Sequence 03 Sequence 04 Overflow e ca TON queues I gt OGM 01 is sent gt Music S Hold gt OGM 03 is sent gt Ee to gt de genge e Wearesonyio 227 calling Panasonic i keep you holding g The department you The department are calling is busy is still busy We Please hold the line are transferring We will answer your you to the call shortly operator L i l I The call is connected to the member extension as soon as the extension becomes available Conditions e Ifthe call is transferred to the incoming call distribution group and is handled by the Queuing Time Table Transfer Recall will not occur even if the Transfer Recall time expires e Manual Queue Redirection It is possible to redirect the longest waiting call in a queue to the overflow destination by pressing the Hurry up button If th
55. Exception Table No Is the dialled number found in the Leading Number Table 8 Yes Checks the Routing Plan Table 4 to determine which carrier to use Is the carrier found in the No appropriate time block Yes Is there an available trunk group Q Because all ves trunks are busy Modifies the dialled number by Yes i igi fault removing the digits and Is normal de following the modify commands E Sends the modified number Sends a Sends a to the trunk busy tone reorder tone Sends the telephone number by the Idle Line Access 126 Feature Guide 1 9 Automatic Route Selection ARS Features Programming Procedures 1 ARS Mode Assignment It is possible to select whether ARS operates when an extension user makes a call using any Idle Line Access method or when an extension user makes a call using any Trunk Access method 1 5 5 3 Trunk Access 820 ARS Mode Leading Number Exception Table Assignment Store the telephone numbers that will avoid using the ARS feature 325 ARS Exception Number 2 ARS Leading Number Exception Table Location Leading No No Exception 001 033555 06456 Leading Number Table Assignment Store the area codes and or telephone numbers as leading number that will be routed by the ARS fea
56. Extn 100 Extn 101 103 Extn 104 Extn 105 l l l 2 1 Call Pickup Group Using the Group Call Pickup feature extensions can answer any calls within a specified group One extension user group can belong to several call pickup groups 1 4 1 3 Call Pickup 650 Extension User Groups of a Pickup Group Example Extension User Group 4 Extension Extension Extension User Group 1 User Group 2 User Group 3 if DD Di Extn 100 Extn 101 Extn 102 Extn 103 Extn 104 Extn 105 344 Feature Guide 2 2 System Configuration Software 2 2 Paging Group Using the Paging feature extensions can make a page to any paging groups or answer a page to their own groups One extension user group or external pager can belong to several paging groups gt 1 14 1 Paging 640 Extension User Groups of a Paging Group Example Paging Group 1 Paging Group 2 Paging Group 3 Extension Extension Extension User Group 1 User Group 2 User Group 3 fe 88 Di Extn 100 Extn 101 Extn 102 Extn 103 Extn 104 Extn 105 Paging Group 4 Pager 1 Pager 2 Idle Extension Hunting Group If a called extension is busy or in DND mode Idle Extension Hunting redirects the incoming call to an idle member of the same idle extension hunting group which can be programmed through system programming Idle extensions are automatically searched according to a preprogrammed hunting type Circular Hunting or Terminated Hunting
57. Guide Section 2 System Configuration and Administration Features Feature Guide 339 2 1 System Configuration Hardware 2 1 2 1 1 System Configuration Hardware Extension Port Configuration Description There are three types of extension ports as follows a DPT Port DPT DSS Console Panasonic VPS DPT Digital Integration or PT interface CS e g KX TDA0141 can be connected b SLT Port SLT or Panasonic VPS DTMF Integration can be connected c Super Hybrid Port DPT APT SLT DSS Console Panasonic VPS or PT interface CS can be connected EXtra Device Port XDP of Super Hybrid Ports A DPT and SLT can be connected to one Super Hybrid port TR SLT HL DPT In this case the SLT port TR of the Super Hybrid port can be used as an XDP port to connect an SLT as a sub telephone There are two modes for the XDP port as follows Mode Description Parallel Mode The DPT and SLT have the same extension number so that they can act as one extension They use the main telephone s DPT s extension data e g extension number COS gt 1 10 9 Parallelled Telephone XDP Mode The DPT and SLT have different extension numbers so that they can act as completely different extensions To use XDP mode XDP mode must be enabled on the port through system programming Conditions Automatic Detection on Super Hybrid Port A DPT SLT or PT interface CS connected to a Super Hyb
58. Guide 1 7 Busy Line Busy Party Features 1 7 4 2 Call Waiting Tone Description When an extension user attempts to call a busy extension ringing or having a conversation the Call Waiting tone can be sent to the called extension to let him know another call is waiting Conditions e This feature only works if the called extension has activated Call Waiting If it is activated the calling extension will hear a ringback tone e Call Waiting tone can be selected Tone 1 or Tone 2 through personal programming Call Waiting Tone Type Selection PT Programming Manual References None User Manual References 1 7 3 Receiving Call Waiting Call Waiting Off hook Call Announcement OHCA Whisper OHCA 3 1 2 Settings on the Programming Mode Feature Guide 111 1 7 Busy Line Busy Party Features 1 7 4 3 Off hook Call Announcement OHCA Description An extension user can talk with a busy extension through the built in speaker and microphone of the called party s PT If the existing call is using a handset a second conversation is made using the speakerphone and microphone so that the called extension can talk to both parties Conditions e COS programming determines which extensions can use this feature e This feature is available when the called extension uses one of the following telephones KX T7625 KX T7630 KX T7633 KX T7636 KX T7536 KX T7436 KX T7235 except KX T7235G FR SL NE e If the KX T7
59. MSG card e This feature is only effective for calls arriving on DISA lines e Ifa fax signal is not detected before the DISA Intercept Routing No Dial timer expires the call is redirected to the operator extension and fax detection ends Feature Guide 177 1 16 Optional Device Features Installation Manual References 2 5 4 MSG2 Card PT Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 16 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA 3 2 Exclusive Features Table 178 Feature Guide 1 16 Optional Device Features 1 16 8 Built in Simplified Voice Message SVM Description Installing an optional Simplified Voice Message SVM card in the PBX allows the PBX to provide answering machine features This feature is only available for the KX TDA30O Features for an extension user with a message box An extension user can record a personal greeting message to greet a caller and ask him to leave a voice message The user can also play back and clear greeting messages and the voice messages left by callers Feature for a caller A caller can leave a voice message after hearing the greeting message Up to two SVM cards can be installed in the PBX Each card is assigned a floating extension number default 591 for SVM card 1 and 592 for SVM card 2 A card has two channels allowing two users to access a single card at the same time When an extension is assigned to an SVM card through system programming a message bo
60. Manual References 1 2 5 Accessing the ISDN Service ISDN Service Access 228 Feature Guide 1 21 E1 Line Service Features 1 21 E1 Line Service Features 1 21 1 E1 Line Service Description The E1 line carries thirty 64 kbps voice channels at 2 048 Mbps transmission speed as a trunk or private line Voice is digitised by Pulse Code Modulation PCM 1 Channel Type DR2 Digital System R2 E amp M C Continuous E amp M E amp M P Pulsed EA M The E1 card supports three different channel types to provide connection at minimum expense One of the three channel types can be assigned to each of the 30 channels of the E1 card individually according to tariffs and customer needs E1 Features The following table shows the features available for each channel type Feature Table 1 2 3 4 5 Channel Type TIE DID DIL ANI Call Charge Information DR2 Vv Vv v Vv EA M C vi vi vi ve E amp M P Vv Vv Vv ke w Available 1 Receiving Dial Mode should be MFC R2 2 Available when this PBX is connected to the KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 or KX TD500 Explanation Number in ar the table Feature Description 1 TIE Line Service Refer to the TIE Line Service feature gt 1 29 1 TIE Line Service 2 Direct Inward Dialling Refer to the DID feature gt 1 1 1 3 Direct Inward Dialling DID DID Direct Dialling In DDI 3 Direct In Line DIL Refer to the
61. PBX has access to multiple telephone companies a Special Carrier Access code assigned through system programming is required every time a trunk call is made without using ARS A preprogrammed Pause time will be automatically inserted between the user dialled Special Carrier Access code and the subsequent digits gt 1 5 4 7 Pause Insertion Conditions e TRS Barring TRS Barring checks only the dialled telephone number excluding the Special Carrier Access code gt 1 8 1 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring e ARS A pause is not automatically inserted between the user dialled access code and the subsequent digits when the ARS mode is enabled 1 9 1 Automatic Route Selection ARS e If this PBX is installed behind an existing host PBX A Special Carrier Access code and a Host PBX Access code should be assigned separately these codes cannot be assigned together as one code 1 5 4 8 Host PBX Access Code Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX PT Programming Manual References 303 Special Carrier Access Code Feature Guide References 1 9 1 Automatic Route Selection ARS 3 1 Capacity of System Resources Feature Guide 91 1 5 Making Call Features 1 5 5 Seizing a Line Features 1 5 5 1 Seizing a Line Features SUMMARY Description An extension user can select the line seized for making calls by the following methods Feature Description amp Reference Line Preference Outgoing A
62. Receiving Group Features 1 2 2 7 Log in Log out Description Members of an incoming call distribution group can join Log in or leave Log out the group manually They can leave the group temporarily when they are away from their desks to prevent calls being sent to their extensions They can return to the group when they are ready to answer calls Wrap up While logged in amember extension can have a preprogrammed time period automatically for refusing calls after completing the previous call Wrap up time While the Wrap up timer is active calls to all incoming call distribution groups to which the extension belongs will skip the extension so that the extension user can perform necessary tasks such as reporting on the previous call Wrap up mode can also be activated manually Not Ready by pressing the Wrap up button Log in Log out and Wrap up Status Example lt When the incoming call distribution group is in Priority Hunting distribution method gt Ready Waiting for a call Incoming call Log in Press the iers button X ot Read Answering a call The Wrap up Making a report time expires temporary break dA After completing Press the L WS Extn Extn Extn Extn Extn 101 102 103 104 105 106 Ready Not Ready Wrap up Ready the call H Wrap up button y Wrap up Extn Making a report 102 Log out Condit
63. SLT will not ring For users in other countries areas Both the APT and the SLT will ring for incoming calls and the PBX cannot refuse calls arriving at the SLT DPT SLT It is programmable whether to have the DPT and SLT in either parallel or XDP mode Regardless of the mode the SLT can be connected directly to the XDP port of the DPT or to a modular T adapter with the DPT When in parallel mode it is programmable whether the SLT rings for incoming calls Ring on Both telephones ring except when the PT is in Hands free Answerback mode gt 1 4 1 4 Hands free Answerback or voice calling mode Alternate Receiving Ring Voice 1 5 3 Intercom Call Ring off Only the PT rings However the SLT can answer the call Both telephones cannot engage in calls simultaneously If one telephone goes off hook while the other is on a call the call is switched to the former The call is not switched in the following cases a While being monitored by another extension 1 5 3 Intercom Call b While receiving OHCA 1 7 4 3 Off hook Call Announcement OHCA or Whisper OHCA gt 1 7 4 4 Whisper OHCA c During a Conference call gt 1 13 1 Conference Features d While Live Call Screening LCS or Two way Record is activated gt 1 23 3 Voice Mail DPT Digital Integration Feature Guide 141 1 10 Conversation Features DPT DPT e Capable Telephones KX T7600 series except KX T7640 Note that the KX
64. Subscriber Number MSN Ringing Service Calling Line Identification Presentation CLIP Sends the caller s telephone number to the network when making a call The called party can see the number on his telephone display before answering the call 1 20 1 2 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP Connected Line Identification Presentation COLP Sends the telephone number of the answered party to the network when answering a call The caller can see the number on his telephone display when the line is connected 1 20 1 2 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP Calling Line Identification Restriction CLIR Prevents the caller s CLI being presented to the called party by the caller 1 20 1 2 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP Connected Line Identification Restriction COLR Prevents COLP being sent by the answered party 1 20 1 2 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP Subaddressing SUB You may add digits after the telephone number These digits will be passed to ISDN terminal device User to user Signalling Type 1 UUS 1 Transmits a specified volume of the data through the D channel between the ISDN terminal devices of different PBXs using UUS types 1 Advice of Charge AOC The PBX can receive the call charge information on ISDN lines from the telephone company
65. Telephone Mode set cancel 39 39 39 Group Call Pickup 40 40 40 Directed Call Pickup 41 41 41 TAFAS Calls through an External Pager 42 42 42 Group Paging answer 43 43 43 Automatic Callback Busy cancel CCBS 46 46 46 cancel User Remote Operation Walking COS 47 47 47 Verification Code Entry Wireless XDP Parallel Mode set cancel 48 48 48 Account Code Entry 49 49 49 Feature Guide 2 3 System Data Control Feature Default Pattern 1 Pattern 2 with without KX TDA30 KX KX TDA600 TDA100 KX TDA200 Call Hold Call Hold Retrieve 50 50 50 Call Hold Retrieve Specified with a 51 51 51 Holding Extension Number Call Park Call Park Retrieve 52 52 52 Call Hold Retrieve Specified with a Held 53 53 53 Trunk Number Door Open 55 55 55 External Relay 56 56 56 External Feature Access 60 x60 60 ISDN Hold 62 62 None COLR set cancel ix 7 0 7x0 CLIR set cancel 7 1 7 1 Zi Switch CLIP COLP of the Trunk Extension 7 2 7X2 7 2 MCID 7 3 7 3 None ISDN FWD set cancel confirm 7 5 X7 5 None Message Waiting set cancel callback 70 70 70 FWD DND set cancel Both 710 710 710 FWD DND set cancel External x711 x711 711 FWD DND set cancel Internal 712 712 712 FWD DND No Answer Timer set 713 713 713 Group FWD set cancel Both 714 714 714 Group FWD set cancel External 715 715 715 Group F
66. Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring 1 9 1 Automatic Route Selection ARS 1 11 1 Call Transfer 1 16 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA 2 3 6 Flexible Numbering Fixed Numbering 3 1 Capacity of System Resources User Manual References 1 2 1 Basic Calling Feature Guide 305 1 29 Networking Features 1 29 2 Voice over Internet Protocol VoIP Network Description The PBX can connect to another PBX via a private IP network In this case voice signals are converted into IP packets VoIP and sent through this network VoIP networks support private network communications using TIE line service Example Telephone Company Extn 1000 Ji E Extn 2000 Private IP F Network P Router Router Extn 1999 8 iE Extn 2999 HE TRG 2 SS Dials 2999 PBX 3 Extn 3000 lt lt gt IP Gw Router Is Extn 3999 Required Programming e PBX For making a call ARS programming 1 9 1 Automatic Route Selection ARS or TIE line service programming For receiving a call TIE line service programming TIE Line Routing and Modification Table Priority 1 Priority 2 Dial Modification Dial Modification Location Leading No No TRG Removed TRG Removed No of Added No No of Added No Digits Digits 01 2 2 VoIP 0 port 02 3 2 0 306 Feature Guide 1 29 Networking Features Priority 1 P
67. VPS e o The VPS receives the DTMF status signal and send the appropriate message to the caller Sorry The extension is busy Would you like to leave a message Conditions Voice Mail VM Transfer Button A flexible button can be customised as the Voice Mail VM Transfer button with the floating extension number of the VM group as the parameter It is possible to assign the time period between when the VPS answers the call and the PBX sends the Follow on ID to the VPS It is possible to assign the time period between when the VPS transfers the call using the AA service to the PBX and the PBX sends the DTMF status signal to the VPS It is possible to select whether the mailbox number is the same as the extension number or the mailbox number is programmable for each extension number and incoming call distribution group Mailbox Access ID The Inter digit time for the DTMF command and for DTMF status signal is programmable Data Line Security is set automatically on the extensions in the VM DTMF group to achieve proper recording gt 1 10 5 Data Line Security PT Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 1 1 6 Intercept Routing 1 3 1 2 Call Forwarding FWD 1 11 1 Call Transfer 1 19 2 Flexible Buttons 1 23 1 Voice Mail VM Group User Manual References 1 9 5 If a Voice Processing System is Connected Feature Guide 241 1 23 Voice Mail Features 1 23 3 Voice Mail
68. access their features Charge Reference Used to check the total call charge for your own extension Call Park Used to park or retrieve a call in a preset PBX parking zone Call Park Automatic Park Zone Used to park a call in an idle PBX parking zone automatically Call Log Used to show the incoming call information Feature Guide 1 19 Proprietary Telephone PT Features Button Usage Log in Log out Used to switch between log in and log out mode Hurry up Used to redirect the longest waiting call in the queue of an incoming call distribution group to the overflow destination Wrap up Used to switch the Wrap up Not Ready and Ready modes System Alarm Used to confirm a PBX error Time Service Used to switch the assigned time modes day lunch break or night Also used to check the current time mode status Answer Used to answer an incoming call Release Used to disconnect the line during or after a conversation or to complete a Call Transfer Toll Restriction Call Barring Used to change the TRS Barring level of other extension users temporarily ISDN Service Used to access an ISDN service Calling Line Identification Restriction CLIR Used to switch between the CLIP and CLIR service Connected Line Identification Restriction COLR Used to switch between the COLP and COLR service ISDN Hold Used
69. and Calling Connected Name Identification Presentation CNIP CONP by QSIG Description Calling Line Name Identification Presentation CLIP CNIP The PBX can send a preprogrammed extension number and or name to the QSIG network when an extension user makes a call The called party can see the number and or name on his telephone display before answering the call Connected Line Name Identification Presentation COLP CONP The PBX sends a preprogrammed extension number and or name to the QSIG network when the extension user answers an incoming call The caller can see the number and or name of the answering party on his telephone display when the call is answered CLIP CNIP Example 2 John n n 101 1 Dials 202 is displayed 1 CLIP 101 CNIP John V j j Caller Called party Extn No 101 Extn No 202 Extn Name John COLP CONP Example 1 Dials 203 IS CG led party SE A Is Extn No 203 Extn Name Tom PBX 1 PBX 2 Se FWD IRNA etc eer COLP 204 Answering party 3 Paul CONP Paul Ke Extn No 204 204 Extn Name Paul is displayed 2 Answers the call CLIP COLP Number The extension number sent to the QSIG network for CLIP COLP can be assigned for each extension through system programming CNIP CONP Name The extension name sent to the QSIG network for CNIP CONP can be assigned for each extension thr
70. and transferred between PBXs gt 1 29 1 TIE Line Service In the programming example that follows the PBXs in the network use the Extension Number method as shown in the illustration above However the PBX Access Code method can also be used 2 Network PBX ID Assignment Assign a Network PBX ID to each PBX in the network e IDs 1 8 Can monitor extensions at other PBXs and transmit monitor data about local extensions Each ID number can be assigned to one PBX within the network e IDO Retransmits monitor data throughout the network This ID number can be assigned to multiple PBXs 320 Feature Guide 1 29 Networking Features 3 QSIG Port Setting Monitored PBX ISDN QSIG PBX Direct Connection Each QSIG port of a BRI or PRI card that will be used to transmit extension status information must be set to do so through system programming Even if a port is set to not transmit information it will still receive information from other PBXs Transmit Extension Status Information Functions Enabled Transmit information on own PBX extensions Receive information from other PBXs forward it to other QSIG ports of the PBX Re transmit information received by other QSIG ports of the PBX Disabled Receive information from other PBXs forward it to other QSIG ports of the PBX Set the transmission setting for each port according to the layout of your network so that extension status information can tr
71. assigned for each outgoing message OGM which has a DISA floating extension number DISA Intercept Routing No Answer If a destination is not available to answer a DISA call within a preprogrammed time period DISA Intercept time after the call is reached the call will be redirected to the programmed destination by the Intercept feature If the intercept destination is not available to answer the call within a preprogrammed time period DISA Disconnect Time after Intercept after the DISA Intercept time expires the call will be disconnected 604 Extension Intercept Destination Walking COS Through DISA If the caller performs Walking COS extension number and PIN entry while hearing a DISA message the security mode can be temporarily changed to No Security mode 1 8 5 Walking COS After performing Walking COS the following features are available using the settings of the specified extension 170 Feature Guide 1 16 Optional Device Features Intercom call e TIE line call e Trunk call e Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND setting gt 1 3 1 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND e Incoming Call Distribution Group Log in Log out 1 2 2 7 Log in Log out e Absent Message setting gt 1 18 2 Absent Message e Extension Dial Lock 1 8 3 Extension Dial Lock e Time Service Switching Mode gt 2 2 4 Time Service DISA Automatic Walking COS Registered outside destinations such as ce
72. assigned number and name are shown on display PTs during intercom calls DSS Button It is possible to access another extension with one touch by pressing the corresponding Direct Station Selection DSS button A flexible button can be customised as a DSS button Call Directory Extension Dialling A display PT user can make a call by selecting one of the stored names on the display Alternate Receiving Ring Voice A PT user can select to receive intercom calls by ring tone or by voice through personal programming Alternate Receiving Ring Voice If a user selects voice calling the calling party talks to the user immediately after a confirmation tone Denying voice calling can also be selected Alternate Calling Ring Voice A caller can change the called party s preset call receiving method ring tone or voice temporarily By doing so ring calling is switched to voice calling or vice versa at the called party The called party may deny voice calling Tone after Dialling After dialling an extension number a user will hear one of the following Type Description Ringback Tone Indicates the called party is being called Confirmation Tone Indicates the called party has set voice calling Busy Tone Indicates the called party is busy DND Tone Indicates the called party has set DND PT Programming Manual References 003 Extension Number 004 Extension Name Feature Guide References 1 19 2 Flexible
73. battery There is no memory loss except the memories of Automatic Callback Busy Camp on 1 7 1 Automatic Callback Busy Camp on and Call Park gt 1 12 2 Call Park 380 Feature Guide 2 4 Fault Recovery Diagnostics 2 4 3 Local Alarm Information Description When a PBX error occurs and the PBX detects it the System Alarm button light on the PT of an extension which is allowed to use this feature through system programming a maximum of two extensions per PBX turns on red Pressing the button will show the error number on the display If multiple errors occur the error number will be displayed in order of highest priority to lowest The System Alarm button light turns off automatically after all error numbers have been displayed For details about the errors and their solutions refer to the Installation Manual Error Example ERR 100 10000 1 2 lt Jee lee Jee Explanation Number in the E Item Description Example 1 Error Code Shows 3 digit error code 2 Sub Code Shows five digit sub code XKYYZZ X Cabinet number 1 4 YY Slot number 00 11 ZZ Physical port number 01 16 Conditions e System Alarm Button A flexible button can be customised as the System Alarm button e If an extension allowed to utilise this feature uses PC Console or PC Phone the alarm information will be displayed on the PC and can be sent to the preprogrammed destination vi
74. button which shows other light patterns the other light patterns also show only as Red On PT Programming Manual References None User Manual References 3 1 3 Customising the Buttons 204 Feature Guide Description 1 19 3 LED Indication 1 19 Proprietary Telephone PT Features The LED Light Emitting Diode of the Message Ringer Lamp and following buttons Line Status Buttons and Corresponding Extension Status Button show line conditions with a variety of light patterns Line Status Buttons S CO G CO L CO INTERCOM ICD Group Corresponding Extension Status Button DSS 1 Light Pattern of the Message Ringer Lamp DPT e Incoming call from a trunk Red flashing e Incoming call from another extension Green flashing e Message s present no incoming call Red on e No message s present no incoming call Off e Incoming call Red flashing e Message s present no incoming call Red on e No message s present no incoming call Off 2 Light Pattern of the Line Status Buttons Line Status Button Exclusive Hold Incoming Call Light Pattern Trunk Status Intercom Line Distribution Status Group Line Status S CO G CO L CO INTERCOM ICD Group Off Idle Green on This extension is using the line Slow green This extension is holding the line flashing Moderate green This extension is holding the line using Exclusive Hold or using the line for an Unattend
75. call is routed to the The call is routed to the CLI destination DID DDI destination operator Intercept Routing No Destination Calling Line Identification CLI Distribution If the CLI routing is enabled and the caller s identification number is assigned in the Caller ID Table the call will not be routed to the DID DDI destination but routed to the CLI destination 22 Feature Guide 1 1 Incoming Call Features Programming Example of DID DDI Table DDI can be programmed as DID CLI Destination Location No Name Day Lunch SE Day Lunch 0001 123 4567 John White Enable Disable we 105 100 0002 123 2468 Tom Smith Enable Disable bag 102 100 0003 123 456 A company Enable Disable dy 101 101 1 451 DID Number 2 452 DID Name 2 453 DID Destination Note Tenant number and VPS trunk group number can also be assigned in the DID DDI table Tenant number is used to determine the time mode day lunch break night for the corresponding DID DDI number VPS trunk group number is used in Voice Mail DPT Digital Integration gt 1 23 3 Voice Mail DPT Digital Integration Explanation If the DID DDI number is 123 4567 1 Checks the number in the table Matches the number in location 0001 2 Checks the time mode In Day mode CLI is enabled Route to CLI destination In Lunch mode CLI is disabled Route to DID DDI destina
76. card in the PBX allows a separate set of entries with a maximum of 8 digits to be programmed Installation Manual References KX TDA30 2 5 7 MEC Card KX TDA100 KX TDA200 2 3 2 MEC Card KX TDA0105 KX TDA600 2 3 2 EMEC Card KX TDA6105 PT Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 29 3 Virtual Private Network VPN 3 1 Capacity of System Resources User Manual References 1 2 2 Easy Dialling 104 Feature Guide 1 6 Memory Dialling Features 1 6 1 7 Hot Line Description An extension user can set his extension to automatically dial a preprogrammed telephone or extension number whenever he goes off hook If the Hot Line feature is set a dial tone is generated for a specified Waiting time assigned through system programming when the user goes off hook During the Waiting time the user can dial another party overriding the Hot Line feature If no number is dialled the preprogrammed number will automatically start being dialled This feature is also known as Pickup Dialling Conditions e Capable Telephone PT SLT T1 OPX and PS PT Programming Manual References 204 Hot Line Waiting Time Feature Guide References 3 1 Capacity of System Resources User Manual References 1 2 2 Easy Dialling Feature Guide 105 1 7 Busy Line Busy Party Features 1 7 1 7 1 Busy Line Busy Party Features Automatic Callback Busy Camp on Description If the destination or li
77. company informs the extension user of another incoming trunk call that is waiting He can answer the second call by disconnecting the current call or placing it on hold using EFA For details consult your telephone company Call Waiting Caller ID Visual Caller ID When using the call waiting tone supplied by the telephone company over analogue lines the waiting caller s telephone number can be received The number will flash on the display for five seconds followed by a 10 second pause then flash again for five seconds Note that the received caller information will not be displayed on telephones or wireless phones connected to SLT ports Feature Guide 41 1 1 Incoming Call Features PT Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 7 4 Second Call Notification to Busy Extension 1 17 2 Incoming Call Log 1 25 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR User Manual References 1 4 4 Answering Call Waiting 1 7 3 Receiving Call Waiting Call Waiting Off hook Call Announcement OHCA Whisper OHCA 3 1 2 Settings on the Programming Mode 42 Feature Guide 1 2 Receiving Group Features 1 2 Receiving Group Features 1 2 1 Idle Extension Hunting Description If a called extension is busy or in DND mode Idle Extension Hunting redirects the incoming call to an idle member of the same idle extension hunting group which can be programmed through system programming Idle extensions are automatically searched acc
78. conversation or the called extension user s reply unless the called extension user puts the current party on hold and switches to the waiting caller Conditions e COS programming determines which extensions can use this feature e This feature is available when the calling and called extension use one of the following telephones KX T7600 series KX T7500 series KX T7400 series except KX T7451 IP PT e Ifthe Whisper OHCA feature cannot be used due to COS or telephone type the Call Waiting tone will be sent to the called extension 1 7 4 2 Call Waiting Tone e Ifthe called extension does not use a KX T7600 KX T7500 or KX T7400 series telephone or an IP PT but forces Whisper OHCA the announcement may be heard by the other party e Itis possible to enable Whisper OHCA on any telephone However it may not work properly eg The voice may be heard by the other party e While an extension is receiving Whisper OHCA if the extension user places the current trunk call on hold or transfers the current intercom call or trunk call Whisper OHCA will become disabled and the calling extension will start to hear a ringback tone e While an extension is receiving Whisper OHCA if the extension user places the current intercom call on hold the called extension can talk to the calling extension through the handset PT Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2 2 1 Class of Service COS User Manua
79. dial in hands free mode and cannot be used for hands free conversations PT Programming Manual References None Feature Guide 131 1 10 Conversation Features 1 10 2 Off hook Monitor Description A PT user can let others listen to the user s conversation through the built in speaker during a conversation using the handset Conditions e Capable Telephone KX T7400 series and KX T7500 series display PTs KX T7600 series telephones and IP PTs To enable this feature system programming is required If disabled hands free conversation is performed instead PT Programming Manual References None User Manual References 1 4 7 Letting Other People Listen to the Conversation Off hook Monitor 132 Feature Guide 1 10 Conversation Features 1 10 3 Mute Description During a conversation a PT user can disable the speaker microphone or the handset microphone to consult privately with others while listening to the other party on the phone through the built in speaker or the handset receiver The user can hear the other party s voice during Mute but cannot be heard Conditions e This feature is available with all PTs that have the AUTO ANS MUTE button User Manual References 1 4 6 Mute Feature Guide 133 1 10 Conversation Features 1 10 4 Headset Operation 134 Description This PBX allows the use of headset compatible PTs A PT user can talk to another party without lifting the handset For conn
80. digits 7 5 2 25 4 8 10 3 01 02 02 10 03AM 1200 01 lt I gt 12345678901234567890 5 15 00 00 00 NA 01 02 02 10 07AM 1200 01 lt l gt 0 05 00 01 05 9876543210 01 02 02 10 15AM 1200 01 1234567890123456 00 01 05 9876543210 TR 01 02 02 10 30AM 123 01 1234567890123456 00 01 05 9876543210 01 02 0201 07PM 1234 01 lt I gt ABC COMPANY12345678 0 05 00 01 05 9876543210 01 02 0201 07PM 1234 01 lt D gt CDE9876 lt I gt Q COMPANY 0 05 00 01 05 9876543210 01 02 0201 07PM 1234 01 ABC COMPANY12345678 00 01 05 01 02 0201 07PM 1234 01 123 00 01 05 01 02 0201 07PM 1234 01 123456XX 00 12 05 98765 01 02 02 08 33AM 1234 In the office 01 02 0201 07PM 1234 LOG IN 01 02 02 03 35PM 1234 LOG OUT 01 02 02 03 45PM 1234 EXT1235 00 03 05 01 02 02 03 50PM 1234 Check in 01 02 02 03 55PM 1234 Check out 01 02 0204 00PM 1234 Timed Reminder Start 01 02 02 04 01PM 1234 Timed Reminder No Answer 01 02 0204 01PM 1234 Timed Reminder Answer 01 02 0204 05PM 1234 lt l gt S003 RC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Pattern B 80 digits with call charge information Date Time Ext CO Dial Number Duration Cost ACC Code CD 8 digits 7 5 2 20 8 8 2 10 3 01 02 0210 03AM 1210 01 lt l gt NA 01 02 0210 07AM 2005 01 12345678901234567890 00 00 05 00560 00EU 9876543210 D D D D D D D D D D D D D 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 8 9 Pattern C 120 digits Date Time Ext CO Dial Number Ring Duration Cost
81. distribution group Each extension can select either the CLIP COLP number for the ISDN port or the extension to be used The CLIP COLP number for the incoming call distribution group is used when making a call by pressing the ICD Group button or receiving a call which arrives at the ICD Group button Calling Connected Line Identification Restriction CLIR COLR It is possible for each extension to restrict the sending of its telephone number to the network by pressing the CLIR button COLR button or entering the feature number 214 Feature Guide 1 20 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN Service Features Conditions The availability of this feature is dependent on the contract with the telephone company CLIP COLP features comply with the following European Telecommunication Standard ETS specifications ETS 300 092 Calling Line Identification Presentation CLIP supplementary service ETS 300 097 Connected Line Identification Presentation COLP supplementary service CLIR COLR features comply with the following European Telecommunication Standard ETS specifications ETS 300 093 Calling Line Identification Restriction CLIR supplementary service ETS 300 098 Connected Line Identification Restriction COLR supplementary service The CLIP COLP number for the connected ISDN port can be used for the ISDN terminal devices which cannot be assigned their own CLIP COLP number such as a doorphone COLP CLIR
82. done by assigning a virtual PS as a member of the ICD Group and then setting the number of a destination at another PBX as the forwarding destination for that virtual PS This allows multiple ICD groups at remote locations to receive calls together Telephone Company PBX 1 PBX 2 Private network ee melen re em zm rm rm mm pm TI t SE Vi rtual PS 3 i Conditions e Hardware Requirement The KX TDA6920 KX TDA0920 or KX TDA3920 SD Memory Card for Software Upgrade to Enhanced Version must be installed in the PBX that will support virtual PSs e The conditions for 1 2 2 3 Outside Destinations in Incoming Call Distribution Group also apply to this feature Feature Guide References 1 2 2 3 Outside Destinations in Incoming Call Distribution Group 1 24 6 Virtual PS 328 Feature Guide 1 29 Networking Features 1 29 6 1 PS Roaming by Network ICD Group Description One PS can be registered to up to 4 PBXs in a private network and a Network ICD group created for the PS at each PBX with virtual PSs set to forward to the other PBXs in the network When a call to the PS is received at one of the PBXs the call rings simultaneously at all PBXs in the network to which that PS is registered Telephone Company PBX 2 Private network ICD Group PBX 3 ed zm mm mm mm TT PBX 4 Each virtual PS is set to forward
83. e Extension Dial Lock e Executive Busy Override Deny e Hot Line e Timed Reminder Tone 3A 3B This tone is heard when e A called PS is being searched for e The recording time used by the Built in Simplified Voice Message feature reaches the limit e Any of the features below are performed e Account Code Entry e Consultation Hold e Answering a Timed Reminder call with no message e Answering a sensor call Tone 4A 4B This tone is heard when new messages have been recorded for the extension 280 Feature Guide Active even when distinctive dial tones are disabled 1 28 Audible Tone Features Conditions e Dial Tone Type A B It is possible to select dial tone type A or B for dial tones 1 through 4 If Type A is selected all dial tones 1 through 4 will become dial tone type A The dial tone type for the ARS feature can be selected separately If Type A is selected for the ARS dial tone 1A will be heard If Type B is selected dial tone 1B will be heard e Distinctive dial tones can be disabled When disabled dial tone 1 will be heard in all cases except those marked with in the table above e Dial Tone Patterns All dial tone patterns have a default gt 3 3 1 Tones Ring Tones e Only dial tone 1 is sent to the extensions in the VM DPT DTMF group 1 23 1 Voice Mail VM Group PT Programming Manual References None Feature Guide 281 1 28 Audible Tone Features 1 28 2 C
84. e rm mm mm D mm mm mm rm ad Extn 1011 012 345 1011 PBX code 20 PBX code 30 Feature Guide 307 1 29 Networking Features Number to dial to call that extension using a public trunk 9 trunk access number 012 345 1011 Quick Dialling Table Quick Dialling No Destination No 720 9012345 If the call cannot be completed using the VoIP network and the dialled leading number is found in the Quick Dialling Table the call will be automatically rerouted to a trunk and as specified by the corresponding destination number When a call is made using the VoIP network if the PBX does not receive a reply from the other PBX within about 4 seconds of making the call or an error is returned the call is rerouted to a public trunk as specified Conditions e Some QSIG services are available 1 29 4 QSIG Standard Features e System programming selects whether or not calls can be automatically rerouted to public trunks e TRS Call Barring settings apply to calls rerouted to public trunks PT Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 29 1 TIE Line Service 308 Feature Guide 1 29 Networking Features 1 29 3 Virtual Private Network VPN Description Virtual Private Network VPN is a service provided by the telephone company It uses an existing line as if it were a private line There is no need to set up a private line or to lease a line from the tele
85. extension 1011 of PBX 2 Case 2 Extension 1011 of PBX 1 dials TIE line access number 7 PBX code 953 and extension number 1011 Extension 1011 of PBX 1 is connected to extension 1011 of PBX 3 Feature Guide 285 1 29 Networking Features 2 TIE Line and Trunk Connection To connect the TIE line with the trunk the following patterns are available 1 Trunk to TIE Access 2 TIE to Trunk Access 3 Trunk to TIE to Trunk Access 2 1 Trunk to TIE Access It is possible to assign an extension of another PBX as the destination of incoming trunk calls to the own PBX It is also possible to forward calls using a virtual PS Using this method trunk calls received at PBX 1 are forwarded directly to the extension at PBX 2 even when using the PBX Code method a Incoming Trunk Call Destination Assignment Example Telephone Company SS Sei Trunk op Line Network PBX 2 e rm e Interface P Bar Extn 2011 Extn 1011 i m E 5 oO S Outside Caller A d Dials 123 4567 Explanation An outside caller dials 123 4567 The call is sent to extension 2011 of PBX 2 through the TIE line according to the assignment of the DID call destination of PBX 1 gt 1 1 1 3 Direct Inward Dialling DID Direct Dialling In DDI 453 DID Destination 286 Feature Guide 1 29 Networking Features b FWD Call Transfer Intercept Routing to the TIE Line Example
86. extension can receive Message Waiting notifications from multiple VPSs connected to PBXs in the network When multiple notifications of the number of unheard messages in an extension user s message box are sent from different VPSs the most recent notification will be displayed Whether or not Enhanced QSIG information is transmitted can be set in the TIE table When PBXs are connected by PRI23 cards the card must be set to ISDN Standard mode If set to T1 mode the card must be removed and reinstalled to allow the mode to be changed When the card is Feature Guide 1 29 Networking Features reinserted into the PBX it is possible to choose whether the card will be set to T1 mode or ISDN Standard mode The default is ISDN Standard e Transfer to Mailbox It is possible to transfer calls to a mailbox of a VPS at another PBX by creating a flexible button containing the following T extension number of VPS at other PBX 6 Then the extension user can transfer calls to a mailbox by pressing this key entering the mailbox number and going on hook PT Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 23 3 Voice Mail DPT Digital Integration Feature Guide 327 1 29 Networking Features 1 29 6 Network ICD Group Description An Incoming Call Distribution ICD Group can include up to 4 destinations at other PBXs in a private network including the floating extension number of another ICD Group This is
87. for a hands free dialling Also used to monitor the party s voice in hands free mode MESSAGE lt Used to leave a message waiting indication or call back the party who left the message waiting indication REDIAL c9 Used to redial the last dialled number TRANSFER Aa Used to transfer a call to another party Used to make or receive a trunk call or can be reassigned to Flexible CO Trunk a different Trunk Access button Default S CO or to another feature button INTERCOM INT Used to make or receive intercom calls Used to receive an incoming call in hands free mode or used AUTO ANS Auto E l Se f Z SI for microphone or handset mute during a conversation Dual EE i feature bation Used to monitor an intercom call automatically a hands free VOICE CALL MUTE CL si conversation is not possible Also used for handset microphone mute during a conversation Used for System Personal Speed Dialling and storin AUTO DIAL STORE SC EE See GE P g g CONF Conference A Used to establish a multiple party conversation FWD DND lt o ole Used to perform FWD or DND Dual feature button Used to insert a pause in a stored number With an APT it is PAUSE used as the PROGRAM button Soft Used to select the item displayed on the bottom line of the display SELECT SE select the displayed item or to call the displayed SHIFT Used to access the second level of Soft button items MODE Used to shift the display to access various features DSS Console Bu
88. for the PT in Private mode both the PT and SLT can be used to monitor calls while in idle status The SLT will ring to indicate a message is being recorded The call can be monitored with the SLT by going off hook To intercept the call press Flash Recall button or flash the hookswitch 1 10 9 Parallelled Telephone LCS Button A flexible button can be customised as the LCS button Extension Personal Identification Number PIN To prevent unauthorised monitoring it is recommended the LCS user assign an extension PIN This PIN will be required when setting LCS 1 27 1 Extension Personal Identification Number PIN If the user forgets the PIN it can be cleared by an extension assigned as the manager Each extension can be programmed to either end recording or continue recording the conversation after the call is intercepted through personal programming LCS Mode Set After Answering To use the LCS feature on a PS in Wireless XDP Parallel Mode LCS can only be turned on or off from the wired telephone In Wireless XDP Parallel Mode setting LCS on off from the PS has no effect gt 1 24 5 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode Two way Recording into the VPS Two way Record Two way Transfer Button A flexible button can be customised as the Two way Record or the Two way Transfer button An extension number can be assigned to the Two way Transfer button so that it can be used as a one touch record button for the mailbox of the specified e
89. in the mailbox of the desired extension 1 11 1 Call Transfer The extension user should use the Voice Mail VM Transfer button when transferring a call to the mailbox of the VPS When the extension user presses this button and enters the desired extension number the PBX will transfer the call to the VM group and dial the mailbox number of the desired extension number with the required command after the VPS answers the call Therefore the caller can leave a message without knowing the mailbox number Transfer Recall to a Mailbox of the VPS If a call is transferred to an extension via the Automated Attendant AA service of the VPS and the call is not answered within a preprogrammed Transfer Recall time the PBX sends the mailbox number of the transfer destination extension to the VPS Therefore the caller can leave a message in the mailbox of the extension without knowing the mailbox number The Transfer Recall to Mailbox setting should be enabled through system programming to use this feature 201 Transfer Recall Time Listening to a Recorded Message Direct Mailbox Access If the VPS receives a message the VPS will set the Message Waiting feature e g turning on the Message button light and showing the number of messages waiting on the display of a 6 line display PT on the corresponding telephone as notification gt 1 18 1 Message Waiting Thereby the VPS notifies the extension user that there is a message waiting in his
90. in the TIE Line Routing and Modified Table of PBX 2 If the match is found in the table the call will be modified according to the table and send to the corresponding PBX PBX 3 The number sent from PBX 2 3011 is an extension number of PBX 3 The call is e received at extension 3011 i BES Extn 1011 Extn 2011 When a TIE line call is sent from one PBX to another the receiving PBX first modifies the received number according to the assignment for the trunk port the number of digits removed and the number added are determined by this assignment Then the PBX checks whether the completed number is an existing extension number at that PBX 300 Feature Guide 1 29 Networking Features b PBX Code Method Access with PBX Code Example A TIE line call is sent to PBX 2 from TIE Line Network PBX 1 If the number sent from PBX eS ee EE DEA 000777 PBX3 SCS i 1 has the PBX code of PBX 2 952 PBX Code 954 PBX Code 953 l the call will be received at the i corresponding extension of PBX 2 gt e g 10110f PBX 2 If not PBX 2 ee Onn checks the number in the TIE Line Routing and Modified Table of PBX 2 If the match is found in the table the call will be modified according to the table and send to the corresponding PBX PBX 3 CG The number sent from PBX 2 953 1011 has the PBX code of PBX 3 fe 953 1011 953 1011 r H i H i Extn 1011 Ex
91. information can travel Each time a piece of extension status information is forwarded to another PBX its counter is increased by one When this counter reaches the assigned maximum the data is discarded This is used to prevent data from circling unnecessarily around the network If it is not possible to remotely turn off transmission of extension status information using the NDSS Monitor Release feature because of network conditions it is possible to perform the same operation directly through system programming at the monitored PBX When using a VoIP network if extension status information is lost by the network in some cases an NDSS button may not be able to display the status of the relevant extension Feature Guide 323 1 29 Networking Features PT Programming Manual References 511 Manager Assignment Feature Guide References 1 29 1 TIE Line Service 1 29 4 QSIG Standard Features 1 29 2 Voice over Internet Protocol VoIP Network User Manual References 1 2 1 Basic Calling 2 1 7 Releasing Network Direct Station Selection NDSS Monitor 324 Feature Guide 1 29 Networking Features 1 29 5 2 Centralised Voice Mail Description Up to 8 PBXs connected in a VoIP or ISDN private network can share the services of a VPS connected to another PBX in DPT integration This VPS can provide voice mail for extensions attached to any of the PBXs in the network as if the VPS were connected to the local PBX In addition the
92. intercepted so that the caller can be directed to an extension rather than a mailbox This can be performed by selecting AA through system programming Transmitted Command Parameter In AA Service Mode In VM Service Mode Answer by Mailbox Switching to VM command Recording message command H Recording message command 6 H Mailbox Nol H H Mailbox No AA Switching to AA command 8 Switching to AA command 8 Feature Guide 237 1 23 Voice Mail Features 238 Transmitted Command Parameter In AA Service Mode In VM Service Mode None Default DTMF commands are not sent Work with default of the VPS Example of a amp b Trunk Call Sent 6 102 PBX mailbox number Switching to VM command FWD Intercept Transfer VPS In AA service mode Operator VM Port 1 VM Port 2 A VM DTMF i Group VM Port Nei VM Port 3 Extn 102 c Transferring to a Mailbox of the VPS An extension user can transfer a call to a mailbox of the VPS so that the caller can leave a message in the mailbox of the desired extension 1 11 1 Call Transfer The extension user should use the Voice Mail VM Transfer button when transferring a call to the mailbox of the VPS When the extension user presses this button and enters the desired extension number
93. mailbox When the Message button light turns on pressing the button allows the extension user to play back the messages stored in his mailbox without dialling such as a mailbox When the extension user dials an extension number of the VM DPT extension port or the floating extension number of the VM DPT group from his extension he can listen to the messages stored in his mailbox without dialling his mailbox number Direct Mailbox Access It is possible to disable this feature by COS programming on the VPS Feature Guide 1 23 Voice Mail Features VPS Trunk Service amp Automatic Time Mode Notification for Incoming Call Multiple tenants can share a single VPS each tenant does not require a dedicated VPS port If the destination of the incoming trunk call is a VM DPT group the PBX sends the VPS trunk group number and time mode day lunch break night of the tenant 2 2 4 Time Service assigned for the call to the VPS Therefore the VPS can send the assigned message company greeting to the caller Corresponding VPS trunk group number and tenant number are determined by the setting of the incoming trunk call as follows a DIL TIE the setting of each trunk port gt 1 1 1 2 Direct In Line DIL 1 29 1 TIE Line Service b DID DDI the setting of each location number for DID DDI gt 1 1 1 3 Direct Inward Dialling DID Direct Dialling In DDI c MSN the setting of each MSN gt 1 1 1 4 Multiple Subscriber Number MSN Rin
94. mode between General and Exclusive Call Hold Conditions Call Hold Limitation A PT user can hold one intercom call and or multiple trunk calls at a time An SLT user can hold either one intercom call or one trunk call at a time By using the Call Park feature PT and SLT users can hold multiple trunk calls and intercom calls simultaneously gt 1 12 2 Call Park Music on Hold Music if available is sent to the held party 1 12 4 Music on Hold Hold Recall If a call on hold is not retrieved within a preprogrammed time period Hold Recall is heard at the extension which put the call on hold If the extension is engaged in a call the Hold Alarm will be heard If an outside party is placed on hold and not retrieved within a preprogrammed time period the call is automatically disconnected This timer starts when Hold Recall activates Automatic Call Hold A PT user can be programmed holding of the current call when pressing another CO ICD Group INTERCOM button through system programming If this feature is not enabled the current call will be disconnected Example It is possible to receive a call by pressing the flashing ICD Group button this puts the current intercom call on the INTERCOM button on hold To return to the held call press the INTERCOM button Call Hold Retrieve Deny If an extension user cannot call certain extensions on a COS basis 1 1 2 2 Internal Call Block he cannot retrieve the held call which the e
95. must be installed Assign the floating extension number of the analogue remote maintenance default 599 and dial this number from the PC to connect to the PBX Using an ISDN TA interface 64 kbps through an ISDN Extension Line Assign the floating extension number of the ISDN remote maintenance default 699 and dial this number from the PC to connect to the PBX The RMT card is not required for this method This method is available only when a user supplied ISDN TA that supports CAPI is used L be done Feature Guide If remote access is disabled through system programming then this on site programming cannot 2 3 System Data Control 2 Remote Programming Method Description Using a modem RMT card An RMT card must be installed The floating extension number of the analogue remote maintenance must be assigned default 599 PC programming using a telephone connected in parallel with the modem can be done in the following ways e Direct Access Dial the DIL DID DDI number whose destination is the floating extension number of the analogue remote maintenance e Through DISA Dial the floating extension number of the analogue remote maintenance using the DISA feature gt 1 16 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA e Call Transfer Call an extension probably the operator and request a transfer to the floating extension number of the analogue remote maintenance 1 11 1 Call Trans
96. name or nothing is shown If none is selected lt I gt will not be shown DID DDI number Controls whether the DID DDI number name number and name or nothing is shown If none is selected lt D gt will not be shown Feature Guide 1 25 Administrative Information Features Item Description Secret dialling Controls secret dialling If enabled the dialled number will be shown as dots This setting is effective only when the modified number is selected in ARS dial setting above If the user dialled number is selected in ARS dial setting the dialled number will be shown as dots regardless of this setting Privacy dial Enables or disables privacy dial If enabled the last four digits of the dialled telephone number and any additional digits after connection will be shown as X eg 123 456 XXXX Date order The date order is changeable month day year day month year year month day year day month Received call Controls whether the time of receiving an incoming trunk call is shown Answered call Controls whether the time of answering an incoming trunk call is shown Room status Controls whether room status changes are shown Timed Reminder call Controls whether Timed Reminder calls are shown gt 1 27 4 Timed Reminder Printing Message Specifies the messages that can be selected from an extension gt 1 25 2 Printing Message Time form
97. of the answered party to the QSIG network when answering a call 1 29 4 2 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP and Calling Connected Name Identification Presentation CNIP CONP by QSIG Calling Name Identification Restriction CNIR Prevents the caller s name being presented to the called party by the caller 1 29 4 2 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP and Calling Connected Name Identification Presentation CNIP CONP by QSIG Connected Name Identification Restriction CONR Prevents CONP being sent by the answered party 1 29 4 2 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP and Calling Connected Name Identification Presentation CNIP CONP by QSIG Call Forwarding CF by QSIG Forwards a call to the QSIG network 1 29 4 3 Call Forwarding CF by QSIG Call Transfer CT by QSIG Transfers a call to the QSIG network 1 29 4 4 Call Transfer CT by QSIG Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber CCBS by QSIG Receives callback ringing when a busy called party on the QSIG network becomes free 1 29 4 5 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber CCBS by QSIG Feature Guide References 1 20 1 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN 1 29 1 TIE Line Service Feature Guide 1 29 Networking Features 1 29 4 2 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP
98. select to receive intercom calls by ring tone or by voice through personal programming 1 5 3 Intercom Call LED Light Emitting Diode LED Indication The light shows line conditions with a variety of light patterns 1 19 3 LED Indication Display Caller s Information Display Information The display shows the caller s information 1 19 4 Display Information Conversation External Pager Trunk Answer from Any The external pager sends a ring tone when receiving Station TAFAS a call 1 16 3 Trunk Answer From Any Station TAFAS Tone Voice during a Call Waiting A busy extension hears a tone or voice from the handset built in speaker indicating that another incoming call is waiting gt 1 1 3 3 Call Waiting 38 Feature Guide 1 1 Incoming Call Features 1 1 3 2 Ring Tone Pattern Selection Description It is possible to select the type of ring tone pattern that arrives at an extension for each type of incoming call etc Ring Tone Patterns 1280 ms Single Double Triple S Double The duration of a ring tone may vary by country area Ring Tone Pattern Table The ring tone pattern table is categorised into three parts each containing a specified number of pattern plans The ring tone pattern table is categorised as follows e Incoming Trunk Calls each pattern plan can assign a ring tone pattern for each trunk group e Incomin
99. specification ETS 300 261 Call transfer supplementary service e This feature can be enabled or disabled on an ISDN QSIG port basis e Call Transfer with Announcement and Call Transfer without Announcement is possible gt 1 11 1 Call Transfer Feature Guide 317 1 29 Networking Features PT Programming Manual References None User Manual References 1 4 1 Transferring a Call Call Transfer 318 Feature Guide 1 29 Networking Features 1 29 4 5 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber CCBS by QSIG Description If the call has been made to an extension in another PBX in QSIG network and the called party is busy an extension user can set to receive callback ringing when the called party becomes free When the user answers the callback ringing that party s number is automatically dialled Conditions e This feature complies with European Telecommunication Standard ETS specification ETS 300 366 Call completion supplementary services e This feature is available under the following conditions a The caller s PBX is capable of using CCBS b The called party s PBX is capable of accepting CCBS e To receive and send CCBS receiving and sending CCBS must be enabled individually on an ISDN QSIG port basis through system programming e An extension user can set only one CCBS The last setting is effective e The CCBS setting is cancelled if there is no callback ringing within 60 minutes or callback ringing i
100. the group b One extension can be the supervisor extension of more than one incoming call distribution group Available Paired DSS Console This feature is available for the KX T7640 KX T7440 and KX T7441 Accumulation Value Clear Accumulation value data total incoming calls total overflowed calls lost calls average queuing time can be cleared manually The date and time of clearing is saved and is shown on the display monitoring starting date and time When the value exceeds 99999 before clearing will be shown If a call to an incoming call distribution group is overflowed If the display is in idle status it will change to monitor mode for the corresponding incoming call distribution group automatically If the display is monitoring another incoming call distribution group it will not change Other Features while in Monitor Mode The supervisor can use other features on the extension making calls pressing the MESSAGE button etc even while in monitor mode When each operation is finished his telephone returns to the queue monitor display PT Programming Manual References None User Manual References 1 8 2 Monitoring and Controlling the Call Status of an Incoming Call Distribution Group Incoming Call Distribution Group Monitor Feature Guide 1 3 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND Features 1 3 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND Features 1 3 1 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb
101. time 1 25 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR 366 Feature Guide 2 3 System Data Control PT Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 20 1 1 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN SUMMARY 1 27 4 Timed Reminder Feature Guide 367 2 3 System Data Control 2 3 6 Flexible Numbering Fixed Numbering 368 Description To dial another extension user or to access PBX features the access numbers extension numbers or feature numbers are required There are three types of numbering plans 1 Flexible Numbering available while a dial tone is heard 2 Flexible Numbering available while busy DND or ringback tone is heard 3 Fixed Numbering available while dialling or talking 1 Flexible Numbering available while a dial tone is heard Extension numbers and feature numbers which are available while a dial tone is heard can be customised for easy use The numbers must not conflict It is also possible to use default Pattern 1 or Pattern 2 shown in the following table a Extension Numbers Extension numbers consist of leading numbers and additional numbers Extension numbers consisting of 0 through 9 can be assigned as follows KX TDA30 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 e Numbering schemes 1 32 e Leading number up to two digits e Additional number up to two digits default two digits KX TDA600 e Numbering schemes 1 64 e Leading number up to three digi
102. to allow DPT Digital Integration as shown in the following Programming Example of Extension Port and Programming Example of VM DPT Group Programming Example of Extension Port DPT Property Slot Port Port Type Extn No a Unit No Port No WE of VPS of VPS 3 1 DPT 101 VM DPT 1 1 _VM DPT 3 2 DPT 102 VM DPT 1 2 Group 1 4 1 1 S Hybrid 201 VM DPT 2 1 VM DPT 4 2 S Hybrid 202 VM DPT 2 2 Group 2 5 SLT 301 Not assignable Not assignable Not assignable VM DTMF 5 SLT 302 Not assignable Not assignable Not assignable Group 1 6 SLT 401 Not assignable Not assignable Not assignable VM DTMF 6 SLT 402 Not assignable Not assignable Not assignable Group 2 a 601 Terminal Device Assignment Programming Example of VM DTMF Group Floating Extension No of VM DTMF Extension Group Service Port Connected to Group No No Name Mode VPS Port 8 1 2 1 300 Company C AA 301 302 2 400 Company D VM 401 402 Programming Example of VM DPT Group VM DPT Group No Floating Extension No Group Name 1 500 Company A 2 200 Company B 660 VM Group Floating Extension Number Incoming Calls to VM Group When incoming calls are received at the floating extension number of the VM group calls will hunt starting at the lowest VM port number In this
103. to give names to floating extension numbers PT Programming Manual References 623 Incoming Call Distribution Group Name 660 VM Group Floating Extension Number 700 External Pager Floating Extension Number 730 Outgoing Message OGM Floating Extension Number 731 Outgoing Message OGM Name 811 Modem Floating Extension Number 812 ISDN Remote Floating Extension Number Feature Guide 375 2 3 System Data Control Feature Guide References 1 23 1 Voice Mail VM Group 2 3 1 PC Programming 376 Feature Guide 2 3 System Data Control 2 3 8 Software Upgrading Description It is possible to upload software from a PC to the PBX to upgrade the following Data File Storage Area Main Processing EMPR MPR software Operating system data area on either the EMPR card of the data KX TDA600 the MPR card of the KX TDA100 KX TDA200 or the Main Board of the KX TDA30 Default data of system programming for Country area data area on the EMPR card MPR card or each country area Main Board Language data for PT display Each language data area on the EMPR card MPR card or Main Board There are two types Type 1 PT display except for PT system programming gt 2 3 2 PT Programming 5 languages max Type 2 PT system programming data one language max LPR software on a slot card software data Flash ROM on the slot card e g BRI8 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Cell Station
104. to transfer a call using the telephone company Headset Used to turn on off the headset mode while idle Used to switch between hands free mode and headset modes during a conversation Time Service Switching Mode Automatic Manual Used to switch between the Automatic Switching and Manual Switching mode Two way Record Used to record a conversation into your own mailbox Two way Transfer Used to record a conversation into the mailbox of a specified extension One touch Two way Transfer Used to record a conversation into the mailbox of a specified extension with one touch Live Call Screening LCS Used to monitor your own voice mailbox while an incoming caller is leaving a message and if desired intercept the call Voice Mail VM Transfer Used to transfer a call to the mailbox of a specified extension Check in Used to switch the status of extensions from Check out to Check in Check out Used to switch the status of extensions from Check in to Check out CT Used to access CTI features One touch Feature Setting Buttons Pressing these buttons while on hook changes the feature settings The new mode will be displayed for a preprogrammed time period Feature Guide 203 1 19 Proprietary Telephone PT Features Conditions e The Flexible DSS button lights of the KX T7040 and KX T7240 show only Off or Red On If the button is customised as a
105. user can select the line to be seized when going off hook 1 5 5 2 Line Preference Outgoing Trunk Access A user can select the Trunk Access method every time he makes a trunk call 1 5 5 3 Trunk Access 92 Feature Guide 1 5 Making Call Features 1 5 5 2 Line Preference Outgoing Description Through personal programming Preferred Line Assignment Outgoing PT users can select the outgoing line they prefer to originate calls on when going off hook from the following line preferences Line Preference Description Intercom When an extension user goes off hook an extension line is selected automatically Idle Line When an extension user goes off hook an idle trunk is selected automatically from the assigned trunk groups No Line When an extension user goes off hook no line is selected The extension user must select the desired line to make a call Prime Line When an extension user goes off hook the preset line is selected automatically A prime line can be selected from the Line Access buttons S CO G CO L CO ICD Group Conditions es Line Preference Override A user can override the preset Line Preference temporarily by pressing the desired Line Access button or Memory Dialling button e g One touch Dialling before going off hook e To select Idle Line Preference the trunk groups available to the extension should be programmed on a COS basis Also trunk groups a
106. 0 records extn 1520 records system 100 records extn 3200 records system Outgoing Call Log PS 100 records extn 140 records system 100 records extn 640 records system 100 records extn 2560 records system Incoming Call Log PT 100 records extn 480 records system 100 records extn 3040 records system 100 records extn 6400 records system Incoming Call Log PS 100 records extn or Incoming Call Distribution Group 100 records extn or group group Total 2048 records system Total 6400 records system Message Waiting PS Incoming 640 Call Distribution Group Message Waiting PT SLT 256 512 1032 Voice Message Item KX TDA30 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 Outgoing Message OGM 32 64 OGM Total Recording Time 8 minutes Pui ie Sinead Voice MESpAge 125 messages card not available SVM SVM Total Recording Time 40 60 or 120 minutes depending on the recording not available quality 386 Feature Guide 3 1 Capacity of System Resources Hospitality and Charge Management Features Item KX TDA30 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 Billing items for guest rooms only available w EMEC or MEC 1000 records PBX 4000 records PBX 8000 records PBX Hotel Operator 4 Charge Rate 7 digits including a decimal Charge Denomination 3 currency characters symbols
107. 000 32 digit entries tenant Groups KX TDA100 KX Item KX TDA30 TDA200 KX TDA600 Broadcasting Group 8 32 members group Call Pickup Group 64 96 Idle Extension Hunting Group 64 16 extens 7 128 16 extensions ions group group Incoming Call Distribution Group 128 32 extensions group 128 128 extensions group Paging Group 32 96 PS Ring Group 32 Trunk Group 64 96 VM DPT Group 1 group x 4 ports 8 channels 2 groups x 12 ports 24 channels 8 groups x 12 ports 24 channels VM DTMF Group 2 groups x 24 channels 2 groups x 32 channels 8 groups x 32 channels TRS Barring Hem KX TDA30 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 TRS Barring Level 7 TRS Barring Denied Code 16 digits 100 entries level Feature Guide 385 3 1 Capacity of System Resources Hem KX TDA30 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 TRS Barring Exception Code 16 digits 100 entries level ARS Item KX TDA30 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 Routing Plan Table 16 entries 48 entries Leading Number Table 16 digits 1000 entries Leading Number Exception Table 16 digits 200 entries ARS Carrier 10 48 Itemised Billing Code 10 digits Authorisation Code 10 digits Call Log and Message Waiting Item KX TDA30 E TOA ene KX TDA600 TDA200 Outgoing Call Log PT 100 records extn 240 records system 10
108. 01 LCOT BRI Trunk Name 409 LCOT BRI Trunk Number Reference 500 Trunk Group Number Feature Guide References 1 19 2 Flexible Buttons 2 2 1 Class of Service COS User Manual References 1 2 1 Basic Calling Feature Guide 95 1 6 Memory Dialling Features 1 6 Memory Dialling Features 1 6 1 Memory Dialling Features 1 6 1 1 Memory Dialling Features SUMMARY Description An extension user can store frequently dialled numbers in the PBX extension data and or the PBX system data A stored number is dialled automatically with a simple operation 1 Features Feature Storing Method amp Reference One touch Dialling e Personal Programming e System Programming PC Programming only 1 6 1 2 One touch Dialling KX T7710 One touch Dialling KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only System Programming PC Programming only 1 6 1 3 KX T7710 One touch Dialling Last Number Redial Outgoing Call Log Recently dialled telephone numbers are automatically stored 1 6 1 4 Last Number Redial Speed Dialling Personal e Personal Programming e Personal Operation with the Feature Number e System Programming PC Programming only 1 6 1 5 Speed Dialling Personal System System System Programming 1 6 1 5 Speed Dialling Personal System Quick Dialling System Programming PC Programming only 1 6 1 6 Quick Dialling Feature Guide 1 6 Memory Diall
109. 1 32 and 321 etc Feature number Additional number Parameter Some flexible feature numbers require additional digits to make the feature active For example to set Call Waiting the feature number for Call Waiting must be followed by 1 and to cancel it the same feature number should be followed by 0 If a feature number includes X or rotary SLT users cannot use it ISDN extension users cannot use the following features OGM playback record Call Hold Call Hold Retrieve held at its own extension ISDN Hold MCID Walking Extension Call Waiting Hot Line Timed Reminder Feature Guide 373 2 3 System Data Control Executive Busy Override Call Monitor Automatic Callback Busy CCBS e PS users cannot use the following features Personal Speed Dialling OGM playback record CO Line Access Parallel Telephone Mode set cancel Walking Extension BGM set cancel Timed Reminder e Note that extensions that will have a mailbox using a VM in DPT integration must have extension numbers of 2 to 4 digits e APS can only be assigned an extension number of 4 digits or less PT Programming Manual References 100 Flexible Numbering Feature Guide References 1 23 1 Voice Mail VM Group 1 24 1 Portable Station PS Connection 3 1 Capacity of System Resources User Manual References 4 2 1 Feature Number Table 374 Feature Guide 2 3 Syste
110. 1 2 1 Idle Extension Hunting 680 Idle Extension Hunting Type 681 Idle Extension Hunting Group Member Incoming Call Distribution Group An incoming call distribution group is a group of extensions which receives incoming calls directed to the group Each incoming call distribution group has a floating extension number default 6 two digit group number and name One extension can belong to multiple groups 623 Incoming Call Distribution Group Name Assignable Extensions PT SLT PS ISDN Extension T1 OPX PS Ring Group gt 1 2 2 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features Example Incoming Call Distribution Group 1 Floating Extn No 601 Name Sales 1 ai Extn 100 Extn 101 Extn 102 Incoming Call Distribution Group 2 Floating Extn No 602 Name Sales 2 Extn 103 Extn 104 Ee Extn 105 Extn 106 Extn 107 Feature Guide 345 2 2 System Configuration Software 5 VM Group There are two types of VM groups as follows Type Description VM DTMF Group features A group of SLT ports which use the Voice Mail DTMF Integration One SLT port can belong to only one group VM DPT Group A group of DPT ports which use the Voice Mail DPT Digital Integration features One DPT port can belong to only one group gt 1 23 1 Voice Mail VM Group 660 VM Group Floating Extension Number Exam
111. 1 is selected after the Inter digit time expired 038 4 03 is found in two locations locations 0001 and 0002 so the PBX waits for the next digit 8 038 is not found in any location then 03 location 0002 is selected The Routing Plan Table 4 is selected 4 Routing Plan Table Assignment Arrange the time schedule as desired and store the carrier priority Time Table As the best carrier may vary with the day of the week and the time of day four time blocks Time A through D can be programmed for each day of the week 330 ARS Routing Plan Time Table Carrier Priority Assign the appropriate carrier refer to 5 Carrier Table Assignment and their priority in each time block The carrier is selected in the entry order the order in which entries are listed 3831 346 ARS Routing Plan Table 1 16 KX TDA30 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 only ARS Leading Number Table Location Leading DEN Routing Plan No No No of Digits Table No ARS Routing Plan Table 0001 03 8 C1 Routing Plan Table 1 Carrier Priority 1 Priority 2 vem SUN Time A 9 00 1 A telecom 4 D telecom oe Time B 12 00 1 A telecom Time C 15 00 1 A telecom Time D 21 00 3 C telecom Time Table 2 B telecom 2 B telecom 1 A telecom C telecom C telecom C telecom C telecom SAT Time A 9 00 Time B 12 00 Time C 15 00 Time
112. 103 PBX 1 Dials 103 Extn 101 Extn 102 5 Automatic Number Receives the caller s number from the T1 line Identification ANI When the ANI number is received it can be treated the same as a Caller ID number 1 17 1 Caller ID Conditions e Ifa T1 line is used as a trunk the channel type depends on the contract with the telephone company PT Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 3 2 Exclusive Features Table Feature Guide 1 23 Voice Mail Features 1 23 Voice Mail Features 1 23 1 Voice Mail VM Group Description A VPS can be connected to extension ports of the PBX The extension ports make a group called a VM group This group has a floating extension number The VM group can be the destination for redirected calls and incoming calls When receiving a call the VPS can greet the caller offering them the option to leave a message or dial a number to reach the desired party The VPS can record the message for each extension and leave notification on the corresponding extension if the called extension is not able to answer calls 1 VM Group Type Type Description VM DTMF Group A group of SLT ports which use the Voice Mail DTMF Integration features A maximum of 2 for KX TDA30 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 or 8 for KX TDA600 groups can be assigned VM DPT Group A group of DPT ports which use the Voice Mail DPT Digital Integratio
113. 22 Verification Code E 124 Automatic Route Selection ARS Features ssnnnsnunnnnnnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nanne 126 Automatic Route Selection ARS cccesscceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeseseaeeeseseeaeeeseeaeaeeeenea 126 Conversation Features ccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeseeeneesseesseesseeseeesnensnesneeeeeesoeseneeeeeeeeseneanes 131 Hands free Operation siccsresianenisenes cerdcnadnvesdueniainessdsautaneesseneniannissendcadeeacnuciatnennteureies 131 Off hook Montois a N E N RR 132 lf EE 133 Headset OperatiOM EE 134 Data Line Security serine Rete ere eet re ere eee ere ee eee ere 135 elle CC iis scssstaconteinieduinedsinndecsubseaduaenaniedeaaterielemtasaoneh amie 136 External Feature Sweet reese ee a ea 137 Trunk Call Limitation E 138 Parallelled Telephone aan ere eee ee eee eege Ee 140 Calling Party Control CPC Signal Detection ec ecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeneneeeeeeeees 143 Transferring ET 144 Call EE 144 Holding Mel TT 146 Cal e BEE 146 Call PEIN EE 148 ellene gegen dereen 149 MUSICON Holdys isinen EEE a ER E E AAEE 150 Conference Feat re Seii icsiiscesecsccnca nnana kaanan aaan A A Ke AoA aAA a A NAAK aA KAA AANKAN A NANANA R REPERA 152 Conference Features sinisiin raaa aE EE Eeee eas Ei ri E AEAN EE 152 Conference Features GUMMAPNY 152 Feature Guide 11 12 1 13 1 2 1 13 1 3 1 14 14 1 15 15 1 16 16 1 16 2 16 3 16 4 16 5 16 6 16 7 16 8 16 9 16 10 17
114. 23 3 Voice Mail DPT Digital Integration DID Number Notification to the VPS Changed Contents 1 2 2 2 Group Call Distribution How the Group Call Waiting Feature Activates 1 4 1 3 Call Pickup Directed Call Pickup 1 14 1 Paging Paging Group 1 19 1 Fixed Buttons FLASH RECALL 1 19 3 LED Indication Light Pattern of the Message Ringer Lamp Light Pattern of the Corresponding Extension Status Button Feature Guide 3 4 Revision History 1 24 1 Portable Station PS Connection Handover 1 25 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR CD Condition Code 2 1 1 Extension Port Configuration 2 2 4 Time Service Features Using Time Service 3 1 Capacity of System Resources Feature Guide 393 3 4 Revision History 3 4 2 394 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 PMPR Software File Version 2 0XXX New Contents 1 5 4 6 Trunk Busy Out 1 16 9 External Sensor 1 16 10 External Relay Control 1 26 Hospitality Features 1 29 5 1 Network Direct Station Selection NDSS 1 30 IP Proprietary Telephone IP PT Features 2 2 6 Manager Features Trunk Busy Out Clear 2 3 3 Password Security Changed Contents 1 1 3 3 Call Waiting 1 6 1 4 Last Number Redial 1 8 1 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring 1 19 2 Flexible Buttons 1 24 1 Portable Station PS Connection 1 25 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR 1 27 4 Timed Reminder 1 31 1 Computer Telephony Integration CTI 2 3 6 Flexible Numbering Fi
115. 235G FR SL NE are connected to the PBX the OHCA feature for the KX T7235 should be disabled through system programming e The OHCA feature cannot be used in the following cases a COS or called extension s telephone type is not available for this feature b The called extension DPT is connected to a PC PC Console or PC Phone via the USB Module Cl The called extension DPT is in the Digital XDP connection The Call Waiting tone is sent to the called extension 1 7 4 2 Call Waiting Tone e While an extension is receiving OHCA if the extension user places the current trunk call on hold or transfers the current intercom call or trunk call OHCA will become disabled and the calling extension will start to hear a ringback tone e While an extension is receiving OHCA if the extension user places the current intercom call on hold the called extension can talk to the calling extension through the handset PT Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2 2 1 Class of Service COS User Manual References 1 7 3 Receiving Call Waiting Call Waiting Off hook Call Announcement OHCA Whisper OHCA 112 Feature Guide 1 7 Busy Line Busy Party Features 1 7 4 4 Whisper OHCA Description An extension user can send a spoken message to a busy extension that will be heard directly by only the called extension user through the handset without interrupting the ongoing conversation The caller cannot hear the ongoing
116. 3 Password Security Description To maintain system security system passwords are required to access certain programming functions of the PBX By giving different users access to different passwords it is possible to control the amount of programming that each user is able to perform The following types of system passwords are available Password Description Format PT System Password PT for Used to access user level PT programming The specific 4 10 User PT programming items that may be programmed at user digits level can be selected through system programming item System Password PT for Used to access administrator level PT programming All PT Administrator programming settings are available PC System Password PC for Used with the user level programmer code to access user 4 10 User level PC programming The installer can specify which characters system programming settings are available System Password PC for Used with the administrator level programmer code to Administrator access administrator level PC programming The installer can specify which system programming settings are available System Password PC for Used with the installer level programmer code to access Installer installer level PC programming All system programming settings are available The three programmer codes used for PC programming can be set through Maintenance Console For more information a
117. 4 Incoming Call Distribution Group Distribution Method 625 Destination for Overflow Time Expiration 626 Overflow Time 627 Destination When All Busy 628 Queuing Call Capacity 629 Queuing Hurry up Level 630 Queuing Time Table 631 Sequences in Queuing Time Table 632 Maximum Number of Agents Feature Guide References 1 3 1 2 Call Forwarding FWD 1 19 2 Flexible Buttons 3 1 Capacity of System Resources 48 Feature Guide 1 2 Receiving Group Features 1 2 2 2 Group Call Distribution Description Incoming calls directed to an incoming call distribution group are distributed to the member extensions using the selected distribution method until a preprogrammed number of extensions agents are busy with calls When incoming calls exceed the number of available extensions calls enter a queue gt 1 2 2 4 Queuing Feature 1 Distribution Method One of the three distribution methods below can be assigned to each incoming call distribution group Distribution Method Description Uniform Call Distribution UCD Calls are distributed evenly to a different extension each time a call is received Extensions are hunted in a circular way in the preprogrammed order for the group starting at the extension after the extension that received the last call Extn Extn Extn Extn W C Received Starts searching from the last call extn B Skips extn A
118. 6 Flexible Buttons 202 Flexible Numbering Fixed Numbering 368 Floating Extension 375 Floating Station gt Floating Extension 375 Full One touch Dialling 99 FWD gt Call Forwarding 65 66 FWD Multiple 68 FWD DND Button Types 71 FWD DND Button Group FWD Button 71 FWD DND Setting by Fixed FWD DND button 72 FWD All Calls 66 FWD Busy 66 FWD Busy No Answer 66 FWD FollowMe 66 FWD No Answer 66 G Group 344 65 70 Feature Guide 407 Index Group Call Distribution 49 Group Call Pickup 76 Group FWD Button Types 71 Group Broadcasting 158 Group Call Pickup 76 344 Group Extension User 344 Group Idle Extension Hunting Group Incoming Call Distribution Group Paging 156 345 Group PS Ring 249 346 Group Trunk 344 Group Voice Mail VM H Handover 247 Handset Headset Selection gt Headset Operation 134 Hands free Answerback 78 Hands free Operation 131 Headset Operation 134 Hold Recall 146 Hold Retrieve Deny Call 146 Hold Call 146 Hold Call HOLD by ISDN 221 Hold Consultation 137 144 149 Hold Exclusive Call 146 Hospitality Features 270 Host PBX Access Code Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX 89 HotLine 105 Hotel Operator 271 Hunting Circular 43 Hunting Idle Extension 43 Hunting Priority 49 Hurry up Transfer gt Manual Queue Redirection 55 ICD Group gt Incoming Call Distribution Group Idle Extension Hunting 43 Idle Exte
119. 6 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA End of Call Detection e 1 29 4 1 QSIG Standard Features SUMMARY e 1 29 5 1 Network Direct Station Selection NDSS e 2 3 2 PT Programming e 2 3 6 Flexible Numbering Fixed Numbering e 3 1 Capacity of System Resources KX TDA0920 KX TDA6920 SD Memory Card for Software Upgrade to Enhanced Version only Features e 1 2 2 2 Group Call Distribution Automatic Call Distribution ACD e 1 2 2 3 Outside Destinations in Incoming Call Distribution Group e 1 16 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA DISA Automatic Walking COS DISA Call Transfer from Outside Destination e 1 29 6 1 PS Roaming by Network ICD Group e 1 29 1 TIE Line Service TIE Call by Own PBX Extension Number e 1 29 5 1 Network Direct Station Selection NDSS e 1 29 5 2 Centralised Voice Mail e 1 31 1 Computer Telephony Integration CTI SD Memory Card required for some features only Feature Guide 397 3 4 Revision History 3 4 4 KX TDA30 PSMPR Software File Version 1 1xxx New Contents e 1 15 Broadcasting Features e 1 20 1 8 Three party Conference 3PTY by ISDN e 1 23 3 Voice Mail DPT Digital Integration DID Number Notification to the VPS Changed Contents e 1 4 1 3 Call Pickup Directed Call Pickup e 1 10 9 Parallelled Telephone Digital XDP e 1 14 1 Paging Paging Group e 1 19 3 LED Indication Light Pattern of the Message Ringer Lamp Light Pattern of the Corresponding Extension Status Button
120. 6 Tables for Level 6 Level 7 Not Programmable Not Programmable 4 301 TRS Barring Denied Code 2 302 TRS Barring Exception Code Explanation Level 1 Allows all calls Level 2 Denies codes stored in the Denied Code Table for Level 2 except the codes stored in Exception Code Tables for Levels 2 through 6 Level 3 Denies codes stored in the Denied Code Tables for Levels 2 and 3 except the codes stored in Exception Code Tables for Levels 3 through 6 Level 7 Allows intercom calls only Programming Example Level for Time Mode Level for System Speed COS No planing Day Lunch Break Night falling 1 1 1 1 6 1 2 2 2 2 6 1 4 501 TRS Barring Level 2 509 TRS Barring Level for System Speed Dialling Feature Guide 115 1 8 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring Features Flowchart An extension user makes a trunk call Is the call made by System Speed Dialling Is TRS Barring Override by System Speed Dialling enabled Checks the Checks the TRS Barring TRS Barring level for level for System Speed the time mode of the Dialling of the extension s COS extension s COS Level 7 Level 1 What is the TRS Barring level Levels 2 3 4 5 6 Is the dialled number found in applicable Denied Code Tables Is the dialled number fou
121. 7 4 4 Whisper OHCA CCBS gt 1 20 1 10 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber CCBS Most of the extension data e g extension number extension name of the wired telephone is used for its PS as well However the PS has its own extension data for the following Feature Guide 1 24 Portable Station PS Features Ring Tone Pattern Table Selection 1 1 3 2 Ring Tone Pattern Selection Preferred Line Assignment Incoming 1 4 1 2 Line Preference Incoming Preferred Line Assignment Outgoing 1 5 5 2 Line Preference Outgoing Hot Line Setting gt 1 6 1 7 Hot Line Transfer Recall Destination for Call Transfer and Call Park gt 1 11 1 Call Transfer 1 12 2 Call Park Display Language 1 19 4 Display Information ISDN Bearer Mode gt 1 20 1 1 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN SUMMARY Flexible Button Assignment 1 19 2 Flexible Buttons Note To change the setting of the extension data above the setting for the wired telephone or the PS must be changed individually When changing the PS setting use the PS s original extension number not the main telephone s extension number if required e When the Wireless XDP Parallel Mode has been set the following extension data for the wired telephone is copied to the PBX extension data for the PS and the extension data remains there even when the Wireless XDP Parallel Mode is cancelled Call Waitin
122. A6181AL ELCOT16 KX TDA0181AL LCOT16 KX TDA0180AL LCOT8 PT Programming Manual References 415 LCOT Reverse Circuit 86 Feature Guide 1 5 Making Call Features 1 5 4 6 Trunk Busy Out Description The PBX can monitor the loop current sent through analogue trunks preventing users from seizing trunks where a loop current is not detected When loop currents are not detected trunks are set to Busy Out status and become unable to make or receive calls A trunk in Busy Out status cannot be used for making calls as a TIE line as part of a trunk group or with the ARS feature and cannot receive trunk calls If a user tries to seize a trunk set to Busy Out status the user will hear a reorder tone This is useful if some or all trunks are occasionally unavailable because of problems with the external telecommunications environment Conditions This feature is not available for the following LCOT cards KX TDA0181NE LCOT 16 KX TDA0180NE LCOT 8 KX TDA0183NE LCOT A KX TDA3180NE and KX TDA3180AL LCOT4 KX TDA3183NE and KX TDA3183AL LCOT2 Loop current detection is performed on active trunks whenever the trunk is seized and or at fixed intervals When a trunk is in busy out status loop current detection is performed at fixed intervals returning the trunk to in service status once a loop current is detected An extension assigned as the manager can manually change the trunk back to in service status Trunk status chan
123. ACC Code CD 8 digits 7 5 4 50 4 8 8 3 10 3 01 02 02 10 03AM 1230 0001 123456789012345678901234567890 00 00 05 00560 00EUR 9876543210 TR 01 02 02 10 07AM 1230 0001 lt I gt ABC COMPANY123456789012345 0 05 00 00 05 9876543210 TR 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 8 9 Explanation The following table explains the SMDR contents which are based on the numbers in the previous pattern examples For the programmable items refer to the following Programmable Items Number in aig the Pattern Item Description 1 Date Shows the date of the call 2 Time Shows the end time of a call as Hour Minute AM or PM Feature Guide 1 25 Administrative Information Features Number in the Pattern Hem Description 3 Ext Extension Shows the extension number floating extension number etc which was engaged in the call Also shows the following codes Dxxx Outgoing trunk call from a doorphone xxx doorphone number 1 16 1 Doorphone Call Txxx Outgoing trunk call by TIE line service xxx trunk group number xxx Verified call xxx verification code 1 8 6 Verification Code Entry 4 CO Trunk Shows the trunk number used for the call For patterns A and B 00 will be shown for trunk numbers over hundred 5 Dial Number Trunk Call Outgoing Trunk Call Shows the dialled telephone number Valid digits are as follows 0 thr
124. Busy Override Deny Executive 107 Busy Override Executive 107 Busy Station Signalling BSS gt Call Waiting 41 Buttons Fixed 199 Buttons Flexible 202 Buttons PS Feature 253 Cc Call Billing for Guest Room 273 Call Charge Management 268 Call Charge Services 267 Call Directory Extension Dialling 81 Call Directory Speed Dialling 102 406 Feature Guide Call Forwarding CF by ISDN P MP 217 Call Forwarding CF by ISDN P P 219 Call Forwarding CF by QSIG 315 Call Forwarding FWD 65 66 CallHold 146 Call Hold HOLD by ISDN 221 Call Hold Retrieve Deny 146 Call Hold Automatic 146 Call Log Incoming 193 Call Log Outgoing 101 Call Monitor 108 Call Park 148 Call Park Recall 148 Call Park Retrieve Deny 148 Call Pickup 76 Call Pickup Group 76 344 Call Pickup Directed 76 Call Splitting 149 Call Transfer 144 Call Transfer CT by ISDN 222 Call Transfer CT by QSIG 317 Call Transfer with Announcement 144 Call Transfer without Announcement 144 Call Transfer Screened gt Call Transfer with Announcement 144 Call Transfer Unscreened gt Call Transfer without Announcement 144 Call Waiting 41 Call Waiting Caller ID Visual Caller ID 41 Call Waiting Tone 111 Callback Busy Automatic Camp on 106 CallerID 188 Calling Line Identification CLI Distribution 28 Calling Line Identification Presentation CLIP 188 214 Calling Line Identification Presentation CLI
125. COS 3 Vv Vv Vv v Block Explanation a COS 1 extensions can make calls to all extensions b COS 2 extensions can make calls to COS 1 destinations only COS 2 extensions cannot make calls to COS 2 destinations c COS 3 extensions can make calls to COS 3 destinations only eee SF eee eee Extn 104 Extn 105 Extn 106 Extn 102 Extn 103 Conditions e Restricted extension numbers cannot be used as the parameter of a feature setting e g FWD e All extensions can make an Operator Call 2 2 5 Operator Features regardless of Internal Call Block e This feature can also restrict calling a doorphone from an extension on the basis of the COSs assigned to the extension and doorphone port 1 16 1 Doorphone Call 36 Feature Guide 1 1 Incoming Call Features PT Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2 2 1 Class of Service COS Feature Guide 37 1 1 Incoming Call Features 1 1 3 1 1 3 1 Description Incoming Call Indication Features Incoming Call Indication Features SUMMARY Incoming calls are indicated by various methods as follows Type Feature Description amp Reference Ring Tone Ring Tone Pattern Selection A telephone rings when receiving a call The ring tone patterns can be changed for each incoming call type 1 1 3 2 Ring Tone Pattern Selection Voice calling Alternate Receiving Ring Voice A PT user can
126. D 21 00 B telecom A telecom A telecom B telecom Olai GO GO N N 5 Carrier Table Assignment A specified number of carriers can be programmed Assign the following items for each Carrier Table Carrier Name Assign the carrier name 850 ARS Carrier Name 128 Feature Guide 1 9 Automatic Route Selection ARS Features Removed Number of Digits Assign the number of digits to remove from the beginning of the user dialled number 352 ARS Removed Number of Digits for Carrier Access Carrier Access Code Assign the code to access the carrier 853 ARS Carrier Access Code Trunk Group Assign the trunk groups which connect to each carrier 351 ARS Trunk Group for Carrier Access Modify Command Assign the commands to modify the dialled number to access the carrier Command Explanation Command Description Number Add the number C Add the Carrier Access code P Analogue Line Insert a pause ISDN T1 E1 Line Insert a pause and change to tone DTMF signal A Add the Authorisation code for a tenant 8 Add the Authorisation code for a trunk group l Add the Itemised Billing code H Add the dialled number after the digits are removed Home position Programming Example CS Removed Number of Digits Q Trunk Group Carrier Access Code 0077 eg 1 2 3 1 2
127. DA600 1 6 1 3 KX T7710 One touch Dialling a 1 16 8 Built in Simplified Voice Message SVM P 1 16 7 Automatic Fax Transfer Vv 1 22 1 T1 Line Service Vv Vv 1 30 1 IP Proprietary Telephone IP PT e wv Available Feature Guide 389 3 3 Tones Ring Tones 3 3 Tones Ring Tones 3 3 1 Tones Ring Tones Tone Patterns Default Confirmation Tone 1 Confirmation Tone 2 Confirmation Tone 3 Confirmation Tone 4 Confirmation Tone 5 Dial Tone 1 Dial Tone 2 Dial Tone 3 Dial Tone 4 Busy Tone Reorder Tone Ringback Tone 1 Ringback Tone 2 DND Tone Trunk Call Limit Warning Tone 390 Feature Guide 3 3 Tones Ring Tones Tone Patterns Default Le 15s gt Hold Alarm Tone Call Waiting Tone 1 Call Waiting Tone 2 Ring Tone Patterns Default 1s Single Double Triple S Double The duration of a ring tone may vary by country area Feature Guide 391 3 4 Revision History 3 4 3 4 1 392 Revision History KX TDA100 KX TDA200 PMPR Software File Version 1 1xxx New Contents 1 5 4 2 Emergency Call CLIP Number Notification 1 6 1 4 Last Number Redial Outgoing Call Log Display by REDIAL Button 1 6 1 5 Speed Dialling Personal System System Speed Dialling Display by AUTO DIAL STORE Button 1 10 9 Parallelled Telephone Digital XDP 1 15 Broadcasting Features 1 20 1 8 Three party Conference 3PTY by ISDN 1
128. DIL feature gt 1 1 1 2 Direct In Line DIL Feature Guide 229 1 21 E1 Line Service Features Number in the table Feature Description 4 Automatic Number Identification ANI Outgoing ANI Sends the caller s number to the E1 line The sending method is the same as ISDN CLIP service 1 20 1 2 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP Incoming ANI Receives the caller s number from the E1 line When the ANI number is received it can be treated the same as a Caller ID number gt 1 17 1 Caller ID 5 Call Charge Information The call charge meter pulses can be received during a conversation 1 25 3 Call Charge Services Conditions e Ifan E1 line is used as a trunk the channel type depends on the contract with the telephone company e f MFC R2 is selected as the Dial Mode the PBX always sends a dial tone instead of the telephone company when making a trunk call using E1 line PT Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 3 2 Exclusive Features Table 230 Feature Guide 1 22 T1 Line Service Features 1 22 T1 Line Service Features 1 22 1 T1 Line Service Description The T1 line carries twenty four 64 kbps voice channels at 1 5 Mbps transmission speed as a trunk or private line Voice is digitised by Pulse Code Modulation PCM This feature is only available for the KX TDA100 KX TDA200
129. DPT Digital Integration 242 Description A Panasonic VPS that supports DPT Digital Integration e g the KX TVP200 can be connected to this PBX in a tightly integrated fashion DPT Digital Integration features can be used when the VPS is connected through DPT ports of the PBX Feature Explanation 1 Automatic Configuration Quick Setup The PBX informs the VPS of its extension numbers and the floating extension numbers of the incoming call distribution groups so that the VPS can create mailboxes with this data automatically FWD to a Mailbox of the VPS If an extension user sets FWD to the VPS incoming calls are forwarded to the VPS 1 3 1 2 Call Forwarding FWD The PBX sends a mailbox number of the forwarding extension to the VPS Therefore the caller can leave a message in the mailbox of the extension without knowing the mailbox number Intercept Routing to a Mailbox of the VPS If an extension user sets Intercept Routing to the VPS the intercepted trunk calls will be redirected to the VPS 1 1 1 6 Intercept Routing If the Intercept to Mailbox setting is enabled through system programming the PBX sends the mailbox number of the intercepted extension to the VPS Therefore the caller can leave a message in the mailbox of the extension without knowing the mailbox number Transferring to a Mailbox of the VPS An extension user can transfer a call to a mailbox of the VPS so that the caller can leave a message
130. Day Night button switches between day and night modes All of these buttons show the current status as follows Light Pattern Status Off Day mode Red on Night mode Green on Lunch mode Slow green flashing Break mode Feature Guide 353 2 2 System Configuration Software Light Pattern Status Slow red flashing Holiday mode Note Any extension user except extension users allowed to change the mode can only check the current status on the display by pressing the Time Service button Conditions PT programming can set the Start and or End time of the following Day 1 Day Start time Lunch Lunch Start time Day 2 Lunch End time Night Night Start time PC programming can also set the following three time periods for break mode per day Break 1 Start Break 1 End Day restart Break 2 Start Break 2 End Day restart Break 3 Start Break 3 End Day restart Time Service Switching Mode Automatic Manual Button A flexible button can be customised as the Time Service Switching Mode Automatic Manual button PT Programming Manual References 101 Time Service Switching Mode 102 Time Service Starting Time 514 Time Service Manual Switching Feature Guide References 1 8 1 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring 1 19 2 Flexible Buttons 2 2 1 Class of Service COS 2 2 3 Tenant Service 3 1 Capacity of System Resources
131. Description The PBX can receive the call charge information on ISDN lines from the telephone company There are the following types Type Description Advice of Charge During Call AOC is received during the call and when the call is completed AOC D Advice of Charge AOC is received when the call is completed At End of Call AOC E Conditions e This feature complies with the following European Telecommunication Standard ETS specification ETS 300 182 Advice of Charge AOC supplementary service Digital Subscriber Signalling System No One DSS1 protocol e A DPT user can see the call charge information on the display during the call e Budget Management If the amount of call charge reaches the preprogrammed limit an extension user cannot make further calls gt 1 8 2 Budget Management AOC for ISDN extension An ISDN extension also receives AOC PT Programming Manual References None 216 Feature Guide 1 20 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN Service Features 1 20 1 4 Call Forwarding CF by ISDN P MP Description An extension user can forward the incoming ISDN call to another outside party using the ISDN service of the telephone company instead of the PBX feature when the call is received through an ISDN line Extension users can set the forward destination to the network on an MSN basis The setting must have been done beforehand to use this feature There are the f
132. Does the destination answer the call DISA Disconnect Yes Time out Time after Intercept Busy Tone Outgoing becomes idle Message OGM y No Does the caller press Goes to E while hearing busy tone Call Retry Busy Tone Time Time out The message for the busy DND mode is sent to the caller The call is disconnected Goes to The call is routed to the intercept destination Intercept Routing Busy DND y Goes to Goes to E the call is established The call is disconnected Feature numbers are available only when the Walking COS feature is used for Security Mode Override Feature Guide 173 1 16 Optional Device Features 174 Conditions WARNING There is a risk that fraudulent telephone calls will be made using the Trunk to Trunk Call feature of DISA The cost of such calls will be billed to the owner renter of the PBX To protect the PBX from this kind of fraudulent use we strongly recommend a Enabling DISA security Trunk Security or All Security b Keeping passwords verification code PINs extension PINs secret c Selecting complex random PINs that cannot be easily guessed d Changing PINs regularly e Hardware Requirement KX TDA30 An MSG card KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 An OPB card and MSG card e DISA Delayed Answer Time It is possible to set the Delayed Answer time so th
133. E Break 1 end Day restart NONE NONE NONE NONE Night start 16 00 20 00 12 00 NONE TUE Day 1 start 08 00 11 00 08 00 08 00 Lunch start 12 05 NONE 13 00 13 00 Day 2 start 13 00 NONE NONE NONE Break 1 start NONE NONE NONE NONE Break 1 end Day restart NONE NONE NONE NONE Night start 16 31 20 00 17 00 NONE M lt Time Service Image of Monday and Tuesday gt Time Table No 00 00 24 00 08 00 11 00 12 00 13 00 16 00 iio 20 00 Night Lunch Day 1 Day 1 3 Features Using Time Service The fol a b c d e f g h i Feature Guide lowing features can be set in each time mode day lunch break night Destination of incoming trunk calls DIL DID DDI MSN gt 1 1 1 Incoming Trunk Call Features Destination of the Intercept Routing gt 1 1 1 6 Intercept Routing Queuing Time Table for incoming call distribution groups 1 2 2 4 Queuing Feature Overflow destination for incoming call distribution groups 1 2 2 6 Overflow Feature Destination of incoming doorphone calls gt 1 16 1 Doorphone Call PBX operator 2 2 5 Operator Features COS for TRS Barring and for Trunk Access Outgoing Message OGM for Timed Reminder 1 27 4 Timed Reminder Intercept time for Intercept Routing No Answer gt 1 1 1 6 Intercept Routing and for DISA Intercept Routing No Answer 1 16 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA 2 2 Syste
134. EeEddESEE EE 88 Host PBX Access Code Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX ssseseesseeeeseeseeseenee 89 Feature Guide Special Carrier ACCESS Code aanaeio nanna irii kE eia anerian Ei iaie ii 91 Seizing a Line ET 92 Seizing a Line Features GUMMAPNY Ennen nt natuan nnnn nennen nna 92 Bt Ree Tue e WEE 93 MUNK NCCC Ee EE EE Ee 94 Memory Dialling FO ature vis iccsccctisntecasssanasscusssinetannsisastencntnatsnnasncusendnzszanendustsaascnsananaancs 96 Memory Dialling EE eege bereed 96 Memory Dialling Features SUMMARY AA 96 One touch Dialling AAA 99 KX 17710 One touch Dialling BE 100 LAStINUMDEMRGC E 101 Speed Dialling Personal System AAA 102 QUICK DANA EE 104 FOB IEN 105 Busy Line Busy Party Feature isisicciiccccccscsccicnnansncvesncnacsttncncnucedeassessncesnsecennicececnanssucers 106 Automatic Callback Busy Camp 0Mn sciscsccissiascecscsnvsavvascansiiainctvannvscedindeaatsvasteceenaasarensaana 106 Executive Busy Override AAA 107 Call e E 108 Second Call Notification to Busy Extension 109 Second Call Notification to Busy Extension GUMMAPNY A 109 Call Waiting Tome EE 111 Off hook Call Announcement OHCA reisai aiaa E EEE EEk 112 Whisper eer EE 113 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring Features cccssccsseeeeeeseeeeeeeeees 114 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Gartmg 114 Budget Management EE 119 Extension Dial Locke 120 Dial Tone Transter rasiri aaa aaa E aaa Aa aA ERa RE 121 Ee tee 1
135. Feature Guide 335 1 31 Computer Telephony Integration CTI Features 1 31 2 PC Phone PC Console 336 Description CTI First Party Call Control can be conducted by connecting a PC with a KX T7633 or KX T7636 DPT equipped with USB module KX T7601 through USB ports By using the KX TDA0350 PC Phone or KX TDA0300 PC Console CTI application users can enjoy many of the KX TDA series PBX features while utilising the benefits of a CTI solution PC Console gives users access to certain administrative level features that are not available with PC Phone The extensions that use PC Console must be assigned through system programming Along with many KX TDA PBX features PC Phone and PC Console offer many specific features including the following Phone Book A list of telephone numbers including detailed information pertaining to each entry This feature allows the user to make calls and send e mails to each entry Outlook Integration The Microsoft Outlook Address Book can be integrated to be used with the PC Phone or PC Console Pop up Screen An image containing information about the caller appears when a call is received Voice Memo Conversations are recorded at any time and can be saved sent by e mail etc Text Memo A user can type a short message during a conversation which can be saved sent by e mail etc For PC Phone Only TAM Telephone Answering Machine If a call is not answered within a preprogrammed t
136. I I I T d Bove PS 4 Ge ei l ot tHe ci T v pU HIP Se HIE 1 Li Be PS 2 Virtual PS 3 M Cellular Phone XDP Parallel The extension registered first in an ICD Group can programme the Forward settings for trunk calls to up to 4 virtual PSs through PT programming Using this feature an extension user can assign his cellular phone to ring with his PT so that he can easily receive trunk calls even when not at his desk Conditions e Hardware Requirement The KX TDA6920 KX TDA0920 or KX TDA3920 SD Memory Card for Software Upgrade to Enhanced Version 52 Feature Guide 1 2 Receiving Group Features e For this feature to be activated the following conditions must be met A virtual PS is assigned as a member of the ICD Group 1 24 6 Virtual PS The forwarding type of the virtual PS is set to All Calls 1 3 1 2 Call Forwarding FWD The forwarding destination is an outside party including an extension at another PBX in the network FWD to trunk is allowed through COS programming for the virtual PSs The distribution method for the ICD Group is set to Ring gt 1 2 2 2 Group Call Distribution e Up to 4 virtual PSs can be assigned to a single ICD Group If more than 4 are assigned the 4 virtual PSs with the lowest member numbers are available es ELCOT LCOT trunks without reverse circuit detection 1 5 4 5 Reverse Circuit and chan
137. Lock An extension user can lock the Incoming Call Log display to prevent the call information from being viewed at any extension through personal programming Display Lock In this case the Outgoing Call Log display the Personal Speed Dialling number display and the SVM Log display are also locked and the voice messages in the user s message box cannot be played back An extension personal identification number PIN is required to use this feature gt 1 27 1 Extension Personal Identification Number PIN e Storing the Call Log Information in Personal Speed Dialling When storing the number and name into Personal Speed Dialling from the call log information the Idle Line Access number is automatically attached to the telephone number e Incoming Call Log Memory The total memory for the Incoming Call Log is determined in the PBX The maximum number that can be logged for each extension and incoming call distribution group is also determined through system programming If the memory becomes full the new call record overwrites the oldest one PT Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 6 1 5 Speed Dialling Personal System 1 19 2 Flexible Buttons 3 1 Capacity of System Resources User Manual References 1 12 1 Using the Call Log 3 1 2 Settings on the Programming Mode 194 Feature Guide 1 18 Message Features 1 18 Message Features 1 18 1 Message Waiting Description An extension user can noti
138. MEC Card KX TDA100 KX TDA200 2 3 2 MEC Card KX TDA0105 KX TDA600 2 3 2 EMEC Card KX TDA6105 Feature Guide 159 1 15 Broadcasting Features PT Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 3 1 Capacity of System Resources User Manual References 1 6 3 Making an Announcement and Having a Multiple Party Conversation Broadcasting 160 Feature Guide 1 16 Optional Device Features 1 16 Optional Device Features 1 16 1 Doorphone Call Description It is possible to connect doorphones directly to the PBX When a visitor presses the call button ona doorphone the doorphone calls a preprogrammed destination extension or outside party In addition extension users can dial the preset number of a doorphone to call that doorphone Conditions Hardware Requirement KX TDA30 An optional doorphone and a DPH card KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 An optional doorphone the OPB card and DPH card Each doorphone port can only be assigned to one tenant The Time Table day lunch break night of the tenant applies 2 2 4 Time Service Call Destination The incoming doorphone call destination s can be assigned for each time mode day lunch break night for each doorphone port Destinations can be selected 1 1 2 1 Internal Call Features SUMMARY COS programming determines the doorphone ports that are able to make an outgoing trunk call Internal Call Block determines which extensions can call
139. Manual References 515 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode for Paired Telephone Feature Guide References 1 10 9 Parallelled Telephone 2 2 1 Class of Service COS Feature Guide 255 1 24 Portable Station PS Features User Manual References 1 7 12 Using Your PS in Parallel with a Wired Telephone Wireless XDP Parallel Mode 256 Feature Guide 1 24 Portable Station PS Features 1 24 6 Virtual PS Description An extension number can be assigned for a portable station PS without registering the PS unit itself This is known as temporary registration If a forward destination is then assigned for this PS all calls to that extension number will be forwarded to the assigned destination Using this setting to forward calls to outside destinations or destinations at another PBX allows those destinations to receive calls as if they were within the PBX In addition depending on system programming the forward destination can use some of the features of the PBX This can be especially useful for a cellular phone user who can use his cellular phone as if it were his extension when he is away from his desk Example Dials 201 wee eee rm e rm om fe Telephone Company Virtual PS 8 Biv PS 2 Extn 201 Extn 202 Fwd to outside Fwd to destination destination at other PBX TIE Line Outside Caller TIE Line Network The following features can be accessed using t
140. None Quick Dialling None None None It is possible to register Quick Dialling numbers that overlap with other registered numbers This is used for the Automatic Rerouting of VoIP Calls To Public Trunk feature 2 Flexible Numbering available while busy DND or ringback tone is heard Feature numbers which are available while busy DND or ringback tone is heard can be customised for easy use The numbers should be one digit 0 through 9 X or and must not conflict For 372 Feature Guide 2 3 System Data Control default refer to the following table Flexible Numbering Table available while busy DND or ringback tone is heard Feature Default Call Waiting DND Override 1 or 2 Executive Busy Override 3 Message Waiting set 4 Call Monitor 5 Automatic Callback Busy CCBS 6 Alternate Calling Ring Voice A To use Call Waiting DND Override both 1 and 2 are available by default 3 Fixed Numbering available while dialling or talking The features which are available while dialling or talking have fixed numbers as shown in the following table Fixed Numbering Table available while dialling or talking Feature Fixed Numbering Pulse to Tone Conversion EN Conference 3 Door Open 5 Conditions General All features have a default feature number The following are examples of feature number conflicts 1 and 11 0 and 00 2 and 21 10 and 10
141. P by QSIG 313 Calling Line Identification Restriction CLIR 214 Calling Name Identification Presentation CNIP by QSIG 313 Calling Party Control CPC Signal Detection 143 Capacity of System Resources 384 Carrier Access Code Special 91 CCBS by QSIG gt Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber by QSIG 319 CCBS gt Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber 225 Cellular Phone Features SUMMARY 338 Cellular Phone XDP Parallel 52 Centralised Voice Mail 325 Centrex Service ISDN 212 CF by ISDN P MP gt Call Forwarding by ISDN P MP 217 CF by ISDN P P gt Call Forwarding by ISDN P P 219 CF by QSIG gt Call Forwarding by QSIG 315 Charge Management Call 268 Charge Services Call 267 Circular Hunting 43 Class of Service COS 342 CLI gt Calling Line Identification Distribution 28 CLIP by QSIG gt Calling Line Identification Presentation by QSIG 313 CLIP gt Calling Line Identification Presentation 188 214 CLIR gt Calling Line Identification Restriction 214 313 CNIP by QSIG gt Calling Name Identification Presentation by QSIG 313 CNIR gt Calling Name Identification Restriction 314 Code Entry Verified 124 COLP by QSIG gt Connected Line Identification Presentation by QSIG 313 COLP gt Connected Line Identification Presentation 214 COLR gt Connected Line Identification Restriction 214 313 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber CCBS 225
142. PBX Code gt Telephone Company e mm rm rm Trunk TIE Line Network i PBX 1 PBX 2 PBX Code 951 PBX Code 952 952 9 211 4567 xa ee e e rm zm e TIE Line Interface TRG 2 gt jz Outside Party Extn 1011 211 4567 Dials 9 211 4567 Explanation 1 Extension 1011 of PBX 1 dials the Idle Line Access number of PBX 1 9 and telephone number 211 4567 2 PBX 1 modifies the call adds 952 and the Idle Line Access number of PBX 2 9 and sends the call to PBX 2 which has PBX code 952 through the TIE line trunk group TRG 2 according to the ARS programming of PBX 1 3 PBX 2 sends the call to the outside party 211 4567 Feature Guide 291 1 29 Networking Features 292 c Blocking trunk calls made through another PBX and how to override it Whether an incoming TIE line call can make a trunk call through this PBX i e PBX 2 depends on the COS that is assigned to the trunk group of this PBX that the incoming TIE line is connected to If the COS of the trunk group is unable to make outgoing calls by the Toll Restriction Barring or External Call Block feature trunk calls made through this PBX will be Feature Guide prohibited To override this prohibition an extension of PBX 1 must enter a verification code assigned to PBX 2 to change the COS temporarily It is also possible to override the prohibition by specifying an extension at PBX 2 with the Walking COS
143. PS c While the PS is in idle status PBX D cs 1 Handover Interface Li lt Calls will not be Ki disconnected However Handover is not available in any of the following cases a When the new Handover CS is busy b When there is no CS within range Cl While the Live Call Screening LCS or Two way Record is activated gt 1 23 3 Voice Mail DPT Digital Integration d While the PS user is paging other extensions 1 14 1 Paging e During a doorphone call gt 1 16 1 Doorphone Call f While the PS user is dialling digits to make a trunk call g During aconversation with an extension using PC Console or PC Phone to which the conversation is being recorded h While participating as a member of a broadcasting call 1 15 1 Broadcasting When a caller has dialled the extension number of a PS but the CS is busy the caller hears a busy tone Feature Guide 247 1 24 Portable Station PS Features KX TDA600 e APS can only be assigned an extension number of 4 digits or less e When an EMEC card is installed the total number of PSs that the PBX supports will increase Installation Manual References KX TDA30 2 7 Connection of DECT Portable Stations 2 8 Connection of 2 4 GHz Portable Stations KX TDA100 KX TDA200 2 8 Connection of DECT Portable Stations 2 9 Connection of 2 4 GHz Portable Stations KX TDA600 2 10 Connection of DECT Portable Stations 2 11 Connection of 2 4 GHz Por
144. Pan European Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN using ISDN basic rate access Pan European Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN using ISDN primary rate access ONP 2048 kbit s digital structured leased lines D2048S The KX TDA600E KX TDA6OONE KX TDA600GR and KX TDA600CE are designed to interwork with the Analogue Public Switched Telephone Network PSTN of European countries Pan European Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN using ISDN basic rate access Pan European Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN using ISDN primary rate access ONP 2048 kbit s digital structured leased lines D2048S Panasonic Communications Co Ltd Panasonic Communications Company U K Ltd declares that this equipment is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Radio amp Telecommunications Terminal Equipment R amp TTE Directive 1999 5 EC Declarations of Conformity for the relevant Panasonic products described in this manual are available for download by visiting http www doc panasonic de Contact Panasonic Services Europe a Division of Panasonic Marketing Europe GmbH Panasonic Testing Centre Winsbergring 15 22525 Hamburg Germany Trademarks e Microsoft Windows and Outlook are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries e Intel and Pentium are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporati
145. Panasonic Hybrid IP PBX Feature Guide KX TDA30 KX TDA100 moat KX 1 DA200 KX TDA600 Thank you for purchasing a Panasonic Hybrid IP PBX Please read this manual carefully before using this product and save this manual for future use KX TDA30 PSMPR Software File Version 3 0000 or later KX TDA100 KX TDA200 PMPR Software File Version 3 0000 or later KX TDA600 PLMPR Software File Version 3 0000 or later Introduction 2 About this Feature Guide This Feature Guide is designed to serve as an overall feature reference for the Panasonic Hybrid IP PBX It explains what this PBX can do and how to obtain the most out of its many features and facilities This manual contains the following sections Section 1 Call Handling Features Provides details about the call handling features Section 2 System Configuration and Administration Features Provides details about the system configuration and administration features Section 3 Appendix Provides tables listing capacity of system resources exclusive features for each PBX model tone and ring tone tables and the revision history of this Feature Guide Index Provides feature titles and important words to help you access the required information easily Terms used in this Feature Guide Installation Manual References The required installation instruction titles described in the Installation Manual are noted for your reference PT Programming Manual References
146. Relays PT Programming Manual References 720 Doorphone Call Destination 729 Doorphone Number Reference User Manual References 1 9 1 If a Doorphone Door Opener is Connected 162 Feature Guide 1 16 Optional Device Features 1 16 2 Door Open Description An extension user can unlock the door for a visitor using his telephone The door can be unlocked by extension users who are allowed to unlock the door through COS programming However while engaged on a doorphone call any extension user can unlock the door to let the visitor in gt 1 16 1 Doorphone Call Conditions e Hardware Requirement A user supplied door opener on each door es The door opener will unlock the door even if a doorphone is not installed e Door Open Duration The door can remain unlocked for a preprogrammed time period e KX TDA30 only The port of the DPH4 card to which the door opener is connected must be assigned through system programming as a door opener port not a relay port If it is not it may not be possible to open the door while on a doorphone call Installation Manual References KX TDA30 2 9 1 Connection of Doorphones Door Openers External Sensors and External Relays KX TDA100 KX TDA200 2 10 1 Connection of Doorphones Door Openers External Sensors and External Relays KX TDA600 2 12 1 Connection of Doorphones Door Openers External Sensors and External Relays PT Programming Manual References 207 Door Open Durat
147. SVM Remote Access from Trunk Whether Walking COS is available or not can be set through system programming If the PBX uses analogue trunks it is strongly recommended to prohibit Walking COS access If an extension user who is accessing his message box through an analogue line goes on hook while the voice messages are being played the line will remain connected until all voice messages finish playing This is because a reorder tone cannot be detected from an analogue line while playing voice messages Feature Guide 1 16 Optional Device Features e The first digit of the Walking COS feature number must be entered before the greeting message finishes playing e An extension user can only access the message box of another extension belonging to the card that the user accesses first For example if the user accesses a message box belonging to SVM card 1 first then the user can only access the message boxes of other extensions belonging to SVM card 1 If the user tries to access the message box of another extension belonging to a different card the user will hear a reorder tone While a reorder tone is heard it is possible to retry another call by pressing X e Accessing the Message Box of Another Extension Listening to voice messages left by callers using a Message button for another extension is available only when voice messages have been left in the message box e It is not recommended to record music when creating a greeting me
148. Simplified Voice Message SVM e 1 16 7 Automatic Fax Transfer e 1 16 9 External Sensor e 1 16 10 External Relay Control e 1 26 Hospitality Features e 1 29 5 1 Network Direct Station Selection NDSS e 2 2 6 Manager Features Trunk Busy Out Clear e 2 3 3 Password Security Changed Contents e 1 1 3 3 Call Waiting e 1 6 1 4 Last Number Redial Outgoing Call Log e 1 8 1 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring e 1 19 2 Flexible Buttons e 1 24 1 Portable Station PS Connection e 1 25 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR e 1 27 4 Timed Reminder e 1 28 1 Dial Tone e 1 31 1 Computer Telephony Integration CTI e 2 3 6 Flexible Numbering Fixed Numbering Feature Guide 401 3 4 Revision History e 3 1 Capacity of System Resources KX TDA3920 SD Memory Card for Software Upgrade to Enhanced Version only Features e 1 29 5 1 Network Direct Station Selection NDSS e 1 31 1 Computer Telephony Integration CTI SD Memory Card required for some features only 402 Feature Guide 3 4 Revision History 3 4 7 KX TDA30 PSMPR Software File Version 3 xxxx New Contents e 1 2 2 2 Group Call Distribution Automatic Call Distribution ACD e 1 2 2 3 Outside Destinations in Incoming Call Distribution Group e 1 16 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA DISA Automatic Walking COS DISA Call Transfer from Outside Destination e 1 24 6 Virtual PS e 1 29 1 TIE Line Service TIE Call by Own PBX Extension Number e
149. Software Upgrade to Enhanced Version e Application Programming Interface API Protocol The following interfaces are required for First Party Call Control and Third Party Call Control Type API Protocol First Party Call Control e TAPI 2 1 Third Party Call Control e ECMA CSTA Phase 3 e TAPI2 1 e The operating system of PC or CTI Server required for First Party Call Control or Third Party Call Control depends on your CTI application software For details refer to the manual for your CTI application software e For Third Party Call Control it is possible to connect a CTI server to the Hybrid IP PBX via either a CTI LINK card or USB port However both connections cannot be used simultaneously IP PT Call Control e APC connected directly to an IP PT cannot be used for First Party Call Control e IP PTs do not support the use of PC Phone or PC Console software on a connected PC Installation Manual References KX TDA30 2 6 4 First Party Call Control CTI Connection 2 10 1 Connection of Peripherals KX TDA100 KX TDA200 334 Feature Guide 1 31 Computer Telephony Integration CTI Features 2 3 1 MPR Card 2 6 7 CTI LINK Card KX TDA0410 2 7 4 First Party Call Control CTI Connection 2 11 1 Connection of Peripherals KX TDA600 2 3 1 EMPR Card 2 8 7 CTI LINK Card KX TDA0410 2 9 4 First Party Call Control CTI Connection 2 13 1 Connection of Peripherals PT Programming Manual References None
150. System Configuration Software 350 Programming Example Caller Called Party Cos 1 COS 2 COS 3 COS 4 Cos 5 COS 6 COS 1 COS 2 COS 3 COS 4 COS 5 COS 6 w Block Explanation 1 Assign each extension in a tenant to a certain COS number Each tenant must have unique COS numbers Tenant 1 COS 1 and COS 2 Tenant 2 COS 3 and COS 4 Tenant 3 COS 5 and COS 6 2 Tenant to Tenant Call Block enables by the Internal Call Block feature a b c Music on Hold while a call is waiting in the queue The Time Table which determines the overflow destination 001 System Speed Dialling Number 006 Operator Assignment 320 ARS Mode 711 Music on Hold Feature Guide References 3 1 Capacity of System Resources Feature Guide PT Programming Manual References Tenant 1 COS 1 and COS 2 can make calls to both Tenant 2 COS 3 and COS 4 and Tenant 3 COS 5 and COS 6 as well as Tenant 1 Tenant 2 COS 3 and COS 4 can make calls to Tenant 1 COS 1 and COS 2 and Tenant 2 Tenant 3 COS 5 and COS 6 can make calls to Tenant 3 itself only e An incoming call distribution group must belong to one tenant because the following features are determined on a tenant basis 1 2 2 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features SUMMARY 2 2 System Configuration Software 2 2 4 Time Service Description This PBX support
151. T External Pager TAFAS DISA Analogue ISDN Remote Maintenance Idle Line Access no Phone no Trunk Group Access no Trunk Group no Phone no Other PBX Extension TIE with no PBX Code SSSR TREX Qs Other PBX Extension TIE with PBX Code e FWD DND Mode While searching for an idle extension within an idle extension hunting group any extension that has set FWD AIl Calls or DND feature will be skipped and the call will go to the next extension in the group PT Programming Manual References 680 Idle Extension Hunting Type 681 Idle Extension Hunting Group Member Feature Guide References 1 3 1 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND 3 1 Capacity of System Resources 44 Feature Guide 1 2 Receiving Group Features 1 2 2 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features 1 2 2 1 Description An incoming call distribution group is a group of extensions programmed through system programming 620 Incoming Call Distribution Group Member Incoming Call Distribution Group Features SUMMARY An incoming call distribution group receives calls directed to the group Each incoming call distribution group has a floating extension number default 6 two digit group number Incoming calls directed to an incoming call distribution group are distributed to the member extensions in the group using a distribution method When a preprogrammed number of extensions in the group ar
152. T7667 can only be connected as a slave DPT e When Digital XDP connection enables the number of DPTs to exceed the maximum capacity that the PBX supports the following conditions must be met KX TDA30 An MEC card is installed and an additional AC adaptor is connected KX TDA100 KX TDA200 An MEC card and the PSU M or PSU LL is installed KX TDA600 The PSU L is installed e When using Digital XDP connection the following features cannot be used with either the master or slave DPT a OHCA A call waiting tone will be heard even if the OHCA feature is set b USB Module The DPTs will not work correctly if a USB Module is connected Do not connect USB Modules to the DPTs Note Even if the slave DPT is disconnected the OHCA feature and USB Module still cannot be used with the master DPT To use them the master DPT must be disconnected from the PBX and then reconnected DPT DPT SLT e When an SLT is connected to the slave DPT in parallel mode the SLT works as the parallel extension of the master DPT Installation Manual References KX TDA30 1 4 3 System Capacity 2 5 7 MEC Card 2 6 2 Parallel Connection of the Extensions 2 6 3 Digital EXtra Device Port Digital XDP Connection KX TDA100 KX TDA200 1 4 3 System Capacity 2 3 2 MEC Card KX TDA0105 2 7 2 Parallel Connection of the Extensions 2 7 3 Digital EXtra Device Port Digital XDP Connection KX TDA600 1 4 3 System Capacity 2 9 2 Parallel Connect
153. TDA6920 KX TDA0920 or KX TDA3920 SD Memory Card for Software Upgrade to Enhanced Version is required to use this feature DISA security mode should be set to No Security or Trunk Security If the called extension does not answer is busy or is in DND mode the DISA Intercept feature operates The party on hold can use the Call Retry feature End of Call Detection does not operate after dialling Calls can only be transferred to extensions within the PBX Transfer Recall Call Splitting and Call Transfer with Announcement are not available e DISA Reorder Tone Duration It is possible to set the DISA Reorder Tone Duration time This specifies the length of time that a reorder tone will be sent to the caller When the timer expires the call will be disconnected Call Retry is possible during the DISA Reorder Tone Duration time e Call Deny Extensions can deny DISA calls on a COS basis e Verification Code PIN Lock Extension PIN Lock If the wrong PIN is entered three times the line will be disconnected If the wrong PIN is entered a preprogrammed number of times successively that extension or verification code will become locked and even entering the correct PIN will not unlock it Only an extension assigned as the manager can unlock it In this case the PIN will be unlocked and cleared es DISA Automatic Walking COS The KX TDA6920 KX TDA0920 or KX TDA3920 SD Memory Card for Software Upgrade to E
154. The PT Programming titles described in the PT Programming Manual are noted for your reference Feature Guide References The related feature titles described in this Feature Guide are noted for your reference User Manual References The operation required to implement the feature described in the User Manual is noted for your reference Abbreviations There are many abbreviations used in this manual e g PT for proprietary telephone Please refer to the list in the next section for the meaning of each abbreviation About the other manuals Along with this Feature Guide the following manuals are available to help you install and use this PBX Installation Manual Provides instructions for installing the hardware and maintenance of the PBX PT Programming Manual Provides step by step instructions for performing system programming using a PT Feature Guide User Manual Provides operating instructions for end users using PTs SLTs PSs or DSS Consoles e Analogue Public Switched Telephone Network PSTN of European countries The KX TDA30E KX TDA30NE KX TDA30GR and KX TDA30CE are designed to interwork with the e Pan European Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN using ISDN basic rate access The KX TDA100E KX TDA200E KX TDA100NE KX TDA200NE KX TDA100GR KX TDA200GR and KX TDA100CE KX TDA200CE are designed to interwork with the Analogue Public Switched Telephone Network PSTN of European countries
155. The following types are available Type Picking up Call Type Directed A specified extension s call Group A call within a specified call pickup group Call Pickup Deny Preventing other extensions from picking up calls ringing at your extension is also possible Conditions Call Pickup applies to Intercom trunk and doorphone calls Internal Call Block An extension that is restricted by COS from calling certain extensions 1 1 2 2 Internal Call Block also cannot pick up any calls ringing at those extensions Directed Call Pickup A user can also pick up a call to a specified extension by pressing the corresponding DSS button This feature is only available when 1 the user s extension is allowed to use this feature through COS programming 2 DSS buttons for extensions or incoming call distribution ICD groups have this feature enabled through system programming and 3 the light pattern of DSS buttons for incoming calls to extensions or ICD groups is set to On or Flash through system programming The light pattern of a DSS button for an incoming call to an extension or incoming call distribution group can be programmed through system programming Call Pickup is available only when the DSS button is flashing red Group Call Pickup A specified number of call pickup groups can be created each of which consist of extension user groups One extension user group can belong to several call pickup groups 2 2 2 G
156. VPS can send Message Waiting notifications to extensions at any PBX and users can access their mailboxes directly using the Message Waiting button The following VPS features are available at extensions connected to another PBX in the network e Automated Attendant AA Service e FWD to a Mailbox of the VPS e Intercept Routing to a Mailbox of the VPS e Listening to a Recorded Message Direct Mailbox Access e VPS Trunk Service amp Automatic Time Mode Notification for Incoming Call e Callers Identification Notification to the VPS e DDI DID Number Notification to the VPS Trunk Call Answered by the VPS Transferred to Extension at Other PBX Outside Caller Telephone Company TIE Line Network PBX 2 Hello _ Please enter Mailbox 101 K extension number Mailbox 201 E Le Mailbox 202 Extn Extn VPS 201 202 Explanation An outside call is answered by the AA service of the VPS The caller enters extension number 201 so the call is transferred over the private network to extension 201 If extension 201 does not answer mailbox 201 in the VPS will answer it and play the appropriate message Feature Guide 325 1 29 Networking Features 326 Trunk Call to an Extension Not Answered Forwarded to Mailbox PBX 1 me J d Outside Caller Private network Mailbox 101 d Mailbox 201 Hello am not at
157. Vv External Pager TAFAS Vv DISA Vv Only available for incoming trunk calls Incoming intercom and doorphone calls cannot be forwarded to a DISA floating extension number Analogue ISDN Remote Maintenance Vv Idle Line Access no Phone no Only available when FWD to trunk is allowed through COS programming Trunk Group Access no Trunk Group no Phone no Other PBX Extension TIE with no PBX Code Vv Other PBX Extension TIE with PBX Code Only available when FWD to trunk is allowed through COS programming K If an extension user is not permitted by COS to call a certain extension 1 1 2 2 Internal Call Block the FWD feature will not function if that extension is set as the forwarding destination Conditions General es FWD for Trunk Calls Intercom Calls The extension user can set the FWD feature for trunk calls for intercom calls or for both e FWD from Incoming Call Distribution Group Group FWD COS programming determines the incoming call distribution groups that can use this feature FWD to Trunk COS programming determines the extensions or incoming call distribution groups that can forward calls externally The original extension s TRS Barring and ARS still apply to the forwarded call s Trunk Call Duration The duration of a trunk call can be restricted by a system timer Trunk call duration is assigned separately for calls between an extension user and an
158. WD set cancel Internal 716 716 716 Call Pickup Deny set cancel 720 720 720 Paging Deny set cancel 721 721 721 Walking Extension 727 727 727 Data Line Security set cancel 730 730 730 Call Waiting for Intercom Calls set cancel 731 731 731 Feature Guide 371 2 3 System Data Control Feature Default Pattern 1 Pattern 2 with without KX TDA30 KX KX TDA600 TDA100 KX TDA200 Call Waiting for Trunk Calls including 732 732 732 doorphone calls calls for an incoming call distribution group set cancel Executive Busy Override Deny set cancel 733 733 733 Not Ready Mode on off 735 735 735 Log in Log out 736 736 736 Incoming Call Queue Monitor 739 739 739 Hot Line programme set cancel 740 740 740 Absent Message set cancel 750 750 750 BGM set cancel 751 x751 751 Remote Wake up Call 76 76 76 Timed Reminder set cancel 760 x760 760 Printing Message 761 761 761 Extension Dial Lock set cancel 77 77 77 Time Service Switch 780 780 780 Remote Extension Dial Lock off 782 782 782 Remote Extension Dial Lock on 783 783 783 NDSS Monitor Release 784 784 784 Trunk Busy Out Clear 785 785 None Extension Feature Clear 790 790 790 Extension Personal Identification Number 799 799 799 PIN set cancel Dial Information CTI None None None Other PBX Extension Number TIE 1 16 None None
159. X or a Special Carrier Access code 1 5 4 9 Special Carrier Access Code in the following cases Stored Type Not stored Found Not found Host PBX Access Code Deletes the code A The call is made TRS Barring checks TRS Barring check is excepted from TRS the whole number carried out on the Barring following digits Special Carrier Access Deletes the code A TRS Barring checks TRS Barring checks Code TRS Barring check is the whole number the whole number carried out on the following digits e ARS If ARS is applied to a dialled number TRS Barring will check the user dialled number not the modified number by ARS In this case a Host PBX Access code and or a Special Carrier Access code will not be checked e Dialling Digit Restriction during Conversation The dialling of digits can be restricted while engaged on a received trunk call If the number of dialled digits exceeds the preprogrammed limitation the line will be disconnected e Itis possible to select through system programming whether the trunk is disconnected when the Inter digit time expires without the TRS Barring check being completed If no disconnection is chosen the TRS Barring check will also be performed after the Inter digit time expires f disconnection is chosen the line will be disconnected when the trunk Inter digit time expires This also prevents EFA from being used This setting applies to all trun
160. X X953 xxxx TRG 2 C X954 xxxx a 952 xxxx b 1st 953 xxxx i Extn xxxx VG Extn xxxx Flexible PBX 1 PBX 2 Numbering Plan eee A a a E TIE Line Routing and Modification Table of PBX 1 Priority 1 Priority 2 Dial Modification Dial Modification Location Leading No No TRG Removed TRG Removed No of Added No No of Added No Digits Digits 01 952 1 0 02 953 1 0 2 X X953 03 954 2 3 X X954 Explanation Location 01 The hunt sequence by dialling 7 PBX Code 952 XXXX The 1st route trunk group TRG 1 m Sending no to PBX 2 952 XXXX Location 02 The hunt sequence by dialling 7 PBX Code 953 XXXxX The 1st route trunk group TRG 1 m Sending no to PBX 2 953 XXXX The 2nd route trunk group TRG 2 m Sending no to PBX 4 953 XXXX Location 03 The hunt sequence by dialling 7 PBX Code 954 XXXxX 298 Feature Guide 1 29 Networking Features The 1st route trunk group TRG 2 m gt Sending no to PBX 4 954 XXXX Feature Guide 299 1 29 Networking Features 3 2 To Receive a TIE Line Call a Extension Number Method Access without PBX Code Example A TIE line call is sent to PBX 2 from PBX 1 TIE Line Network If the number sent from PBX 1 is an ft ee extension number of PBX 2 e g 2011 the S i call will be received at extension 2011 If i not PBX 2 checks the number
161. a PC Console or PC Phone PC Console and PC Phone use e mail to send the information e The alarm information will be recorded on SMDR if enabled through system programming e The PBX can be automatically diagnosed at a preprogrammed time everyday Installation Manual References KX TDA30 4 1 5 Troubleshooting by Error Log KX TDA100 KX TDA200 4 1 5 Troubleshooting by Error Log Feature Guide 381 2 4 Fault Recovery Diagnostics KX TDA600 4 1 5 Troubleshooting by Error Log PT Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 19 2 Flexible Buttons 1 25 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR 382 Feature Guide Section 3 Appendix Feature Guide 383 3 1 Capacity of System Resources 3 1 System Capacity of System Resources Hem KX TDA30 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 Absent Message Extension 1 x 16 characters Absent Message System 8 x 16 characters Call Park Zone 100 Conference Each shelf 3 8 parties 3 8 parties per conference 32 parties total per conference 32 parties total COS 64 DID DDI Table 32 digits 1000 entries Extension number 1 5 digits 1 4 digits for PSs 2 4 digits for extensions which have a VM DPT 1 4 digits 2 4 digits for extensions which have a VM DPT mailbox mailbox Extension Personal Identification SC Number PIN 10 digits 1 entry extension Host PBX Ac
162. a call or while hearing reorder tone after the caller hangs up Information on the malicious call will be received later on Conditions e This feature complies with the following European Telecommunication Standard ETS specification ETS 300 130 Malicious Call Identification MCID supplementary service PT Programming Manual References None User Manual References 1 3 6 Identifying Malicious Calling Parties Malicious Call Identification MCID 224 Feature Guide 1 20 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN Service Features 1 20 1 10 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber CCBS Description If the called party is busy and the call has been made using an ISDN line an extension user can set to receive callback ringing when the called party becomes free When the user answers the callback ringing that party s number is automatically dialled Conditions This feature complies with the following European Telecommunication Standard ETS specification ETS 300 359 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber CCBS supplementary service This feature is available under the following conditions a The caller s PBX is capable of using CCBS and the service is provided by the network b The called party s PBX is capable of accepting CCBS To receive and send CCBS receiving and sending CCBS must be enabled individually on an ISDN port basis through system programming An extension user can set only one CCBS The last
163. a doorphone 1 1 2 2 Internal Call Block Ring Duration If an incoming call is not answered within a preprogrammed time period ringing stops and the call is cancelled Call Duration The call duration can be restricted by a system timer If the timer expires the call will be disconnected Door Open While engaged on a doorphone call the extension user can unlock the door to let the visitor in gt 1 16 2 Door Open A doorphone number can be referenced for each doorphone port KX TDA30 only Doorphones 1 and 2 or 3 and 4 cannot make a call simultaneously If a visitor presses the doorphone button while the other doorphone is engaged in a call he will hear no tone Doorphones 1 and 2 or 3 and 4 cannot receive a call simultaneously If an extension user calls a doorphone while the other doorphone is engaged in a call he will hear a busy tone Installation Manual References KX TDA30 2 5 1 DPH4 Card 2 5 2 DPH2 Card 2 9 1 Connection of Doorphones Door Openers External Sensors and External Relays KX TDA100 KX TDA200 2 6 1 OPB3 Card KX TDA0190 2 6 2 DPH4 Card KX TDA0161 Feature Guide 161 1 16 Optional Device Features 2 6 3 DPH2 Card KX TDA0162 2 10 1 Connection of Doorphones Door Openers External Sensors and External Relays KX TDA600 2 8 1 OPB3 Card KX TDA0190 2 8 2 DPH4 Card KX TDA0161 2 8 3 DPH2 Card KX TDA0162 2 12 1 Connection of Doorphones Door Openers External Sensors and External
164. a member When the button is created the extension will be Feature Guide 47 1 2 Receiving Group Features automatically registered in the lowest numbered available member slot for the group Calls to the group can be received at the extension with no further programming If no member slots are available for that group the button cannot be created and an alarm tone will be heard When creating an ICD Group button in this mode the user can also specify the delayed ringing settings If an extension user deletes the last ICD Group button at his extension for a certain group he will also be deregistered as a member from that group es Group FWD The FWD feature can be assigned on an incoming call distribution group basis e COS for Incoming Call Distribution Groups Each incoming call distribution group is assigned a COS number Group FWD to an outside party can be enabled or disabled for each COS The COS for incoming call distribution groups is also used for the Internal Call Block feature when an extension user calls an incoming call distribution group the PBX checks the COS of the calling extension against the COS of the incoming call distribution group gt 1 1 2 2 Internal Call Block PT Programming Manual References 620 Incoming Call Distribution Group Member 621 Incoming Call Distribution Group Delayed Ringing 622 Incoming Call Distribution Group Floating Extension Number 623 Incoming Call Distribution Group Name 62
165. a only If dial tone 2 is heard after Extension Feature Clear After performing Extension Feature Clear Call Waiting will be enabled if Extension Clear Call Waiting is set to Clear through system programming In this case dial tone 2 will be heard when going off hook gt 1 28 1 Dial Tone PT Programming Manual References None User Manual References 1 7 13 Clearing Features Set at Your Extension Extension Feature Clear Feature Guide 277 1 27 Extension Controlling Features 1 27 3 Walking Extension Description It is possible to use any extension and have your extension settings available to you Settings such as extension number one touch dialling memory and COS are all available to you at the new location Example This feature is useful when e Moving location e There is no specific desk for your use This feature is also known as Walking Station Conditions e This feature allows extension settings to be switched between PT and PT SLT and SLT or PT and SLT Moving between tenants is also possible However this feature can not be used at IP PTs e Incoming calls to your extension will also reach you at your new location e An extension personal identification number PIN is required to use this feature gt 1 27 1 Extension Personal Identification Number PIN e Ifa DSS Console is connected to a PT and the DSS Console is continuously used with the PT after Walking Extension has been activated t
166. aaa sta deetetadmitescwiecetedadetten 361 2 3 3 FP E LE 363 234 Quik NUE nieres a a atin tated E amet 365 23 5 A tomatic SS EE 366 2 3 6 Flexible Numbering Fixed Numbering Ae 368 2 3 7 Floating USNS EE 375 2 3 8 Software Upgrading EE 377 2 4 Fault Recovery DiagnosStics ssssusnnnunnennennnrennnnnnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn 378 2 4 1 Power Failure Transier 378 2 4 2 Power Failure Hestart 380 2 4 3 Local Alarm Information 0cccceceeeeeceeceeeeaeeeaeaeaaeeaaneaaeeaeeaaeeaaecaeceaeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 381 WE e EL TE 383 3 1 Capacity of System RESOUICES wiasisicscesiecesseccesncnnevessestassasaaseaceseanstsneneznaneasestauceadedsanecens 384 3 2 Exclusive Features Talo Qicsicsedicsicinssasnsscisesssisacannnastsecsccantanisessuaseansaaasaseesniseiaaaneaaawnisians 389 3 3 TONES RING TONGS icine scctecicecericascndecarnashesecncstasesacececastesesdensansatenseianctetensestexnaneveedecsens 390 3 3 1 Tones Ring TOMES EE 390 3 4 Revision HIStOTY sw siicsiesisiinstesnsisnstensccanuaaseaniawncassnanedannissndandinnatsnananteieassasasinnensmasadsnnansmasasens 392 3 4 1 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 PMPR Software File Version 1 1XXX cecccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 392 3 4 2 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 PMPR Software File Version 2 0XXX ccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneees 394 3 4 3 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 PMPR PLMPR Software File Version 3 xxxx 396 3 4 4 KX TDA30 PSMPR Software File Version 1 1XXX ccccccecc
167. ading Number Extension Numbering Scheme 13 None 22 32 22 Leading Number Extension Numbering Scheme 14 None 23 33 23 Leading Number Extension Numbering Scheme 15 None 24 34 24 Leading Number Extension Numbering Scheme 16 None 25 35 25 Leading Number Extension Numbering Scheme 17 None 26 36 26 Leading Number Extension Numbering Scheme 18 None 27 37 27 Leading Number Extension Numbering Scheme 19 None 28 38 28 Leading Number Extension Numbering Scheme 20 None 29 39 None Leading Number Extension Numbering Scheme 21 5 5 5 5 19 Leading Number Feature Guide 369 2 3 System Data Control 370 Feature Default Pattern 1 Pattern 2 with without KX TDA30 KX KX TDA600 TDA100 KX TDA200 Extension Numbering Scheme 22 6 6 6 6 29 Leading Number Extension Numbering Scheme 23 64 None None None Operator Call 9 0 9 0 0 Idle Line Access Local Access 0 1 9 0 1 9 9 Trunk Group Access 8 8 8 TIE Line Access 7 7 None Redial Speed Dialling System Personal PER AA x Personal Speed Dialling Programming 30 30 30 Doorphone Call 31 31 31 Broadcasting 32 32 None Group Paging 33 33 33 External BGM on off 35 35 35 Outgoing Message OGM playback 36 36 36 record clear S CO Line Access 37 37 37 SVM Personal Greeting Message 38 None None playback record clear KX TDA30 only Parallel
168. al tone from the line used last For example if a trunk call is disconnected the extension user will hear a new dial tone from the telephone company Terminate Mode Disconnects the line The extension user hears the dial tone determined by the Line Preference Outgoing setting gt 1 5 5 2 Line Preference Outgoing Conditions FLASH RECALL Button Mode One of the following modes can be selected for each extension through system programming Flash Recall mode Terminate mode External Feature Access EFA mode gt 1 10 7 External Feature Access EFA Terminate Button A flexible button can be customised as the Terminate button Disconnect Time Only for Flash Recall Mode The amount of time between successive accesses to the same trunk is programmable for each trunk port This feature outputs an SMDR call record 1 25 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR restarts the call timer inserts the automatic pause and checks the TRS Barring level 1 8 1 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring again The Terminate feature will be performed when pressing the FLASH RECALL button regardless of the mode that the FLASH RECALL button has been set to in the following situations When acallis made using ARS 1 9 1 Automatic Route Selection ARS When a trunk call is made with the INTERCOM button When a trunk call is made with an ICD group button PT Programming Manual References 418
169. all distribution group The button light shows the current status as follows Light pattern Status Red on There is unchecked information Off All information has been checked If the answering destination is not the original extension FWD No Answer Intercept Routing No Answer Overflow and Call Pickup If a call is forwarded because it is not answered or another extension picks up the call the information is logged in the call logs of both the original destination and the answering destination If a call is forwarded to several extensions before being answered the information is logged in the call logs for all the extensions it was forwarded to If a call is forwarded to an incoming call distribution group and is not answered the information is not logged in the call log for the incoming call distribution group Call Log for Incoming Call Distribution Group Calls If the original destination of a call is an incoming call distribution group and the call is not answered the information is logged in the call log for the group If it is answered the information is logged in the call log for the answering extension Call Log for PS Calls If a PS or a CS is in one of the following situations when a call arrives the information is logged in the call log for the PS a When the PS is out of range b When the PS is turned off Feature Guide 193 1 17 Caller ID Features c When the CS is busy e Display
170. alled number Trunk Security Is the dialled number an extension number or floating extension number All Security Is the Walking COS Verified Code Entry feature number dialled for Security Mode Override Is the correct personal identification number PIN entered Yes Others Feature No e g FWD Goes to The feature is set The dialled number is sent to the trunk Trunk Access No Telephone No Extension No Floating Extension No lt No lt Reorder tone Goes to Is the extension idle Yes gt The extension receives the call not in DND mode Does the caller press while hearing reorder tone Call Retry DISA Reorder Tone Duration Time A Time out The call is disconnected Is the extension busy Call Waiting mode on and is Goes to Yes Does the caller press What method is assigned for DISA Intercept Routing Busy DND The call waits to be received while hearing a ringback tone Call Retry The extension Intercept Routing Does the destination answer the call Goes to A DISA Intercept Time Time out The call is routed to the intercept destination DISA Intercept Routing No Answer The call is established
171. alled number or the modified number on SMDR through system programming 1 25 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR es ARS Data Download Upload It is possible to download or upload the following ARS data to the PBX using PC programming ARS Leading Number Exception Table ARS Leading Number Table ARS Routing Plan Table This is useful when a carrier has changed the call charge and the updated data can be used for multiple customers e A TRS Barring check is done before ARS is applied 1 8 1 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring PT Programming Manual References 320 ARS Mode 321 ARS Leading Number 322 ARS Routing Plan Table Number 325 ARS Exception Number 330 ARS Routing Plan Time Table 331 346 ARS Routing Plan Table 1 16 KX TDA30 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 only 347 ARS Routing Plan Table 1 48 KX TDA600 only 350 ARS Carrier Name 351 ARS Trunk Group for Carrier Access 352 ARS Removed Number of Digits for Carrier Access 353 ARS Carrier Access Code Feature Guide References 3 1 Capacity of System Resources 130 Feature Guide 1 10 Conversation Features 1 10 Conversation Features 1 10 1 Hands free Operation Description A PT user can talk to another party without lifting the handset Pressing specific buttons e g REDIAL automatically activates hands free mode Conditions e PTs with the MONITOR Button PTs with the MONITOR button can only
172. an IP GW4E card KX TDA0484 the firmware not LPR of the card must be version 1 2 or later If using a PRI23 card KX TDA0290 the LPR software of the card must be version 1 009 or later Each of Network PBX IDs 1 8 can only be assigned to one PBX within a network Assigning the same Network PBX ID to two PBXs will cause network data transmission problems It is only possible to assign NDSS buttons for extensions that have been previously registered in the Network Monitor Extensions Table Extensions connected to one PBX can monitor a maximum of 250 extensions at other PBXs One extension can be monitored by multiple extensions at multiple PBXs To reduce NDSS data traffic it is recommended that 8 or less extensions in a single Incoming Call Distribution Group be monitored Activation of an NDSS button is only required the first time that a button for a newly registered extension is created Once an NDSS button has been activated by being pressed the first time any further NDSS buttons for the same monitored extension will automatically display the extension status without needing to be activated To use the NDSS Monitor Release feature an extension must be assigned as a manager 511 Manager Assignment A maximum of two ports of each BRI card can be assigned to transmit extension status information ON Through system programming it is possible to assign a maximum number of hops transfers between PBXs that extension status
173. and to a G CO button the same trunk group to more than one G CO button more than one L CO button Dialling the Trunk Access number selects a CO button in the following order S CO gt G CO gt L CO e Direct Trunk Access Pressing an idle CO button automatically switches on the hands free operation mode and allows a user to use On hook Dialling The user need not press the SP PHONE button MONITOR button or lift the handset e Group Hunting Order for Idle Line Access An idle trunk is selected from the trunk groups assigned for Idle Line Access If multiple trunk groups are available the trunk group hunting sequence can be determined through system programming e Trunk Hunting Order for Idle Line Access and Trunk Group Access The trunk hunting sequence in a trunk group from lowest numbered trunk from highest numbered trunk or rotation can be determined through system programming Feature Guide 1 5 Making Call Features e A company name or customer name can be assigned on a trunk port basis so that the operator or extension user can view the destination that the external caller is trying to reach before answering This is useful for example when multiple companies share the same operator e Itis possible to identify the trunk ports that have trunks connected This prevents extension users from originating a call to a trunk that is not connected PT Programming Manual References 400 LCOT BRI Trunk Connection 4
174. ard the caller hears the designated greeting message In addition to the normal greeting message an extension user can record a different greeting message for each time mode day lunch break night 2 2 4 Time Service Recording Example e Normal Greeting Message You have reached John am sorry cannot take your call right now Please leave a message e Greeting Message for lunch mode You have reached John am sorry am out for lunch right now Please leave a message If both the greeting message for a certain time mode and the normal greeting message have been recorded callers will hear the greeting message for that time mode However if no greeting message has been recorded for a certain time mode the normal greeting message will be played instead If neither the normal greeting message nor the greeting message for a certain time mode have been recorded incoming calls will not be redirected to the SVM card in that time mode For example if a greeting message has only been recorded for night mode and no normal greeting message has been recorded incoming calls can only be redirected to an SVM card in night mode No incoming calls will be redirected to the SVM card in day lunch break mode Direct Recording An extension user can leave a voice message directly in the message box of an extension In this case the target extension will not ring It is also possible to transfer a caller directly to the message box of an ex
175. ard to each trunk card Note Power Failure Connections must be made within the same shelf An extension card cannot have a Power Failure Connection with a trunk card of another shelf Through system programming it is possible to allow trunk calls that are established during a power failure to be maintained even when the power returns and the connection is switched back to the normal configuration from the Power Failure Connection However if no special programming is performed the connection will be dropped when power returns The BRI8 one PFT port and BRI4 one PFT port cards can also be used for Power Failure Connections For details about Power Failure Connections refer to the Installation Manual KX TDA100 KX TDA200 The analogue trunk cards and extension cards as well as the number of PFT ports ports which can be used for Power Failure Connections are as follows Trunk Cards LCOT16 4 PFT ports LCOT8 2 PFT ports and LCOT4 2 PFT ports Extension Cards MSLC16 4 PFT ports SLC16 4 PFT ports DHLC8 2 PFT ports and SLC8 2 PFT ports Only connect one extension card to each trunk card Feature Guide 2 4 Fault Recovery Diagnostics Note Through system programming it is possible to allow trunk calls that are established during a power failure to be maintained even when the power returns and the connection is switched back to the normal configuration from the Power Failure Connection However if no special pr
176. asily use this feature by pressing the ISDN Hold button Conditions This feature complies with the following European Telecommunication Standard ETS specification ETS 300 141 Call Hold HOLD supplementary service ISDN Hold Button A flexible button can be customised as the ISDN Hold button The availability of this feature is dependent on the contract with the telephone company The TRS Barring feature is applied when making a call after activating this feature 1 8 1 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring ARS cannot be applied to the call dialled after activating this feature gt 1 9 1 Automatic Route Selection ARS It is impossible to seize any other trunk during this feature PT Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 19 2 Flexible Buttons Feature Guide 221 1 20 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN Service Features 1 20 1 7 Call Transfer CT by ISDN Description An ISDN call can be transferred to an outside party using the ISDN service of the telephone company instead of the PBX feature without occupying a second ISDN line Conditions e This feature complies with the following European Telecommunication Standard ETS specification ETS 300 369 Explicit Call Transfer ECT supplementary service e The availability of this feature is dependent on the contract with the telephone company e This feature can be enabled or disabled on an ISDN port bas
177. at Controls whether time is displayed in 12 hour or 24 hour format Conditions SMDR Format The following SMDR format can be set through system programming in order to match the paper size being used in the printer a Page Length determines the number of lines per page 802 SMDR Page Length b Skip Perforation determines the number of lines to be skipped at the end of every page 803 SMDR Skip Perforation The page length should be at least four lines longer than the skip perforation length Explanation E eee eee O O O Oo E O O CO O 5 Page 5 O Length 6 Skip O O Perforation O O Oa ae aai O O O O O S Machine O Perforation O Q O SMDR data is not deleted even if the PBX is reset Feature Guide 263 1 25 Administrative Information Features 264 e Ifthe PBX is reset during a conversation the call will not be recorded on SMDR e The following calls are regarded as two separate calls for SMDR Calls before and after the flash recall EFA signal is manually sent during a conversation Trunk to trunk calls by Call Transfer FWD or DISA recording each as incoming call and outgoing call e The PBX waits for a preprogrammed time period between the end of dialling and start of the SMDR timer for outgoing trunk calls When the PBX has sent out all dialled digits to the telephone company and this timer expires the PBX starts counting the call A display PT shows the ela
178. at the PBX will automatically proceed into the recording mode Installation Manual References KX TDA30 2 5 4 MSG2 Card KX TDA100 KX TDA200 2 6 1 OPB3 Card KX TDA0190 2 6 6 MSG4 Card KX TDA0191 KX TDA600 2 8 1 OPB3 Card KX TDA0190 2 8 5 MSG4 Card KX TDA0191 PT Programming Manual References 631 Sequences in Queuing Time Table 730 Outgoing Message OGM Floating Extension Number Feature Guide References 3 1 Capacity of System Resources Feature Guide 167 1 16 Optional Device Features User Manual References 2 1 5 Recording Outgoing Messages OGM 168 Feature Guide 1 16 Optional Device Features 1 16 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA Description An outside caller can access specific PBX features as if the caller is an SLT extension user in the PBX when the incoming call destination is a DISA floating extension number assigned to each DISA message The caller can have direct access to features such as e Placing an intercom call to an extension operator or any floating extensions eg modem for remote system administration an external pager for TAFAS e Calling an outside party via the PBX e Operating some PBX remote features eg FWD DISA Intercept Routing No Dial If the caller fails to dial any digits within a preprogrammed time period DISA 1st Dial Time for Intercept following the outgoing message OGM the call is redirected to the operator extension 211 DISA In
179. at the caller will hear a ringback tone within a preprogrammed time period first before hearing an outgoing message OGM 209 DISA Delayed Answer Time e Call Retry While hearing a ringback reorder or busy tone retrying the call is possible by pressing X System programming selects whether pressing during a trunk to trunk conversation returns to the DISA top menu or sends a DTMF tone e DISA Mute Time It is possible to set the Mute time until the outgoing message OGM plays and the PBX starts to receive the DTMF signalling after the caller reaches the DISA line es End of Call Detection If a call through DISA is routed to a trunk DISA can be used to detect the end of the call This function can be disabled through system programming If disabled DISA is released when the trunk to trunk connection is made The following three types of tone detection can be enabled for each trunk group to disconnect a trunk to trunk call via DISA Silence Detection 475 DISA Silence Detection Continuous Signal Detection 476 DISA Continuous Signal Detection Cyclic Signal Detection 477 DISA Cyclic Signal Detection es Trunk to Trunk Call Duration Limitation For a call between two outside parties even if end of call detection cannot be performed the call can be disconnected by a system timer gt 1 10 8 Trunk Call Limitation If the timer expires the line will be disconnected unless the originating caller extends th
180. ation PS Features PSs e g KX TCA255 KX TD7690 can be connected to this PBX It is possible to use the PBX features using the PS like a PT A PS can also be used in parallel with a wired telephone Wireless XDP Parallel Mode In this case the wired telephone is the main telephone and the PS is the sub telephone 1 24 Portable Station PS Features Hospitality Features This PBX has several features that support its use in a hotel type environment Extensions corresponding to guest rooms can be checked in or checked out by a designated hotel operator who can also check or set wake up calls and print out records of guest charges 1 26 1 Hospitality Features SUMMARY Built in Simplified Voice Message SVM Features By just installing an optional voice message card in the PBX simple answering machine services can be provided 1 16 8 Built in Simplified Voice Message SVM Cellular Phone Features KX TDA6920 KX TDA0920 KX TDA3920 required This PBX supports the use of cellular phones and other outside destinations with the PBX Cellular phones can be treated as extensions within the PBX and paired with wired telephones in Cellular Phone XDP Parallel Mode 1 32 1 Cellular Phone Features SUMMARY 6 Feature Guide List of Abbreviations A AA Automated Attendant ACD Automatic Call Distribution ANI Automatic Number Identification AOC Advice of Charge APT Analogue Proprietary Telepho
181. ature Guide References 2 2 1 Class of Service COS Feature Guide 139 1 10 Conversation Features 1 10 9 Parallelled Telephone Description Multiple telephones can be connected to the same port This is useful to increase the number of telephones without additional extension cards The combinations and features of the parallelled telephones are described below Features Descriptions Connections Parallel Mode Parallel mode involves the connection of an SLT to an APT ora DPT that is connected to a Super Hybrid port When parallel mode is enabled the two telephones APT DPT SLT PBX _ DPT SLT Extn 101 Extn 101 function as follows e Both share the extension number of the APT Extn 102 telephone connected directly to the PBX main telephone SLT Extn 102 e Either telephone can make or answer a call EXtra Device Port XDP mode involves the connection of an SLT toa DPT SLT Digital XDP connection allows the number of DPTs that the PBX supports to increase XDP Mode DPT that is connected to a Super Hybrid port Unlike parallel mode each telephone can act as a completely different extension with its own extension number 2 1 1 Extension Port Configuration SLT Extn 101 Extn 105 Digital XDP Digital XDP involves the connection of a DPT toa DPT DPT DPT that is connected to a DPT port or Super Hybrid p
182. atures gesteet dest EE 320 1 29 5 1 Network Direct Station Selection ND 320 1 29 5 2 Centralised Voice Mail visi cccsesscesceess iesse ere A EE A EEE REEE TET O O E a a E 325 1 29 6 Network ICD Group EE 328 1 29 6 1 PS Roaming by Network ICD Group 329 1 30 IP Proprietary Telephone IP PT Features ccccccesssseeseeseeeeesseseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeesnenes 331 1 30 1 IP Proprietary Telephone PPI 331 1 31 Computer Telephony Integration CTI Features cccssscceseeeeessseeeeeesseneeeenseeees 333 1 31 1 Computer Telephony Integration CT 333 Teo PC Ree 336 1 32 Cellular Phone Features nnnnsssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nannan nn 338 1 32 1 Cellular Phone Features GUMMAPNY 338 2 System Configuration and Administration Features csceee 339 2 1 System Configuration Hardwat e cecccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeensneeeeeeeeenseseeeeneneeeeeeeeeeseeneees 340 2 1 1 Extension Port Configuration E 340 2 2 System Configuration Software cccccesecccceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeseeneeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeseneeseneeeeees 342 2 2 1 Class of Seivic COS EE 342 222 GrOUp EE 344 22 3 Tenant SENCE E 348 2 2 4 Time Service EE 351 Feature Guide 13 14 225 Operator EE 355 2 2 6 Manager Features cas cn esau aise ape decpe ein ee peared nets ee ele Rete 356 2 3 System Data COM aces cate seess stees eege 358 2 3 1 PC e enn E 358 23 2 A Wel nl ln e kiara aria aine a
183. atus of selected room extensions from Check in to Check out Room extension data such as Timed Reminder or Last Number Redial data is cleared and Remote Extension Dial Lock is turned on restricting some calls This can be useful to prevent the room extension from being used when no guest is checked in When checking a room extension out the operator can enter customer charges such as minibar charges A guest bill showing these charges as well as call charges can be printed If necessary the guest charge data entered can be edited later and the bill reprinted Room Status Control Mode Pressing a Room Status Control button when the PT is idle allows the hotel operator extension to enter Room Status Control mode When in Room Status Control mode the corresponding Room Status Control button s light flashes red The Room Status Control button that was pressed determines which room status each room extension can be switched to For example if the Check in button was pressed the Check in button s light flashes red and the hotel operator can select which room extensions to check in In addition DSS buttons on the hotel operator s extension or a paired DSS Console show the room status of each extension as follows Light Pattern Status Off Check out Red on Check in Example Use Check in Mode DSS button CTT Room101_ Rooms 101 and 103 CTT Room102 are currently in CL Room103 check in status Nl CTT Room104
184. available for the specified extension e Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND setting 1 3 1 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND e Incoming Call Distribution Group Log in Log out 1 2 2 7 Log in Log out e Absent Message setting gt 1 18 2 Absent Message e Extension Dial Lock 1 8 3 Extension Dial Lock e Time Service Changing the Time Mode day lunch break night 2 2 4 Time Service Conditions e When a trunk call is made using Walking COS the Class of Service of the specified extension is applied 2 2 1 Class of Service COS the budget of the specified extension is applied gt 1 8 2 Budget Management the Itemised Billing code of the specified extension is applied 1 9 1 Automatic Route Selection ARS the specified extension number is recorded on SMDR as the call originator instead of the extension number of the actual extension used 1 25 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR e Walking COS is also available through DISA 1 16 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA e Extension PIN An extension personal identification number PIN is required to use this feature gt 1 27 1 Extension Personal Identification Number PIN If the wrong PIN is entered three times the line will be disconnected e This feature can not be used for extensions which the extension being operated is prevented from calling by Internal Call Block 1 1 2 2 Internal Cal
185. avel between NDSS monitor PBXs Example ISDN Network Port Setting E 4001 NDSS Idle Busy IP GW QSIG IP data is routed through the network according to the routing tables of the IP GW cards When using VoIP it is necessary to identify the monitor PBXs to which to transmit extension status information for each card that will be used This is done by specifying the extension number of any extension for example the PBX operator at the monitor PBX as a Network Operator extension for that IP GW card PBX 1 Network ID 1 4001 Idle Busy Feature Guide 321 1 29 Networking Features 322 Example VoIP Network PBX 1 PBX 2 E Network IS N ID 1 4001 NDSS SS g 4001 NDSS ET Idle Idle Busy IP Network 4 Busy PBX 3 PBX 4 Network 5 ID 2 Ji 4001 lt Idle gt Busy Mixed Network When using the NDSS feature over a mixed network containing both VoIP portions and ISDN line portions it is possible to set whether status information will be transferred between VolP and ISDN cards within each PBX For example if the monitor PBX is on a VoIP network and monitored PBXs are on an ISDN network the PBX that acts as a gateway between the VolP and ISDN networks must have this setting enabled for ISDN to VolP Network Monitor Extension Registration Monitor PBX Register the extensions attached to other PBXs that w
186. ays PT Programming Manual References None Feature Guide 1 16 Optional Device Features Feature Guide References 2 2 1 Class of Service COS User Manual References 1 9 2 If an External Relay is Connected Feature Guide 187 1 17 Caller ID Features 1 17 Caller ID Features 1 17 1 Caller ID Description The PBX receives caller information such as the caller s name and telephone number through the trunk This information can then be shown on the displays of PTs PSs or SLTs that support FSK type Caller ID The PBX can modify a received number according to preprogrammed tables so that an extension user can easily use the received number to call the caller back For example if an area code is not required to call outside destinations in a certain area but received Caller ID numbers from that area contain an area code it is possible to store that area code in a modification table so that it is deleted automatically from received numbers Automatic Caller ID Number Modification 1 Features Caller ID includes the following features Feature Description amp Reference Caller ID Caller s information which is sent from an analogue trunk The following Caller ID signalling types are supported FSK and DTMF Calling Line Identification Presentation CLIP Caller s information which is sent from an ISDN line 1 20 1 2 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP
187. ber Number N NDSS Network Direct Station Selection O OGM Outgoing Message OHCA Off hook Call Announcement OPX Off Premise Extension P MP Point to multipoint P P Point to Point PIN Personal Identification Number PRI gt Primary Rate Interface PS Portable Station PT Proprietary Telephone S CO gt Single CO SLT gt Single Line Telephone SMDR gt Station Message Detail Recording SVM gt Built in Simplified Voice Message T TAFAS gt Trunk Answer from Any Station TEI gt Terminal Endpoint Identifier Feature Guide U V X TRG gt Trunk Group TRS Barring Toll Restriction Call Barring UCD gt Uniform Call Distribution VM Voice Mail VoIP Voice over Internet Protocol VPN gt Virtual Private Network VPS Voice Processing System XDP EXtra Device Port Feature Guide 9 Table of Contents 10 Call Handling FOALUIES EN E ee riet Ke RT ae si cesses ck cee tase ctictacteiatec cee cnc cena ieieccbepscaundencessiastedeieomenceiatbns 16 Incoming Trunk Call e 16 Incoming Trunk Call Features GUMMAPY AA 16 Direct Imine DIL wsccccsecc tasks eegene aaa eee esheets deeg Rara a Rea 20 Direct Inward Dialling DID Direct Dialling In DDI 0 ec eee eee ec eeeeeeeee cence eeee tees teaeeeaeeeeeetaeeseaeesnaeseaeeeeeees 22 Multiple Subscriber Number MSN Ringing Service ecceecceceeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeesea
188. bol and the decimal point are programmable Call duration during a trunk call Line 001 11 02 28 Conditions e Multilingual Display Each extension can select its display language through personal programming Display Language Selection e Display Contrast It is possible to adjust the display contrast through personal programming Display Contrast Selection This is available only for DPTs e Display Backlight Each extension can select its display backlight on or off through personal programming Display Backlight Selection This is available for the KX T7633 KX T7636 and IP PTs e Characters name or digits number exceeding the display s size limitation are not displayed In this case information which have been programmed is hidden but not altered PT Programming Manual References 130 Decimal Point Position for Currency 131 Currency Feature Guide 1 19 Proprietary Telephone PT Features User Manual References 3 1 2 Settings on the Programming Mode Feature Guide 209 1 20 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN Service Features 1 20 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN Service Features 1 20 1 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN 1 20 1 1 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN SUMMARY Description ISDN is a digital switching and transmission network ISDN transmits voice data and image in digital format ISDN lines if available can be connect
189. bout programmer codes refer to the On line Help of the Maintenance Console The required format of each code is as follows Item Length User Level Programmer Code 0 16 characters Administrator Level Programmer Code 4 16 characters Installer Level Programmer Code 4 16 characters Warning to the Administrator or Installer regarding the system password 1 Please provide all system passwords to the customer 2 To avoid unauthorised access and possible abuse of the PBX keep the passwords secret and inform the customer of the importance of the passwords and the possible dangers if they become known to others 3 The PBX has default passwords preset For security change these passwords the first time that you programme the PBX 4 Change the passwords periodically 5 Itis strongly recommended that passwords of 10 numbers or characters be used for maximum protection against unauthorised access For a list of numbers and characters that can be used in system passwords refer to Section in the PC Programming Manual Feature Guide 363 2 3 System Data Control 6 Ifa system password is forgotten it can be found by loading a backup of the system data into a PC and checking the password using the Maintenance Console software If you do not have a backup of the system data you must reset the PBX to its factory defaults and reprogramme it Therefore we strongly recommend maintaining a backup of the syst
190. by selecting from a private directory of names and telephone numbers System Speed Dialling Makes a call by selecting from a common directory of names and Directory numbers PBX Extension Dialling Makes a call by selecting from a common directory of extension Directory names Shortcut Directory Accesses a feature by selecting from a private directory of feature names and numbers Quick Dialling Makes a call or accesses a feature easily by selecting from a private directory of names and numbers PT Programming Manual References 001 System Speed Dialling Number 002 System Speed Dialling Name 004 Extension Name Feature Guide 1 24 Portable Station PS Features 1 24 4 PS Feature Buttons Description A PS user can use PBX feature using a combination of buttons button a specified number x or and or display operation The flexible buttons and the display are customised through PS programming The button assignment is the same for PT gt 1 19 2 Flexible Buttons Some special feature buttons e g WAVESEARCH button may be customised depending on the PS type Feature Guide 253 1 24 Portable Station PS Features 1 24 5 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode 254 Description A PS can be used in parallel with a wired telephone PT SLT In this case the wired telephone is the main telephone and the PS is the sub telephone When Wireless XDP Parallel Mode is enabled the two telephones share one ext
191. call 1 29 4 2 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP and Calling Connected Name Identification Presentation CNIP CONP by QSIG Connected Line Identification Presentation COLP Sends the number of the answered party to the QSIG network when answering a call 1 29 4 2 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP and Calling Connected Name Identification Presentation CNIP CONP by QSIG Calling Line Identification Restriction CLIR Prevents the caller s CLI being presented to the called party by the caller 1 29 4 2 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP and Calling Connected Name Identification Presentation CNIP CONP by QSIG Connected Line Identification Restriction COLR Prevents COLP being sent by the answered party 1 29 4 2 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP and Calling Connected Name Identification Presentation CNIP CONP by QSIG Calling Name Identification Presentation CNIP Sends the caller s name to the QSIG network when making a call 1 29 4 2 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP and Calling Connected Name Identification Presentation CNIP CONP by QSIG Feature Guide 311 1 29 Networking Features 312 Service Description amp Reference Connected Name Identification Presentation CONP Sends the name
192. calls to the extension number of the actual PS as registered at one of the other PBXs Then an Incoming Call Distribution ICD Group is created containing the registered PS and the virtual PSs When a call is received at one of the PBXs it is forwarded to all of the other PBXs One private network channel is used to forward an incoming call to one other PBX Therefore if a PS is registered at 3 other PBXs 3 private network channels are needed to forward a single call to all of the PBXs Each PBX can store the current communication status of each PS In Range or Out of Range If the status of the PS is set to Out of Range when a call is received the call will be refused and the private network channel will be released immediately Since the PS can only be set to In Range at a single PBX at one time any other PBXs to which the call is transferred will refuse the call releasing the VoIP or ISDN channels Conditions e Hardware Requirement The KX TDA6920 KX TDA0920 or KX TDA3920 SD Memory Card for Software Upgrade to Enhanced Version e If no signal is received from a PS for the preprogrammed length of time when an incoming call is received the communication status of the PS is set to Out of Range if enabled through system programming Feature Guide 329 1 29 Networking Features es When a PS comes within range of a certain PBX Out of Range status is automatically released However in some negative wireless network conditions Out o
193. case the FWD and DND settings 1 3 1 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND for each extension port are disregarded It is programmable whether the calls queue when all extension ports in the group are busy through system programming If the queuing is disabled through system programming the call will be redirected to the destination assigned on the trunk group which receives the call by the Intercept Routing feature Feature Guide 1 23 Voice Mail Features Conditions General e Itis possible to call an extension extension port in a VM group directly If the calls are routed directly to the extension in the group it is possible to enable some features e g FWD Idle Extension Hunting on the extension in the group The Voice Mail DTMF DPT Digital Integration e g command transmit is also available on the extension e One touch Voice Mail Feature Access It is possible to assign a One touch Dialling button for direct access to a Voice Mail feature gt 1 6 1 2 One touch Dialling For example to access a mailbox mailbox number 123 of the VPS extension number 165 directly assign 165 6123 to a One touch Dialling button When pressing this button the outgoing message OGM of the mailbox will be heard KX TDA30 e Al ports in a VM DPT group must be connected to either the same DLC card or to the pre installed Super Hybrid ports KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 e Al ports in a VM DPT group must be
194. cation Group No Table lt Modification Table gt 1 gt Modification Table 1 2 3 Area Code Removed No of Digits Added No f Local International 3 Blank Call Data 1 Oe Local International 00 2 001 Call Data 2 Local International Call Data 10 Long Distance Not o 0 Call Data programmable Note When caller s information is sent through an ISDN line and the call type is Subscriber National or International the following modification table is used instead of the above table lt Modification Table gt Ss Removed No of Digits Added No Subscriber Call Data 0 Blank National Call Data 0 0 International Call Data 0 00 Feature Guide 189 190 1 17 Caller ID Features lt Modification Flowchart gt A trunk call with the caller s information is received Checks the Table Selection Table 1 Is the area code found in local international call data in the modification table Yes e g 00987654321 de Checks the local international call data No e g 3344556677 bd Checks the long distance call data Matches Data 2 Modifies the number as programmed Removed number of digits 2 Added number 001 Modifies the number as programmed Received number 00987654321 Removed number of digits 0 A Added number 0 Modified number 88987654321 001987654321
195. ces 1 3 1 2 Call Forwarding FWD 258 Feature Guide 1 25 Administrative Information Features 1 25 Administrative Information Features 1 25 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR Description Automatically records detailed information for each extension 1 SMDR Output Port The Serial Interface RS 232C port can be used to output the SMDR data The following devices can be connected e Serial Interface RS 232C port PC printer etc SMDR Output Data General The following data will be recorded and sent to the SMDR output port a Trunk call information incoming outgoing b Intercom call information outgoing c Log in Log out information d PBX error log 2 4 3 Local Alarm Information e Hospitality feature information 1 26 1 Hospitality Features SUMMARY f Printing Message information 1 25 2 Printing Message Memory for SMDR A specified number of call records can be stored in the PBX If more calls are originated or received the oldest record is overwritten by the newest one KX TDA600 When an EMEC card is installed the number of SMDR records that can be stored will increase SMDR Format Type and Contents The following three types of output format can be selected through system programming Feature Guide 259 1 25 Administrative Information Features 260 Pattern A 80 digits without call charge information Date Time Ext CO Dial Number Ring Duration ACC Code CD 8
196. cess Code 10 digits 10 entries trunk group Multiple Subscriber Number g MSN 10 entries per ISDN BRI port Number of Characters of Name 20 Printing message 8 Queuing Time Table 64 128 Ring Tone Pattern Plan 8 Simultaneous Programmers one system programmer 63 personal programmers one manager programmer 63 personal programmers 64 personal programmers SMDR Call Storage 1000 calls 4000 calls w 200 calls EMEC card Special Carrier Access Code 16 digits 20 entries 16 digits 100 entries Tenant 8 Time Service Holiday 24 Verification Code 4 digits 1000 entries Verification Code Personal Identification Number PIN 10 digits 1000 entries 384 Feature Guide 3 1 Capacity of System Resources Dialling Item KX TDA30 KX TDA100 KX KX TDA600 TDA200 Emergency Call 32 digits 10 entries Hot Line 32 digits Key Pad Protocol Dial ISDN 32 digits Service Access Personal Speed Dialling Without EMEC or MEC 32 digits 10 entries extn With EMEC or MEC 32 digits 100 entries extn Quick Dialling digits SO ones an 4 digits 80 entries an additional 4000 8 digit EEN entries w EMEC or MEC card entries w MEC card Redial 32 digits System Speed Dial Without MEC 32 digits 1000 entries Without EMEC or MEC 32 digits 1000 entries With MEC Additional 1000 32 digit entries With EMEC or MEC Additional 1
197. connected to a single DHLC or DLC card PT Programming Manual References 601 Terminal Device Assignment 660 VM Group Floating Extension Number Feature Guide References 1 23 2 Voice Mail DTMF Integration 1 23 3 Voice Mail DPT Digital Integration 3 1 Capacity of System Resources Feature Guide 235 1 23 Voice Mail Features 1 23 2 Voice Mail DTMF Integration 236 Description The PBX and the VPS connected to the PBX can transmit commands using DTMF signals to each other The PBX sends preprogrammed commands using DTMF to the VPS automatically to change the answering service between Voice Mail VM service mode and Automated Attendant AA service mode or to inform the extension status e g busy The VPS sends the commands to the PBX like an SLT The following answering services and features are available 1 Voice Mail VM Service Mode When a caller reaches the VPS the VPS greets and guides the caller to leave a voice message for a specified mailbox Example The VPS sends the message to the caller Thank you for calling Panasonic Please enter the mailbox number of the person you wish to leave your message for d The caller dials the mailbox number Then the dialled number is sent to the VPS via the PBX J The VPS sends the personal greeting to the caller You have reached Mike s voice mail am sorry cannot take your call right now Please leave a message and will call you back A Th
198. cording SMDR 3 1 Capacity of System Resources User Manual References 1 10 1 Using the Telephones in a Hotel type Environment Hospitality Features 266 Feature Guide 1 25 Administrative Information Features 1 25 3 Call Charge Services Description The PBX receives a call charge signal during or after a conversation with an outside party The call charge information is shown on the telephone display and SMDR 1 Call Charge Signal Services The type of call charge service that is used by the PBX is decided by the type of signal received from the telephone company The type of call charge signal received from the telephone company depends on the trunk of the outgoing call The services for each available trunk type are as follows Trunk Service Analogue trunk Pay Tone KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only ISDN line Advice of Charge AOC gt 1 20 1 3 Advice of Charge AOC E1 line Meter Pulse When the pay tone service is used pay tone type 12 kHz 16 kHz should be selected Call Charge Display Upto eight digits including a decimal e g 12345 78 The decimal point position the number of significant decimal digits for currency is programmable Upto three currency characters are programmable e g EUR or for Euro Through PC programming you can select whether the currency characters or symbol are placed in front of or behind the call charge e g 45 12 o
199. csesseeeeeseneeeeeseeeeees 65 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND 65 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND SUMMARPY A 65 Call Forwarding FWD eccccesceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeesaeeaeeeseeeaeeeaeesaaeseaeseaeeseeeseaeeseaeeeeeeeeeesieeseeescaeeeeeeneeees 66 Do Not Disturb DND sisi ect ege edi idence ae teens Heed en ae Nec eee eerie 70 FWD DND Button Group FWD Button 71 Answering FOALUM CS xsicsisceses scisnsssanastestssasantncncnctsenctensstaaancns sxssassasatanacssanincadsntacsatiassienanaan 74 Answering Features EE 74 Answering Features GUMMAPNY Ra 74 Line Preference lncoming ccceseeeeeseeeeeneeeeeeceeeeeneneeeneneeeseesecsseeesessueesesenessaeseneseeesseaeesneeeesseneensneeeneneees 75 Call PICKUP BEE 76 Hands free Answerback ccesecceceseeeeeeeeeeeneneeeeeeeeecensenenaeeeeaeesecageeeesaaeeseseneeeaaeenesaesessneaeesneeeessenaensseeeneneees 78 Making Call FOatures acsccicicccccscscccsesnnscccesasccnecsaccscacsacceiensascceesenasnszeatsecczesaacnaeanccdeesasuacce 79 e lide GE ee ee eee 79 Automatic Extension Release ects cette eta eet eaeeaeeaaeaaeeeseeesesesseeeeeeseeneeene 80 Intercom e EE 81 JEE GATOS gege gated Set venta acted acne A KEEA AEEA ATRE 82 Trunk Call Features GUMMAPNY A 82 Emergency UE 83 ACCOUNT Code Enty EE 84 Dial Type Selections ncen eeni a E ia hci ante eee eee cede 85 Reverse Clou 86 TRUK BUSY QUT EE 87 PAUSE INSORUOM sc 33 soccdccueceiese deed egd
200. d Mode 4 e Hold Alarm tone pattern has a default gt 3 3 1 Tones Ring Tones PT Programming Manual References 200 Hold Recall Time User Manual References 1 4 2 Holding a Call Feature Guide 147 1 12 Holding Features 1 12 2 Call Park Description An extension user can place a call into a common parking zone of the PBX The Call Park feature can be used as a transferring feature this releases the user from the parked call to perform other operations The parked call can be retrieved by any extension user Conditions Automatic Call Park It is possible to select an idle parking zone automatically Retry If the specified parking zone is occupied or there is no vacant zone for Automatic Call Park the originator will hear a busy tone Retrying is possible while hearing the busy tone by selecting parking zone or a vacant zone Call Park Recall If a parked call is not retrieved within a preprogrammed time period Call Park Recall will be heard at the Transfer Recall destination assigned to the extension which parked the call If the destination is engaged in a call the Hold Alarm will be heard If a parked trunk call is not retrieved within a preprogrammed time period Default 30 minutes it is automatically disconnected Call Park Button Pressing the Call Park button parks or retrieves a call in a preset parking zone A flexible button can be customised as the Call Park button It shows the current status of
201. d at the local PBX the call can be sent to the remote PBX When an extension number is dialled the PBX first searches local extensions for a matching number If there is no match the PBX then checks the TIE Line Routing Table for a corresponding entry If an entry is found the call is sent to the connected PBX Case 1 Extension 1012 of PBX 1 dials extension number 1011 The dialled number is found at the local PBX so extension 1012 of PBX 1 is connected to extension 1011 of PBX 1 Case 2 Extension 1012 of PBX 1 dials extension number 1013 The dialled number is not found at the local PBX so the call is redirected to the specified TIE Line and extension 1012 of PBX 1 is connected to extension 1013 of PBX 2 Hardware Requirement The KX TDA6920 KX TDA0920 or KX TDA3920 SD Memory Card for Software Upgrade to Enhanced Version This feature is not available when the PBXs are connected by a VoIP network System programming is required to enable this feature 304 Feature Guide 1 29 Networking Features e When a TIE line call arrives at a busy extension which has disabled Call Waiting the caller will hear a busy tone If required Intercept Routing Busy DND can be activated e The Inter digit time can be assigned for TIE line calls PT Programming Manual References 453 DID Destination 500 Trunk Group Number Feature Guide References 1 1 1 6 Intercept Routing 1 3 1 2 Call Forwarding FWD 1 8 1
202. d the subsequent digits when the ARS mode is enabled 1 9 1 Automatic Route Selection ARS PT Programming Manual References 416 LCOT Pause Time 88 Feature Guide 1 5 Making Call Features 1 5 4 8 Host PBX Access Code Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX Description This PBX can be installed behind an existing PBX host PBX by connecting the extension ports of the host PBX to the trunk ports of this PBX behind PBX A Host PBX Access code is required for the behind PBX to access the telephone company e g to make outside calls through the host PBX The Trunk access number of the host PBX should be stored as a Host PBX Access code on a trunk group of the behind PBX A preprogrammed Pause time will be automatically inserted between the user dialled Host PBX Access code and the subsequent digits 1 5 4 7 Pause Insertion Example Telephone Company Ce E LA we BZ Host PBX Access Code 0 Host PBX ER ES Outside Party 01 23 4567 Idle Line TEF A No 9 em See Extn 101 Extn 102 A TRG1 Dials Ke 23 4567 Host PBX Access Code Telephone No Dials 9 0 01 23 4567 Dials 9 101 Zecken Rens No Host PBX Extn No Access Code of the Host PBX Note 0 should be assigned as a Host PBX Access code for trunk group TRG 1 of the behind PBX Feature Guide 89 1 5 Making Call Features 90 Conditions TRS Barring TRS Barring checks only the dialled tel
203. de b L2 Data Link Mode c Access Mode Point to Point Point to Multipoint d TEI Assignment Mode Fix 00 63 Automatic 2 Automatic Time Adjustment It is possible to adjust the PBX clock automatically in the following two ways a Summer Time Daylight Saving Time Setting The start and end dates of the summer time can be programmed The PBX clock will be adjusted one hour forward or backward at 2 00AM of the programmed date if enabled through system programming It means 2 00 AM will become 3 00 AM on the start date of the summer time and 2 00 AM will become 1 00 AM on the end date Note If the Timed Reminder Wake up call is set Onthe summertime start date the setting between 2 00 AM and 3 00 AM will not happen On the summer time end date the setting between 1 00 AM and 2 00 AM will ring twice b Time Information from Telephone Company Time information can be received on the following calls e An incoming or outgoing call through an ISDN line e An incoming call through an analogue line with Caller ID which includes the time information The PBX clock will be adjusted everyday with the first call after 3 05 AM if enabled through system programming Note If the Timed Reminder Wake up call is set the setting will not happen or will ring twice depending on the adjustment Conditions e SMDR will record the call information using the PBX clock so that the recording time will be overlapped at the end of summer
204. e y 0 4 p 0 4 U O Ea dl y 0 4 Primary Secondary J Ethernet Port Ethernet Port i i Main Office Branch Office Conditions e Hardware Requirement An IP EXT card e IP PT registration is required through system programming before an IP PT can be used with the PBX An IP PT cannot be used unless an extension number is assigned For details on how to register IP PTs see the Installation Manual e The following features cannot be used with an IP PT XDP gt 1 10 9 Parallelled Telephone Digital XDP 1 10 9 Parallelled Telephone OHCA gt 1 7 4 3 Off hook Call Announcement OHCA Walking Extension gt 1 27 3 Walking Extension Using PC Phone or PC Console on a connected PC gt 1 31 2 PC Phone PC Console Installation Manual References KX TDA100 KX TDA200 2 5 8 IP EXT16 Card KX TDA0470 KX TDA600 2 7 8 IP EXT16 Card KX TDA0470 Feature Guide 331 1 30 IP Proprietary Telephone IP PT Features PT Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 3 2 Exclusive Features Table 332 Feature Guide 1 31 Computer Telephony Integration CTI Features 1 31 Computer Telephony Integration CTI Features 1 31 1 Computer Telephony Integration CTI Description Connecting a PC to a DPT or connecting a CTI Server to this PBX enables extension users to make use of advanced features by using the stored data in
205. e 171 1 16 Optional Device Features Flowchart A DISA call from an outside party is received MSG cards Yes Is there an idle port on the DISA Delayed Answer Time Time out Does the trunk group that The PBX answers the call received the call employ Intercept Routing Busy DND A gt The outgoing message the PBX starts to receive the DTMF signalling Is the first digit dialled DISA Mute Time Yes Time out OGM plays and pens routed to the intercept The call is routed E to the operator Intercept Routing dda eee mm mm mm mm mm No Destination No DISA 1st Dial Time for Intercept Time out Yes The call is routed to the Operator Intercept Routing No Destination The outgoing message OGM stops Is the second digit dialled Yes Goes to DISA 2nd Dial Time for AA Time out No Is the first dialled digit assigned a destination for the DISA AA service dialled number The PBX receives the following dialled digits and checks the the call is routed to the destination What is the DISA security mode Continued to the next page 172 Feature Guide 1 16 Optional Device Features Continued from the previous page No Security gt Goes to What is the di
206. e The PBX is ringing the corresponding extension 1 BT busy tone The called extension is busy 2 ROT reorder tone The dialled number is invalid 3 DND DND tone The called extension has set DND gt 1 3 1 3 Do Not 4 Disturb DND Answer The called extension has answered the call 5 FWD VM RBT FWD to _ The called extension has set FWD to VPS and the Voice Mail ringback tone PBX is calling another port of the VPS FWD VM BT FWD to The called extension has set FWD to VPS and all 7 Voice Mail busy tone ports of the VPS are busy FWD EXT RBT FWD to The PBX is calling an extension other than the one 8 extension ringback tone dialled FWD or Idle Extension Hunting 1 2 1 Idle Extension Hunting may be assigned by the called extension Confirm confirmation The PBX receives confirmation that the feature has 9 tone been successfully set or cancelled e g Message Waiting on the extension Disconnect The caller has hung up 9 240 Feature Guide 1 23 Voice Mail Features Example An incoming call reaches the VPS The VPS greets the caller Thank you for calling Panasonic If you PBX know the extension number of the person you wish Transfer The caller dials the extension number extn 102 The VPS will transfer the call to the extension via the PBX If the extension is not available the PBX sends i sa DTMF status signal of the extension busy status to T tatus as the
207. e 1 24 1 Portable Station PS Connection Handover e 1 25 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR CD Condition Code e 2 2 4 Time Service Features Using Time Service e 3 1 Capacity of System Resources 398 Feature Guide 3 4 Revision History 3 4 5 KX TDA30 PSMPR Software File Version 2 0xxx New Contents e 1 5 4 6 Trunk Busy Out e 1 16 7 Automatic Fax Transfer e 1 16 9 External Sensor e 1 16 10 External Relay Control e 1 26 Hospitality Features e 1 29 5 1 Network Direct Station Selection NDSS e 2 2 6 Manager Features Trunk Busy Out Clear e 2 3 3 Password Security Changed Contents e 1 1 3 3 Call Waiting e 1 6 1 4 Last Number Redial Outgoing Call Log e 1 8 1 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring e 1 19 2 Flexible Buttons e 1 24 1 Portable Station PS Connection e 1 25 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR e 1 27 4 Timed Reminder e 1 31 1 Computer Telephony Integration CTI e 2 3 6 Flexible Numbering Fixed Numbering e 3 1 Capacity of System Resources Feature Guide 399 3 4 Revision History KX TDA3920 SD Memory Card for Software Upgrade to Enhanced Version only Features e 1 29 5 1 Network Direct Station Selection NDSS e 1 31 1 Computer Telephony Integration CTI SD Memory Card required for some features only 400 Feature Guide 3 4 Revision History 3 4 6 KX TDA30 PSMPR Software File Version 2 2xxx New Contents e 1 5 4 6 Trunk Busy Out e 1 16 8 Built in
208. e busy the incoming calls can wait in a queue Each incoming call distribution group and member extensions can be programmed as desired to handle incoming calls Calls to the group can be monitored by an extension assigned as a supervisor Programming Item Example for Incoming Call Distribution Group 1 with Diagram A through F in the table are described in the following diagram A B Cc D E F Group Floating Group Distribution es No of Queuing Hurry up Overflow Overflow Destination Tenant No Extn No Name Method Extensions Capacity Level Time Day Night No 1 601 Sales Ring 3 5 3 60 100 100 1 2 602 Engineering UCD Max 11 8 90 200 200 5 3 a n na In a Ee EE EE 622 Incoming Call Distribution Group Floating Extension Number 623 Incoming Call Distribution Group Name 624 Incoming Call Distribution Group Distribution Method 632 Maximum Number of Agents 628 Queuing Call Capacity 629 Queuing Hurry up Level 626 Overflow Time 625 Destination for Overflow Time Expiration 627 Destination When All Busy The tenant number is required to determine the time mode day lunch break night 2 2 4 Time Service and the music source for Music on Hold for each group Feature Guide 45 1 2 Receiving Group Features Calls arriving at incoming call distribution group 1
209. e call is already ringing at an extension it will not be redirected This feature is also known as Hurry up Transfer e Hurry up Button A flexible button can be customised as the Hurry up button The number of calls queuing before Manual Queue Redirection may be performed is programmable The button shows the current status as follows Light Pattern Calls in the Waiting Queue Off No queued call Red on At or under the assigned number for Hurry up Rapid red flashing Over the assigned number for Hurry up PT Programming Manual References 628 Queuing Call Capacity 629 Queuing Hurry up Level 630 Queuing Time Table 631 Sequences in Queuing Time Table 632 Maximum Number of Agents Feature Guide References 1 2 2 6 Overflow Feature 1 19 2 Flexible Buttons 3 1 Capacity of System Resources Feature Guide 55 1 2 Receiving Group Features User Manual References 1 8 3 Forwarding a Waiting Call Manual Queue Redirection 56 Feature Guide 1 2 Receiving Group Features 1 2 2 5 VIP Call Description It is possible to assign a priority to incoming call distribution groups If an extension belongs to multiple groups and the extension becomes idle queuing calls in the groups will be distributed to the extension in priority order Each incoming call distribution group can enable or disable the VIP Call mode When multiple groups enable the VIP Call mode the incoming call distribution group with the lowe
210. e caller leaves a message If the call reroutes to the floating extension number of the VM DTMF Group or the extension in the VM DTMF group by such as the FWD feature when the VPS answers the call the PBX will dial the mailbox number of the corresponding group or extension and any other digits required to the VPS automatically using the caller dialled number Follow on ID In this case the caller can reach a mailbox without knowing the mailbox number Available Features for Follow on ID a FWD toa Mailbox b Intercept Routing to a Mailbox c Call Transfer to a Mailbox d Listening to a Message in a Mailbox Automated Attendant AA Service Mode The VPS greets and guides the caller to the desired extension directly without operator assistance VM AA Service AA VM Service It is possible to switch the service mode assigned on the VPS port from the VM service to AA service or vice versa System Explanation 1 Service Mode Assignment Assign the service mode VM service or AA service to the VM DTMF group to correspond with the assignment of the VPS DTMF Command Assignment Assign the DTMF command to suit the VPS settings Feature Guide 1 23 Voice Mail Features Command Default Switching to VM 6 Switching to AA 8 Recording message H Listening message H Note H Mailbox Number VM Service a FWDtoa Mailbox of the VPS b The PBX sends a mailbox number of the corres
211. e dialled number including the Host PBX Access code will be recorded on SMDR only if the modified number setting is selected in the ARS setting for SMDR e When a Host PBX Access code is assigned to a trunk group calls to extensions of the host PBX are not recorded on SMDR e A Host PBX Access Code can be used to record only long distance calls on SMDR when a trunk port is connected directly to the telephone company not a host PBX This is allowed when the long distance code e g O is assigned as the Host PBX Access code All local calls teg calls that do not require a 0 to be dialled first are treated as extensions of the telephone company and do not get recorded on SMDR because in this case this PBX recognises the telephone company as the host PBX Therefore only long distance calls are recorded on SMDR Installation Manual References KX TDA30 2 10 1 Connection of Peripherals KX TDA100 KX TDA200 2 11 1 Connection of Peripherals KX TDA600 2 3 2 EMEC Card KX TDA6105 Feature Guide 1 25 Administrative Information Features 2 13 1 Connection of Peripherals PT Programming Manual References 800 RS 232C Parameter New Line Code 800 RS 232C Parameter Baud Rate 800 RS 232C Parameter Word Length 800 RS 232C Parameter Parity Bit 800 RS 232C Parameter Stop Bit Length 802 SMDR Page Length 803 SMDR Skip Perforation 804 SMDR Outgoing Call Printing 805 SMDR Incoming Call Printing Feat
212. e features of the ISDN Centrex Service of the telephone company e g Call Transfer This is used by putting the current ISDN call on hold by sending a flash recall signal This feature is enabled or disabled for each ISDN port Private Networking Connection QSIG Private networking with QSIG is possible using an ISDN line The QSIG mode Master or Slave can be enabled on an ISDN port basis ISDN Extension 1 20 1 11 ISDN Extension An ISDN BRI PRI port can be used for extension connection While the extension connection is enabled ISDN terminal devices e g ISDN telephone G4 fax machine PC or a behind PBX can be connected to the port When the ISDN port is in P P configuration one ISDN terminal device can be connected to the port When the ISDN port is in P MP configuration a maximum of eight ISDN terminal devices can be connected to the port However only a maximum of two devices can be used simultaneously Feature Guide 1 20 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN Service Features Conditions Overlap En bloc For each ISDN port either Overlap or En bloc can be selected as the dialling method for which the PBX sends telephone numbers to the telephone company The selected dialling method must be offered by the telephone company When Overlap is selected the PBX sends each dialled digit individually When En bloc is selected the PBX sends all of the dialled digits at once In En bloc mode the PBX recogn
213. e from the handset or built in speaker b OHCA Voice from the built in speaker c Whisper OHCA Voice from the handset d Off No notification Notification Method Call Type DPT Other Telephone Intercom Call Call Waiting tone OHCA Call Waiting tone Off Whisper OHCA Off Trunk Call Call Waiting tone Off K Including a doorphone call call via an incoming call distribution group and a trunk call transferred from another extension This feature is also known as Busy Station Signalling BSS Conditions Call Waiting call for an extension in a VM group DPT DTMF is not available Data Line Security Setting Data Line Security cancels the Call Waiting setting gt 1 10 5 Data Line Security Call Waiting Tone A PT user can hear different Call Waiting tones for trunk call and intercom call if Tone 2 has been selected through personal programming Call Waiting Tone Type Selection If Tone 1 has been selected the same Call Waiting tone will be heard for both trunk call and intercom call All Call Waiting tone patterns have a default gt 3 3 1 Tones Ring Tones Caller Information With the Call Waiting tone the caller s information flashes on the display for five seconds followed by a 10 second pause then flashes again for five seconds Call Waiting from the Telephone Company Besides the Call Waiting service within the PBX the Call Waiting tone offered by an analogue line from the telephone
214. e in the waiting queue b The Queuing Time Table is not assigned and there are no extensions logged in c An Overflow command is assigned to the Queuing Time Table d The Overflow time expires e Manual Queue Redirection is performed Available Destination The overflow destinations can be assigned for each incoming call distribution group and each time mode day lunch break night gt 2 2 4 Time Service The destination can be assigned as follows depending on the above conditions e Fora and b 627 Destination When All Busy e orc d and e 625 Destination for Overflow Time Expiration Destination Availability Wired Extension PT SLT ISDN Extension T1 OPX Vv PS Incoming Call Distribution Group PS Ring Group Floating Extension no for SVM VM Group DTMF DPT External Pager TAFAS DISA Analogue ISDN Remote Maintenance Idle Line Access no Phone no Trunk Group Access no Trunk Group no Phone no Other PBX Extension TIE with no PBX Code S ISS IS IS IS IS IS IS ISS IS Other PBX Extension TIE with PBX Code 58 Feature Guide 1 2 Receiving Group Features 2 Busy on Busy The Busy on Busy feature works when the destination for the Intercept Routing Overflow in an Incoming Call Distribution Group feature is not assigned in one of the following conditions a There is no space in the Waiting queue b The Queuing T
215. e may not be shown depending on the type of SLT Incoming Call Log information is not shown on the SLT PT Programming Manual References 001 System Speed Dialling Number 002 System Speed Dialling Name 490 Caller ID Signal Type Feature Guide 191 1 17 Caller ID Features Feature Guide References 1 6 1 5 Speed Dialling Personal System 1 25 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR 192 Feature Guide 1 17 Caller ID Features 1 17 2 Incoming Call Log Description When an incoming public trunk call with the caller s information e g Caller ID is directed to an extension the information is automatically recorded in the call log of the called extension This information is shown on the telephone display and is used for confirming the caller calling back or storing the number and name in the Personal Speed Dialling Example Caller s name 20 digits max Date and time of a call received Answering Status Caller s number 16 digits max John White 12 Dec 10 00AM MON NEW Not Answered 123456789 Call Log buttons CTT Own extension CTT Incoming call distribution group lt NZ NZ NEW is displayed for call records which have not previously been viewed OLD is displayed for call records which have previously been viewed Conditions Call Log Button A flexible button can be customised as the Call Log button for the extension or an incoming c
216. e time by sending any DTMF signalling The caller can prolong the call duration within the preprogrammed time period and preprogrammed number of times 210 DISA Trunk to Trunk Call Prolong Time e Automatic DISA Activation DISA can be set through system programming to automatically activate for the following types of trunk to trunk call to enable detection of the end of the call When a trunk call is forwarded to another trunk Feature Guide 1 16 Optional Device Features When a trunk call is transferred to another trunk When a trunk call to an incoming call distribution group is answered by an outside destination member Before the call is made the PBX confirms that a DISA port is available If no DISA ports are available the call is not routed to a trunk For transferred calls or calls to an ICD Group if the DISA port has become unavailable when the trunk to trunk conversation is actually established the call is established without DISA When using this feature the Trunk to Trunk Call Limitation timer should be enabled In addition prolonging the call through DTMF signalling is not available e DISA Call Transfer from Outside Destination An outside party such as a cellular phone can transfer a trunk call to an extension at the PBX by pressing extension number if DISA is connected by the Automatic DISA Activation feature This feature can be enabled or disabled through system programming The KX
217. each extension port is required to use this feature Feature Guide 195 1 18 Message Features SLT Message Waiting Lamp Light Patterns i 5 A2Qs i lt f i gt 1 28s lt gt Pattern 1 ON OFF Pattern 2 ON OFF p ON attern 3 OFF Pattern 4 ON OFF N Pattern 5 0 OFF Patt 6 sas attern eee Pattern 7 ON OFF Patt 8 Se attern OFF Patt 9 Gi attern OFF ON Pattern 10 OFF 196 Feature Guide 1 18 Message Features Pattern 11 ON OFF Pattern 12 ON OFF e Itis possible to set Message Waiting while hearing a ringback tone busy tone or DND tone e Messages are always left on the original destination extension regardless of that extension s FWD settings e Both the extension that sent and received a message waiting notification can cancel the left message e Ifthe extension that received a notification calls back the extension that sent the notification and the call is answered the notification will be cleared automatically However if a voice message has been left on the VPS whether the notification is cleared or not depends on the VPS settings PT Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 19 2 Flexible Buttons 3 1 Capacity of System Resources User Manual References 1 2 4 When the Dialled Line is Busy or There is No Answer 1 9 5 If a Voice Processing System is Connected Feature Guide 197 1 18 Message Features 1 18 2 Abs
218. eature Guide 1 16 Optional Device Features Note When MSG card expansion has been completed the new MSG card is blank all necessary messages will need to be stored in the card This can be done in two ways a By installing the new MSG card then recording each message again The PBX will automatically store the new recordings in each MSG card b By transferring messages from the PBX to a PC using the Maintenance Console then transferring them back to the PBX with the new MSG card installed e The same message can also be played simultaneously to multiple callers e Recording Methods a Record voice messages through the extension telephone b Transfer prerecorded voice messages from external sound source into the PBX via an external music port Note Record voice messages only avoid the recording of music e After recording messages a manager extension can also play them back for confirmation e Progress tone is sent to a manager extension before recording messages during a preprogrammed time period or during clearing the prerecorded message stored at the floating extension number of desired message The longer one is applied e Record a message when traffic is light early morning or late evening e When the manager tries to record a message he will hear ringback tone if a message channel is in use When all ports of the MSG card s become idle he will hear the progress tone for a preprogrammed time period After th
219. ection and operation refer to the Operating Instructions for the headset This feature is also known as Handset Headset Selection Conditions Hardware Requirement An optional headset If headset mode is on pressing the SP PHONE button activates the headset not the built in speaker To set headset mode on a DPT use personal programming Headset Operation or press the Headset button To set headset mode on an APT use the handset headset selector provided on the set and or on the headset Headset Button A flexible button on a DPT can be customised as a Headset button It is possible to assign a Headset button to a flexible button on an APT but the button will not function Answer Release Button A flexible button can be customised as an Answer button or a Release button Such buttons are useful for headset operation It is possible to answer an incoming call by pressing an Answer button While hearing the Call Waiting tone during a conversation pressing an Answer button enables one to answer the second call by placing the current call on hold Pressing a Release button enables one to disconnect the line during or after conversation or to complete a Call Transfer It is possible to switch from headset mode to hands free mode or vice versa during a conversation by pressing the Headset button Headset users cannot use the following features Automatic Redial gt 1 6 1 4 Last Number Redial Receiving OHCA gt 1 7 4 3 Off h
220. ed flashing Conference Rapid green Incoming call Incoming call flashing Privacy Release Red on Incoming call Other This extension is for another extensions are logged out of the extension using all trunks incoming call Another in the trunk distribution group extension is group using the line Another extension has the line on Feature Guide 205 1 19 Proprietary Telephone PT Features Line Status Button Incoming Call Intercom Line Distribution Light Pattern Trunk Status Status Group Line Status S CO G CO L CO INTERCOM ICD Group Slow red Another flashing extension is holding the line Rapid red Incoming call to the incoming call distribution group flashing in Ring distribution method 3 Light Pattern of the Corresponding Extension Status Button Light Pattern Corresponding Extension Status Button DSS Off Idle Red on Busy Incoming call 1 DND for trunk calls Rapid red flashing Incoming call 1 Only when Call Pickup by a DSS button is disabled 2 Only when Call Pickup by a DSS button is enabled 4 Flashing Light Patterns b D T T Moderate Flashing Slow Flashing io H sware HHP PD DDR Conditions e The incoming call shows on the buttons in the following priority ICD Group gt S CO gt G CO gt L COINTERCOM e The light pattern of a DSS button for incomin
221. ed to public line trunk private line QSIG or ISDN terminal devices extension 1 ISDN Interface and Configuration Interface Type Description Port Mode Configuration Type Basic Rate Interface BRI Provides two 64 kbps B channels Trunk Extension Point to Point Point for communication and one 16 to multipoint SC D channel for signalling 2B QSIG Master Point to Point f Slave Primary Rate Interface Provides thirty or twenty three 64 Trunk QSIG Point to Point PRI kbps B channels for Master Slave communication and one 64 kbps D Extension channel for signalling 30B Di 23B D 1 For BRI only 426 BRI Configuration Note Point to Point P P One ISDN terminal device can be connected to one ISDN port Point to multipoint P MP A maximum of eight ISDN terminal devices can be connected to one ISDN port 2 ISDN Supplementary Service Table for Public Network Service Description amp Reference Direct Dialling In DDI Directs a call with a DDI number to a preprogrammed destination P P only gt 1 1 1 3 Direct Inward Dialling DID Direct Dialling In DDI 210 Feature Guide 1 20 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN Service Features Service Description amp Reference Multiple Subscriber Number MSN One ISDN port can support a maximum of 10 MSNs for routing incoming calls P MP only 1 1 1 4 Multiple
222. ee ete eee eee eee cee ee tee teers eee ARNA ANER RRAN ARNA oa Conditions e This feature complies with European Telecommunication Standard ETS specification ETS 300 257 Diversion supplementary services e This feature can be enabled or disabled on each ISDN QSIG port of the PBX Feature Guide 315 1 29 Networking Features PT Programming Manual References None User Manual References 1 5 1 Forwarding Calls 316 Feature Guide 1 29 Networking Features 1 29 4 4 Call Transfer CT by QSIG Description The PBX transfers the call to a destination extension in another PBX in QSIG network If the same trunk group is used for the incoming call and the transferred call the following situation will be possible Example QSIG Extension 1000 of PBX 1 dials extension a a SI ie de number 2000 and the call is sent to extension 2000 of PBX 2 through QSIG network Pee len e zm vm ee mm de vm em ml The call is transferred from extension erer 2000 to extension 1001 of PBX 1 Transferred OG The call between PBX 1 and PBX 2 is to 1001 released and the call is connected directly to the transfer destination of P Extn 1000 Extn 1001 Extn 2000 extension 2000 j Dials 2000 tes See eee ee ie eee ke RAA AA RA A eee A ARRANA ee RARAN A Extn 1000 Extn 1001 Extn 2000 EE IS IS Conditions e This feature complies with European Telecommunication Standard ETS
223. eeeaeeeeeee 25 Calling Line Identification CLI Dietrbugton ee eee eeeeeeeeceeeeee estes eeaeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaeeseaeeeaeeseeesieeseaeesieeeeaeeeneeen 28 Intercept ROUNO es seis etsasers extucc costlouae eagbea evens teen tees a a e iaraa 30 Intercept Routing No Destination AAA 33 Internal Call eebe Eege 34 Internal Call Features GUMMAPDNY A 34 Internal Call BOCK EE 36 Incoming Gall Indication Features cscciecascdacsingdassersaserworiedcomnetacigeieaniiachcceaatetenitteaceeeaasadint 38 Incoming Call Indication Features GUMMAPNY A 38 Ring Tone Pattern Selectionner raenek eiieeii aiaa itea Sedaaa aniani aaae 39 EURO e BEE 41 Receiving Group Features ssssnsnsnnnnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn ananman 43 Idle Extension Hunting E 43 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeneeeeeseeeeeeeeteaeeeeneaas 45 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features SUMMARPY A 45 Group Call DiSthiDUtiOM x c icic checlekkecescceeedencildbcoladsccncaadicesstcndoncacubedeneccessccsnanegdecaucecsccneccsncnensontanseescehcohendn 49 Outside Destinations in Incoming Call Distribution Group 52 Qu e ing Feature dienen sept Sopa Ee eet el ase te Sees ea chaos eed dee a 54 VIP r Bee ere eres Pe Creer eee org E been 57 Overflow EE 58 Beie lu e a envied siete needa ti ee helene ee el erlang 60 Supervisory Feature EE 63 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND Features cc
224. em data For more information on how to back up the system data refer to the PC Programming Manual However as system passwords can be extracted from backup copies of the system data file do not allow unauthorised access to these files PT Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 3 1 Capacity of System Resources 364 Feature Guide Description 2 3 4 Quick Setup 2 3 System Data Control It is possible to set up the basic PBX parameters using a PC When a PC accesses the PBX for the first time with the Installer Level Programmer Code 2 3 1 PC Programming Quick Setup display will appear automatically The following items can be programmed as desired Item Parameter Description Date amp Time Set Year Month Date Houtr Minute The date and time set on the PC will be used System Password for Installer 4 10 characters Enter the system password for installer gt 2 3 3 Password Security Operator amp Manager Extension Number Assign the PBX operator to all time modes day lunch break night 2 2 5 Operator Features The extension assigned as the PBX operators is automatically allowed to perform manager operation 2 2 6 Manager Features Flexible Numbering Type 1 Pattern 1 with x 2 Pattern 2 without x If Pattern 1 with x is selected X must prefix all feature numbers except access numbers when an extension user wants
225. em programming The Caller ID Name Reference is only available for calls from the public network Caller ID to SLT Port Hardware Requirement KX TDA30 An EXT CID card KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 An EXT CID card installed on SLC8 card This feature complies with ETSI European Telecommunications Standards Institute type FSK and Bellcore type FSK KX TDA30 only Through system programming a group of four SLT or Super Hybrid ports can be assigned to receive Caller ID Up to two groups can be programmed Therefore a maximum of eight SLTs can receive Caller ID Note that SLTs connected in parallel to DPTs attached to Super Hybrid ports can only receive Caller ID information when set to ring mode When the caller s number is sent to an SLT a Trunk Access number can be automatically added to the telephone number through system programming for calling back When the caller s number exceeds 16 digits the SLT receives only the first 16 digits not counting the preceding Trunk Access number if it is programmed to be added If a call is transferred to an SLT the transferring extension s information will be shown on the SLT If the transferring extension goes on hook before the call is answered the original caller s information will be shown When the Caller ID has information such as private out of area or long distance the information will be shown instead of the caller s number and name Even if the caller s name is sent the nam
226. ension Hunting While searching for an idle extension within an idle extension hunting group any extension that has DND set will be skipped The call will go to the next extension in the group not the Intercept Routing Busy DND destination If 1 a trunk call via the ELCOT LCOT or T1 LCOT GCOT card arrives at an extension in DND mode and 2 the Intercept Routing Busy DND destination is not available and 3 there is no available extension in the idle extension hunting group then the original extension in DND mode will ring Calls from a doorphone arrive at the extension even when the extension is in DND mode PT Programming Manual References 507 DND Override Feature Guide References 2 2 1 Class of Service COS User Manual References 1 2 4 When the Dialled Line is Busy or There is No Answer 1 7 2 Refusing Incoming Calls Do Not Disturb DND Feature Guide 1 3 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND Features 1 3 1 4 FWD DND Button Group FWD Button Description The FWD DND fixed button or a customised flexible button can display the FWD DND setting status of the extension Using this button the FWD status and DND status of the extension can be temporarily set or cancelled without clearing FWD destination settings FWD DND Button Types Multiple types of FWD DND buttons can be customised on an extension Type Description FWD DND for Extension FWD DND Internal Works for incoming intercom calls
227. ension number main telephone s extension number as with XDP Parallel mode fora DPT and an SLT PBX Super Hybrid Port Cell Station XDP Parallel Mode Wireless XDP Parallel Mode N gt L N gt S DPT Wireless Phone PT SLT PS Extn 102 Extn 103 Conditions If one of the telephones goes off hook while the other telephone is on a call the call is switched to the telephone going off hook However the call is not switched in one of the following conditions a During a Conference call gt 1 13 1 Conference Features b While Live Call Screening LCS or Two way Record is activated 1 23 3 Voice Mail DPT Digital Integration c While receiving OHCA gt 1 7 4 3 Off hook Call Announcement OHCA d While being monitored by another extension 1 7 3 Call Monitor e During Consultation Hold f During a broadcasting call gt 1 15 1 Broadcasting Wireless XDP Parallel Mode can only be set from a PS The wired telephone can accept or deny this feature through COS programming Once this feature is set the setting at the wired telephone cannot be changed unless a PS changes the setting The following features are not available for extensions in Wireless XDP Parallel Mode while the PS is on a call however they are available for extensions in Wireless XDP Parallel Mode while the wired telephone is on a call Executive Busy Override 1 7 2 Executive Busy Override Whisper OHCA gt 1
228. ent Message Description An extension user can set or select a message e g the reason for absence to be displayed on his telephone When a display PT user calls the extension the message is shown on the caller s telephone The following messages can be programmed as desired Type Geer Message Example Description System 1 Will Return Soon Messages may be edited through message system programming They are used Gone Home e for every extension user commonly 3 At Ext Extension Number 4 Back at Hour Minute 5 Out until Month Day 6 In a Meeting 7 8 Personal 9 A message is programmable at each message extension through personal programming Personal Absent Message which can only be used by that extension user Note The means a parameter to be entered when assigning a message at an individual extension Up to seven s can be stored for each message Conditions e An extension user can select only one message at a time The selected message is displayed at the extension while on hook PT Programming Manual References 008 Absent Message Feature Guide References 3 1 Capacity of System Resources User Manual References 1 5 3 Showing a Message on the Caller s Telephone Display Absent Message 3 1 2 Settings on the Programming Mode 198 Feature Guide 1 19 Proprietary Telephone PT Features 1 19 Proprietary Telephone PT Features
229. ephone number excluding the Host PBX Access code when accessing the telephone company through the host PBX 1 8 1 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring ARS A pause is not automatically inserted between the user dialled access code and the subsequent digits when the ARS mode is enabled 1 9 1 Automatic Route Selection ARS SMDR The dialled number including the Host PBX Access code will be recorded on SMDR only if the modified number setting is selected in the ARS setting for SMDR When a Host PBX Access code is assigned to a trunk group calls to extensions of the host PBX are not recorded on SMDR A Host PBX Access Code can be used to record only long distance calls on SMDR when a trunk port is connected directly to the telephone company not a host PBX This is allowed when the long distance code e g O is assigned as the Host PBX Access code All local calls e g calls that do not require a 0 to be dialled first are treated as extensions of the telephone company and do not get recorded on SMDR because in this case this PBX recognises the telephone company as the host PBX Therefore only long distance calls are recorded on SMDR PT Programming Manual References 471 Host PBX Access Code Feature Guide References 1 25 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR 3 1 Capacity of System Resources Feature Guide 1 5 Making Call Features 1 5 4 9 Special Carrier Access Code Description If the
230. er digit time expired after receiving 6 The PBX finds the match in location 0003 in the table So the call is routed to extension 101 PT Programming Manual References 421 BRI DIL DDI MSN Selection 451 DID Number 452 DID Name 453 DID Destination Feature Guide References 1 1 1 5 Calling Line Identification CLI Distribution 2 2 3 Tenant Service 2 2 4 Time Service 3 1 Capacity of System Resources Feature Guide 1 1 Incoming Call Features 1 1 1 4 Multiple Subscriber Number MSN Ringing Service Description Provides automatic direction of an incoming ISDN BRI Basic Rate Interface line call with an MSN to a preprogrammed destination One ISDN BRI port can support a maximum of 10 MSNs Each MSN has a destination for each time mode day lunch break night Point to multipoint must be selected for the ISDN configuration Method Flowchart A trunk call is received Are any MSNs assigned in the MSN table The call is routed to the operator Intercept Routing No Destination Is the MSN found in the MSN table Yes The call is ignored No Does the call have its CLI information and is CLI mode enabled for the time mode No Yes CLI works Is the CLI destination assigned Is the MSN destination for the time mode assigned CLI destination MSN destination operator Intercept Vv
231. erence Room Status Control An extension designated as the hotel operator can set the check in status of rooms remotely 1 26 2 Room Status Control Call Billing for Guest Room Charges for calls from guest rooms can be logged and output as a guest bill 1 26 3 Call Billing for Guest Room Remote Wake up Call An extension designated as the hotel operator can set a timed reminder for a room remotely 1 27 4 Timed Reminder SMDR for External Hotel Application Hospitality feature data including check in check out and timed reminder times can be output to SMDR for use in a PC based hotel application 1 25 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR 270 Feature Guide 1 26 Hospitality Features 1 26 2 Room Status Control Description A PT with a 6 line display designated as a hotel operator extension can be used to view and change the check in and check out status of guest rooms associated with extensions Any wired extension can be used as a room extension without special programming Flexible buttons on the hotel operator s extension can be set as Room Status Control buttons The two types of Room Status Control buttons are as follows e Check in Switches the status of selected room extensions from Check out to Check in Telephone charges are cleared and Remote Extension Dial Lock is turned off allowing calls to be made from the extension e Check out Switches the st
232. erring Features 1 11 Transferring Features 1 11 1 Call Transfer 144 Description An extension user can transfer a call to another extension or an outside party The following features are available Feature Transferring method With Announcement Transfer is completed after announcing the destination party Transfer is completed without an announcement Without Announcement After dialling the destination while hearing a ringback tone the originator can replace the handset Call Transfer with Announcement is also known as Call Transfer Screened Call Transfer without Announcement is also known as Call Transfer Unscreened Conditions When an extension is transferring a party to another destination the party will be in consultation hold until they reach the transfer destination Consultation Hold a condition that a party is in when an extension is calling other parties in order to perform Call Transfer Conference or Call Splitting In Consultation Hold the original call is treated as if it is on hold allowing the extension to call a third party all on one line In Call Hold the party on hold and the third party are connected to the extension using separate lines If Music on Hold is enabled music can be sent to the held party while the call is transferred gt 1 12 4 Music on Hold It is programmable whether a ringback tone or music is sent If the transfer destination extension has set FWD to an ou
233. es are enabled dial tone 3 is heard and continues until the user goes on hook If the sensor call is not answered within a specified time the call will be cancelled It is possible to set a different ring tone pattern for calls received from each external sensor to distinguish between them Conditions e Hardware Requirement KX TDA30 An external sensor and DPH card KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 An external sensor OPB card and EIO card e Some devices may be unable to communicate correctly with the PBX Confirm compatibility with the manufacturer of a device before installing it e After a sensor has been activated the PBX will ignore any further alerts from the same sensor for the duration specified by a timer This timer can be set separately for each sensor e As long as the previous sensor call is still being performed any further alerts from the same sensor are ignored e The assigned sensor name and or number are shown on the display of PTs and PSs when a sensor call is received Feature Guide 1 16 Optional Device Features e Ifthe destination of a sensor call has set FWD the sensor call will be redirected to the FWD destination However if the FWD destination is not supported as the destination of a sensor call e g an outside party the call will be received at the original destination gt 1 3 1 2 Call Forwarding FWD e The following features cannot be used when a sensor call is recei
234. es features to support the use of cellular phones and other outside destinations with the PBX Calls can be forwarded from virtual PSs to outside destinations such as cellular phones and then answered as if the user was at an extension within the PBX The following features can be used with cellular phones and other outside extensions Feature Description amp Reference Outside Destinations in Incoming Call Distribution Group Up to 4 cellular phones can be assigned as members of an Incoming Call Distribution ICD Group and receive calls to the group 1 2 2 3 Outside Destinations in Incoming Call Distribution Group Cellular Phone XDP Parallel Mode APT user can set up to 4 cellular phones to ring in parallel for incoming calls 1 2 2 3 Outside Destinations in Incoming Call Distribution Group DISA Automatic Walking COS Registered cellular phones are automatically recognised as PBX extensions when calling through DISA 1 16 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA DISA Call Transfer From Outside Destination A cellular phone user who answers a trunk call forwarded from the PBX using DISA can transfer that call to an extension within the PBX 1 16 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA Conditions e Hardware Requirement The KX TDA6920 KX TDA0920 or KX TDA3920 SD Memory Card for Software Upgrade to Enhanced Version Feature Guide References 1 24 6 Virtual PS 338 Feature
235. esseeeeeceeeeeeeeesesnnaeeeeeeeseeees 398 3 4 5 KX TDA30 PSMPR Software File Version 2 0XXX cccccccccceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesesnsaeeeeeeeseeeees 399 3 4 6 KX TDA30 PSMPR Software File Version 2 2XXxX c scccceccceeseeeeneceeeeeeeesseessaeeeeeeeseeees 401 3 4 7 KX TDA30 PSMPR Software File Version 3 XXXX c cscccceceeeseeeseeeceeeeeeeeesessaeeeeeeeeeeeeea 403 Jl E 405 Feature Guide Section 1 Call Handling Features Feature Guide 15 1 1 Incoming Call Features 1 1 Incoming Call Features 1 1 1 Incoming Trunk Call Features 1 1 1 1 Incoming Trunk Call Features SUMMARY Description Incoming calls via a trunk public line are distributed to their destinations according to one of several distribution methods 1 Available Networking Type for Each Optional Trunk Card Type Each trunk port of an optional trunk card can be assigned a networking type Public Private or VPN Virtual Private Network Networking Type Trunk Card Type Channel Type Based ete Private TIE Virtual Private Network VPN 2 ELCOT LCOT v DID v T1 LCOT v GCOT v DID vr TIE E amp M v v OPX EXTN E1 DR2 v E amp M C e vc E amp M P Vv v E amp M Vv Vir BRI PRI CO Bi Vv Extension QSIG Master vr QSIG Slave Vir IP GW vr 16 Feature Guide vr Enable default wv Enable 4 1 29 1 TIE Line Service 1 1 Incoming Call Features
236. f Range status may not be released automatically In this case the PS user can manually release Out of Range status by pressing the Talk key and confirming that a dial tone can be heard from the PBX e Ifthe status of a PS is set to Out of Range at all PBXs that it is registered to the call will be redirected to the overflow destination of the ICD Group e Handover from one PBX to another PBX during a conversation is not possible PT Programming Manual References 620 Incoming Call Distribution Group Member 622 Incoming Call Distribution Group Floating Extension Number 624 Incoming Call Distribution Group Distribution Method Feature Guide References 1 2 2 3 Outside Destinations in Incoming Call Distribution Group 330 Feature Guide 1 30 IP Proprietary Telephone IP PT Features 1 30 IP Proprietary Telephone IP PT Features 1 30 1 IP Proprietary Telephone IP PT Description This PBX supports the connection of IP proprietary telephones IP PTs which function almost identically to normal PTs However they connect to the PBX over a Local Area Network LAN and send and receive calls using Internet Protocol IP IP PTs have two Ethernet ports for connection primary and secondary They are connected to the PBX through a network hub or other splitting device and can have a PC connected to the secondary Ethernet port This feature is only available for the KX TDA100 KX TDA200 and KX TDA600 Connection Exampl
237. f fraudulent use we strongly recommend a Keeping PINs secret b Selecting complex random PINs that cannot be easily guessed c Changing PINs regularly e Manager Password One manager password can be assigned per PBX PT Programming Manual References PC Programming 112 Manager Password 511 Manager Assignment Feature Guide References 2 2 1 Class of Service COS User Manual References 2 1 Control Features 3 2 2 Manager Programming Feature Guide 357 2 3 System Data Control 2 3 2 3 1 358 System Data Control PC Programming Description This PBX can be programmed and administered using a PC There are two programming methods 1 1 On site Programming System programming diagnosis can be performed locally by connecting a PC to the PBX directly 2 Remote Programming System programming diagnosis and data upload can be performed from a remote location On site Programming Method Description Using the Serial Interface RS 232C port The PBX has a Serial Interface RS 232C port which can be used for either system administration or SMDR gt 1 25 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR Using the USB port The PC is connected to the USB port of the PBX or a USB port USB Module attached to a DPT Using the LAN interface KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only A CTI LINK card must be installed Using a modem through an SLT port An RMT card
238. f the outgoing call from the own PBX enabled against the COS of the trunk group of the incoming call to the own PBX Is the corresponding extension idle Yes Sends reorder tone or sends the call to the operator TRS Barring applies Intercept Routing No Destination Reorder tone Calls the extension e Call Waiting e Busy tone e Intercept Routing Busy DND Sends the call to N the trunk P Conditions e Atrunk which is used for a private network should be assigned Private as the networking type gt 1 1 1 1 Incoming Trunk Call Features SUMMARY Feature Guide 303 1 29 Networking Features e To establish a QSIG network gt 1 29 4 QSIG Standard Features each ISDN QSIG connection in a TIE line network must have the port on one Panasonic Hybrid IP PBX assigned as a master port and the port on the other Panasonic Hybrid IP PBX assigned as a slave port TIE Line Network Connection Example Extn 2000 Extn 1000 Is WAR waan Extn 2999 Extn 1999 J EE Extn 3000 P es TIE Call by Own PBX Extension Number When only two PBXs are connected in a network not including a VoIP network both PBXs can have extensions with the same leading number PBX 1 PBX 2 TIE Line Extn 3999 di J Extn 1011 Extn 1012 Extn 1013 Dials 1013 Explanation If a dialled number is not foun
239. feature to temporarily switch to that extension s COS 500 Trunk Group Number Programming Example of PBX 2 Trunk Group No COS No 1 3 2 2 3 2 TRG of Incoming Outgoing Call Call TRG 1 TRG 2 TRG 3 COS 1 viv COS 2 v COS 3 vw vw vw Block 1 29 Networking Features PBX Code 951 Example Telephone Company Trunk L 211 4567 TRG 3 TIE Line Network of PBX 2 PBX 1 TRG 1 COS 3 TIE Line of PBX 2 TRG 2 gt of PBX 1 952 verification code entry feature no verification code verification code 1 1 U PIN 9 21 1 4567 v i Interface 1 H H 1 1 1 Outside Party S Ve 5 211 4567 Extn 1011 Extn 1012 B Dials 7 952 9 Dials 7 952 verification code entry feature 211 4567 no verification code verification code PIN 9 211 4567 Explanation Case 1 1 Extension 1011 of PBX 1 dials the TIE line access number 7 PBX code 952 Idle Line Access number of PBX 2 9 and telephone number 211 4567 The call is not connected to the outside party through PBX 2 because the COS of TRG 1 COS 3 is blocked from accessing TRG 3 of PBX 2 Case 2 2 Extension 1012 of PBX 1 dials the TIE line access number 7 PBX code 952 verification code entry feature number X verification code verification code personal identification numbe
240. fer Using an external modem An external modem can be used instead of an RMT card to perform Not RMT card the remote programming An external modem can be connected to the Serial Interface RS 232C of the PBX Connect the modem to an extension port which is assigned as the DIL DID DDI MSN destination or to a trunk directly to connect to the PBX from the PC An AT command can be sent to the modem automatically when it is connected to the Serial Interface RS 232C port AT commands can be programmed beforehand through system programming to initialise the modem An AT command can also be sent manually in the PT system programming mode Using an ISDN TA interface The floating extension number of the ISDN remote maintenance must 64 kbps through an ISDN be assigned default 699 and dial the DIL DID DDI MSN number Trunk whose destination is the floating extension number of the ISDN remote maintenance The RMT card is not required for this method This method is available only when an user supplied ISDN TA that supports CAPI is used Conditions e Only one system programming session can be in progress at a time whether using a PC or a PT e Programmer Code and Password for System Programming To access system programming a programmer code and its password must be entered For more details see Section 2 3 3 Password Security in this Feature Guide Remote Programming Limitation It is possible to disable remote access
241. flect the settings for trunk calls only pressing the FWD DND Both button including FWD DND button fixed button or the Group FWD Both button will be ignored e When both the FWD and DND features are assigned simultaneously pressing the button changes the settings as follows gt FWD gt DND gt Off es _AFWD DND button customised on a flexible button is always in FWD DND Cycle Switch mode and the mode cannot be changed PT Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 19 1 Fixed Buttons 1 19 2 Flexible Buttons 72 Feature Guide 1 3 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND Features User Manual References 3 1 2 Settings on the Programming Mode Feature Guide 73 1 4 Answering Features 1 4 Answering Features 1 4 1 Answering Features 1 4 1 1 Answering Features SUMMARY Description 74 An extension user can answer incoming calls by the following methods Destination Feature Description amp Reference Line Preference Incoming At the own extension PT only A user can select the line seized when going off hook gt 1 4 1 2 Line Preference Incoming Direct One touch Answering A user can answer an incoming call simply by pressing the flashing button Hands free Answerback A user can receive a call automatically and establish a hands free conversation 1 4 1 4 Hands free Answerback At another extension Ca
242. for an incoming call distribution group and all the ICD Group buttons on the extension are occupied the Group Call Waiting feature for the group will not work at the extension Feature Guide 1 2 Receiving Group Features Incoming Call 4 Incoming Call 4 Distribution Distribution Group 1 Group 2 Floating Floating extension extension no 601 no 602 gt _ ICD Group 1 601 Call Waiting gt O ICD Group 1 601 Call Waiting Iil ee Lill ee il ee ICD Group 2 602 Answering the Call 3 No Reply Redirection UCD or Priority Hunting Method If a call received at a member extension is not answered within a preprogrammed time period No Answer time the call will be redirected to the next member extension If there is no idle group member the call queues at the target extension until a group member becomes available Conditions Automatic Call Distribution ACD When a KX TDA6920 KX TDA0920 or KX TDA3920 SD Memory Card for Software Upgrade to Enhanced Version is installed in the PBX and the distribution type is set to Uniform Call Distribution it is possible to select whether incoming calls are distributed to idle extensions evenly in order UCD or to the extension that has been idle the longest ACD ACD does not work for ISDN extensions or PS Ring Groups FWD DND Extension System programming for each incoming call distribution group is required to skip or ring extensions whic
243. fy another extension user that he wishes to talk to the user The notified extension user can return the call or listen to the messages recorded by the Voice Processing System VPS or Built in Simplified Voice Message feature When a message is left on a PT the Message button lights or the Message Ringer Lamp turns on red and a message is shown on the display of a display PT Pressing the lit Message button while on hook shows the caller s information as shown below Example 105 Tom Smith Extension no and name of who left the message S Message buttons CTT Own extension CTT Incoming call distribution group UI 1 Other extension TL yz ai N For example this button is useful when the secretary checks the message for the boss Boss amp Secretary Feature Conditions e Message Button A flexible button can be customised as the Message button for the extension other extensions or an incoming call distribution group e Distinctive Dial Tone for Message Waiting If the Distinctive Dial mode is enabled dial tone 4 will be sent to an extension when a message has been left on the extension 1 28 1 Dial Tone e SLT with a Message Waiting Lamp KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only The lamp activates in the same way as the MESSAGE button on a PT if an MSLC card is connected to the PBX The Message Waiting Lamp light pattern can be selected from the 12 patterns shown below System programming for
244. g Doorphone Calls each pattern plan can assign a ring tone pattern for each doorphone e Others each pattern plan can assign a ring tone pattern for incoming intercom calls as well as ring tones assigned to certain features e g timed reminder The ring tone patterns that arrive at an extension are determined by the pattern plan that is assigned to that extension through system programming Programming Example of Ring Tone Pattern Table Intercom Trunk Call Hold D h Call Table Recall oorpnone ya Timed External No Call Hold Reminder Call Back LCS Sensor Recall TRG1 TRG2 Port1 Port2 1 Double Single Single 2 Single Double Double Conditions e PT Ring off Setting can be enabled or disabled through system programming If disabled PT users cannot turn incoming call ringing off for their extension Feature Guide 39 1 1 Incoming Call Features PT Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 3 1 Capacity of System Resources 40 Feature Guide 1 1 Incoming Call Features 1 1 3 3 Call Waiting Description Used to inform a busy extension that another incoming call is waiting The busy extension user can answer the second call by disconnecting the current call or placing it on hold The following notification method can be assigned for each extension depending on the call waiting and the telephone type a Call Waiting Tone Ton
245. g Setting gt 1 1 3 3 Call Waiting FWD DND Setting gt 1 3 1 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND Call Pickup Deny Setting 1 4 1 3 Call Pickup Executive Busy Override Deny Setting 1 7 2 Executive Busy Override Itemised Billing Code for ARS gt 1 9 1 Automatic Route Selection ARS Transfer Recall Destination for Call Transfer and Call Park 1 11 1 Call Transfer 1 12 2 Call Park CLIP COLP Number and CLIP COLP Number Selection 1 20 1 2 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP CLIR and COLR Setting 1 20 1 2 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP Extension Personal Identification Number PIN 1 27 1 Extension Personal Identification Number PIN COS Programming gt 2 2 1 Class of Service COS Extension User Group gt 2 2 2 Group e If Extension Feature Clear is performed the corresponding extension data for both the wired telephone and the PS will be cleared gt 1 27 2 Extension Feature Clear e When acall arrives both the wired telephone and the PS ring However in the following cases only the extension from which the option was set will receive ringing Automatic Callback Busy 1 7 1 Automatic Callback Busy Camp on Transfer Recall 1 11 1 Call Transfer Hold Recall gt 1 12 1 Call Hold and Call Park Recall gt 1 12 2 Call Park PT Programming
246. g call can be set to Off through system programming In this case the DSS button light will not indicate the status of the corresponding extension PT Programming Manual References None 206 Feature Guide 1 19 Proprietary Telephone PT Features Feature Guide References 1 2 2 2 Group Call Distribution 1 2 2 7 Log in Log out 1 3 1 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND 1 12 1 Call Hold 1 13 1 2 Conference 1 13 1 3 Privacy Release Feature Guide 207 1 19 Proprietary Telephone PT Features 1 19 4 Display Information 208 Description A display PT shows the user the following information while making or receiving calls if they are available Display Item Display Example Condition The extension number and name of the calling 123 Tom Smith or called extension or incoming call distribution group Status of the called extension 123 Busy The number and name of the optional device Door 02 1st Door The dialled telephone number 1234567890 The received call information a Caller s name ABC Company The first line message can be either a c or e at each b Caller b 12345678 extension through system Caller s number Line 001 Sales programming c Trunk number name gt 102 Mike d Original Destination if the call is forwarded p e DDI DID MSN name or number DEE Call charge fee during a trunk call 12 35 The currency position of the currency sym
247. ge eegene 188 Incoming Call Log EE 193 Message Featpreg sugiensgeeeeeekeeegekegeeeg uge ERC scnsansdeadsebessacnusenadanseut sentaavasnassendasds 195 Message WANING DE 195 Absent Oe 198 Proprietary Telephone PT Features s eceeeceseeeeeeeeeeeseeeensneeneeeeeesnsaeensneneeeeess 199 Fixed E e E 199 Flexible BUTLONS TEE 202 MEE DGC ATOM DEE 205 Display UPON AON BE 208 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN Service Features sssseessseeeeeees 210 Integrated Services Digital Network GDN 210 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN GUMMAPN 210 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIPDICOLP A 214 Advice of Charge OC 216 Call Forwarding CF by ISDN DAMP 217 Call Forwarding CF by ISDN DPI 219 Call Hold HOLD by ISDN ics ericcciesscoicsmussnceicecrsiassnsduvocenetsvinaiesctavianauicasitundecnchdcnsenddechnssandencslenessectiantdety 221 Call Transfer CT by ISDN A 222 Three party Conference 83PTY by IDN 223 Malicious Call Identification MCID nen nena 224 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber CCDBE ennt 225 ISDN Ext MSI OM cess c cect E ATE dic ccareies bene E E E teers aig E eects iets a ace 226 ISDN Service Access by Keypad Protocol cecceeeceeseeeseeeeeeeeeneeeeneeeaeeseeeeeaeeeaeeseaeesaeeseeeeseaeseeessaeenaeeseatens 228 E1 Line Service Peat OS yiiasscscs wascestinccsteccesdescetankccvecinsensseataesdaseevsaciencanceosedesscusssenineddexs 229 E1 Hinte
248. ges are recorded in the error log of the PBX Busy Out status is maintained even when the PBX is reset PT Programming Manual References 511 Manager Assignment Feature Guide References 2 2 6 Manager Features User Manual References 2 1 6 Allowing Users to Seize an Unavailable Outside Line Trunk Busy Out Feature Guide 87 1 5 Making Call Features 1 5 4 7 Pause Insertion Description Pressing a PAUSE button inserts a preprogrammed Pause time between digits of a user dialled number before the number is dialled out allowing certain numbers separated with a pause to be used to access certain features eg access codes seizing idles lines etc When a pause is needed pauses must be inserted manually pressing the PAUSE button in all cases except for the following access codes where a pause is automatically inserted between the user dialled access code and the subsequent digits a Host PBX Access code 1 5 4 8 Host PBX Access Code Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX b Special Carrier Access code gt 1 5 4 9 Special Carrier Access Code c Second Dial Tone Waiting code Conditions e The Pause time is programmable for each trunk e Pauses can be stored in Memory Dialling e When a Second Dial Tone Waiting code is dialled after seizing a trunk a preprogrammed number of pauses are inserted after the code e ARS A pause is not automatically inserted between the user dialled access code an
249. ginal destination FWD No Answer e Boss amp Secretary feature It is possible to call the original extension from the destination extension regardless of the forward setting KE FWD AIl Calls Ineomimg ee SE Vi M a J Call or J transfer a call em Boss Secretary Original FWD destination e Message Waiting While calls are forwarded Message Waiting information is not forwarded The Message button light turns on at the originally called extension gt 1 18 1 Message Waiting e idle Extension Hunting Idle Extension Hunting applies to calls forwarded to a busy extension in an idle extension hunting group All Calls and Busy e If the forward destination is not available to answer a call this feature is cancelled and the original destination will ring for the following type of call 68 Feature Guide 1 3 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND Features Doorphone call Trunk calls via the ELCOT LCOT or T1 LCOT GCOT cards No Answer and Busy No Answer e No Answer Time The number of rings before the call is forwarded is programmable for each extension Follow Me e This feature is only available when the original extension has disabled the Deny Remote Operation by Other Extension setting on a COS basis PT Programming Manual References 472 Extension to Trunk Call Duration 473 Trunk to Trunk Call Duration 504 Call Forwarding to Trunk 605 Call Forwarding No Ans
250. ging Service Example For DID Calls Each location number can have its VPS trunk group number message number and tenant number DID Programming Example Location sh ye DID Destination sa eis VPS Trunk Tenant No Day Lunch Break Night Group No No 0001 123 4567 105 100 105 100 John White _ SE 1 0002 123 2468 102 100 102 tt Tom Smith 2 3 ede a Sa e Trunk Group No Company Greeting No Incoming Call Service A Day 1 Custom Service 11 A 1 Lunch 2 Custom Service 29 Break 3 Custom Service 31 Night 4 Custom Service 12 Day 5 Custom Service 21 2 Lunch 6 Custom Service 15 Break 7 Custom Service 42 Night 8 Custom Service 30 Explanation A DID call reaches a VM DPT group directly or by the Intercept Routing feature According to the DID Programming Example and VPS Programming Programming Example of Trunk Group Assignment a caller will hear a corresponding company greeting of the VPS Time mode day lunch break night of the preprogrammed tenant is applied to the DID destination and company greeting number Feature Guide 243 1 23 Voice Mail Features Trunk Call Trunk Call 123 2468 123 4567 Sends the following information VPS Trunk Group 1 Time mode Day y Intercept Sends the following information VPS Trunk Group 2 Time mode Night
251. gned to BGM Conditions e Hardware Requirement User supplied music source when an external music source is assigned e Volume Control It is possible to change the volume of an internal and or external music source e Each tenant can select a desired Music on Hold out of the available music sources 2 2 3 Tenant Service Installation Manual References KX TDA30 2 10 1 Connection of Peripherals KX TDA100 KX TDA200 2 11 1 Connection of Peripherals KX TDA600 2 13 1 Connection of Peripherals 150 Feature Guide 1 12 Holding Features PT Programming Manual References 710 Music Source Selection for BGM with the KX TDA30 BGM2 with the KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 711 Music on Hold Feature Guide 151 1 13 Conference Features 1 13 Conference Features 1 13 1 Conference Features 1 13 1 1 Conference Features SUMMARY Description A conference call allows a conversation between three or more parties simultaneously The following features are available to establish a conference call Feature Description amp Reference Conference During a two party conversation an extension user can add other parties to establish a conference call with up to eight parties 1 13 1 2 Conference Executive Busy Override An extension user can interrupt an existing call to establish a three party conference call 1 7 2 Executive Busy Override Privacy Release During a conversation wi
252. h have the FWD or DND feature set If set to ring the FWD DND settings are ignored 1 3 1 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND The Group Call Waiting feature cannot be used with the VIP Call feature gt 1 2 2 5 VIP Call and or Wrap up feature gt 1 2 2 7 Log in Log out To use the VIP Call feature and or Wrap up feature Call Waiting mode on each extension should be off PT Programming Manual References 621 Incoming Call Distribution Group Delayed Ringing 624 Incoming Call Distribution Group Distribution Method 632 Maximum Number of Agents Feature Guide 51 1 2 Receiving Group Features 1 2 2 3 Outside Destinations in Incoming Call Distribution Group Description Up to 4 outside parties or destinations at another PBX can be assigned as members of an Incoming Call Distribution ICD Group using the following method A virtual PS is registered as a member of the ICD Group Then the telephone number of the outside destination is specified as the FWD All Calls destination Calls to the ICD Group will also ring at the outside destination as if that destination were an extension within the PBX This is useful in situations such as the following e An extension user can have his PT and multiple cellular phones ring together for calls e An employee who is not in the office but is still available to answer calls can receive calls to an ICD Group Cellular I I 1 I I I I 1 I I I
253. he new extension number of the PT must be assigned as the paired extension through system programming e If PC programming is being performed for extensions whose extension settings are being transferred by the Walking Extension feature the Walking Extension feature may not work properly 2 3 1 PC Programming PT Programming Manual References 007 DSS Console Paired Telephone User Manual References 1 11 1 Using the Same Settings as Your Previous Extension Walking Extension 278 Feature Guide 1 27 Extension Controlling Features 1 27 4 Timed Reminder Description An extension can be preset to ring at a certain time to act as a wake up call or reminder This feature can be programmed to activate only once or daily If the user answers the alarm call a prerecorded voice message will be heard If a message is not assigned a special dial tone dial tone 3 will be heard Timed reminders can be set in one of two ways e By the extension user from his own extension e Remotely by the hotel operator Remote Wake up Call Conditions Be sure that the PBX clock works e Only one timed reminder can be set for an extension at a time Setting a new reminder clears the previous reminder If both the extension user and the hotel operator set a timed reminder for the same extension the timed reminder that was set most recently is effective e Programmable Time The Alarm Ringing Duration time the number of alarm repeat time
254. he specified extension is applied 2 2 1 Class of Service COS the budget of the specified extension is applied gt 1 8 2 Budget Management the Itemised Billing code of the specified extension is applied 1 9 1 Automatic Route Selection ARS verification code is recorded on SMDR as the call originator instead of the extension number of the actual extension used 1 25 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR e Verification Code Entry through DISA This feature is also available through DISA 1 16 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA e Verification Code PIN A verification code PIN must be assigned for each verification code through system programming or through manager programming e Verification Code PIN Lock If the wrong PIN is entered three times the line will be disconnected If the wrong PIN is entered a preprogrammed number of times successively the PIN for the verification code will be locked Only an extension assigned as the manager can unlock it In this case the PIN will be unlocked and cleared Feature Guide 1 8 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring Features e Budget Management for Verified Calls A limit can be assigned to the total of all call charges for each verification code Example of Verification Codes and Their Programming P g x Itemised Billing 4 2 3 4 Location Code Name PIN Cos Code for ARS Budget 0001 1111 Tom Smith 1234 1
255. his method Feature Description amp Reference Group Outside Destinations in Incoming Call Distribution PBX A virtual PS allows calls to an Incoming Call Distribution ICD Group to be answered by outside destinations or extensions at another 1 2 2 3 Outside Destinations in Incoming Call Distribution Group Network ICD Group at the same time 1 29 6 Network ICD Group Using virtual PSs in an ICD Group up to 4 other PBXs can be called Feature Guide 257 1 24 Portable Station PS Features Feature Description amp Reference PS Roaming by Network ICD One PS can be registered at up to 4 PBXs Using virtual PSs in an Group ICD Group all 4 PBXs can be called simultaneously to search for the PS 1 29 6 1 PS Roaming by Network ICD Group Automatic Fax Transfer KX A virtual PS can be used to forward fax calls to a fax machine at TDA30 only another PBX connected by TIE line 1 16 7 Automatic Fax Transfer Built in Simplified Voice Registering a virtual PS as the first extension of an ICD Group Message KX TDA30 only provides the ICD Group with a dedicated message box that is not shared with an actual extension 1 16 8 Built in Simplified Voice Message SVM Conditions e To use this feature call forwarding to trunks must be enabled through COS programming PT Programming Manual References 690 PS Registration Feature Guide Referen
256. hold including Consultation Hold Conditions e Confirmation Tone Patterns All confirmation tone patterns have a default gt 3 3 1 Tones Ring Tones e Itis possible to eliminate each tone 282 Feature Guide 1 28 Audible Tone Features PT Programming Manual References None Feature Guide 283 1 29 Networking Features 1 29 Networking Features 1 29 1 TIE Line Service Description ATIE line is a privately leased communication line between two or more PBXs which provides cost effective communications between company members at different locations The TIE lines can be used to call through the PBX to reach another switching system PBX or telephone company By using TIE lines the PBX can support not only communications with the public network but with other company members in the private network where the PBX is included Interface The following interfaces can be used to establish a private network Interface Network Type E amp M Analogue T1 TIE E amp Mi Digital 64 kbps x 24 channels E1 E amp M Digital 64 kbps x 30 channels BRI PRI QSIG Digital ISDN 2B D 30B D 23B D VoIP Internet Protocol IP The available interfaces depend on the cards installed in the PBX Explanation 1 Making a TIE Line Call One of the following two methods can be used to make a TIE line call a Extension Number Method Access without PBX Code Dial the Extension Number only Exa
257. ialled external telephone numbers to allow the same number to be dialled again easily Automatic Redial If Last Number Redial is performed in hands free mode and the called party is busy redialling will be automatically retried a preprogrammed number of times at preprogrammed intervals The Redial Call No answer Ring Duration time is programmable This feature is available only on certain PT models which have the SP PHONE button Outgoing Call Log Information on outgoing trunk calls is automatically logged at each extension Users of display PTs can view details of a preset number of recently dialled telephone numbers and easily call the same outside party again Conditions e If anew number is dialled when the Outgoing Call Log is full and or Automatic Redial contains a number the data of the oldest stored call will be deleted and the new number will be stored e If any dialling operations are performed or an incoming call is answered during Automatic Redial Automatic Redial is cancelled e Automatic Redial is not available for some countries areas when using an analogue trunk e interrupt Redial When an outside party or seized trunk is busy a user can attempt to redial the number by pressing the REDIAL button without going on hook This can be performed several times without having to go on hook e Outgoing Call Log Display by REDIAL Button Pressing the REDIAL button on a display PT while on hook can display the Outgoing
258. ice Feature Guide 217 1 20 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN Service Features e COS programming determines the extensions that are able to use this feature PT Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 3 1 2 Call Forwarding FWD 2 2 1 Class of Service COS User Manual References 1 5 1 Forwarding Calls 218 Feature Guide 1 20 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN Service Features 1 20 1 5 Call Forwarding CF by ISDN P P Description An extension user can forward the incoming ISDN call to another outside party using the ISDN service of the telephone company instead of the PBX feature when the call is received through an ISDN line The network directly forwards the call to the destination which the extension user has set in the PBX as the forward destination of trunk calls the network is instructed by the PBX This feature is available only when the call is received through an ISDN port which supports this feature Call Forwarding Unconditional CFU Call Forwarding Busy CFB and Call Forwarding No Reply CFNR are applied to this feature Example lt FWD gt lt Call Forwarding CF by ISDN P P gt H 2 CF Request gd k S H to 01 23 4567 D D D I i d i NW Outside Caller Outside Party Outside Caller Outside Party A 01 23 4567 AA 01 23 4567 Dials 01 45 6789 v Dials 01 45 6789 Extn 1011 Extn 1011 DDI No
259. ices can be connected to the port However only a maximum of two devices can be used simultaneously Individual terminal devices on a behind PBX can be addressed with Multiple Subscriber Number MSN The MSN consists of the ISDN extension number and an additional digit O through 9 or 00 through 99 PBX 1400 1499 Each terminal receives a call d d P Use the DDI MSN 1400 1401 1499 feature of the behind PBX Example ISDN Port for Extn No 1234 LEXTN P MP 1234 Up to eight terminals es can be connected to R the port and receive PBX 1234 1234 1234 a Call simultaneously ISDN Port for Extn No 13X MSN 131 139 EXTN P MP Up to eight terminals a can be connected to the port ie K 130 131 132 139 All terminals receive a call simultaneously ISDN Port for Extn No 14XX MSN EXTN P P P MP 7 ISDN Port for EXTN P P P MP A I Behind F Idle Extension Hunting is available Conditions e Subaddressing Subaddressing is possible between ISDN terminal devices The subaddress goes through the PBX to the ISDN terminal devices directly e Call Transfer PBX feature is available only for ISDN extensions in PMP configuration gt 1 11 1 Call Transfer 226 Feature Guide 1 20 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN Service Features e ISDN extensi
260. ide 1 29 Networking Features e The monitor PBX stops receiving status information for the selected extension All NDSS buttons for that extension stop displaying status information However the related information is not deleted from the Network Monitor Extensions Table Therefore if an extension user at a monitor PBX subsequently goes off hook and presses the NDSS button for that extension monitoring will be reactivated To completely remove monitoring of an extension the registration data must also be deleted from the Network Monitor Extensions Table at each monitor PBX The monitor destination of each NDSS button is determined by the registration information for a particular index number in this table Therefore if the registration information for an index number is changed for example the Network Extension Number assigned to Index No 001 in the example above is changed from 2001 to 4002 any NDSS buttons that have been set for that extension will automatically point to the new monitor destination Conditions Hardware Requirements The PLMPR PMPR PSMPR software file version of all PBXs in the network must be 2 0xxx or later The KX TDA6920 KX TDA0920 or KX TDA3920 SD Memory Card for Software Upgrade to Enhanced Version must be installed in all PBXs that will monitor extensions or have extensions monitored PBXs with Network ID 0 can use the standard KX TDA0820 or KX TDA3820 SD Memory Card for Software Upgrade If using
261. ilbox number It is programmable whether the PBX or the VPS cancels the Message Waiting feature e g turning off the Message button light When the PBX is selected the Message Waiting feature is cancelled after the extension user has accessed the VPS When the VPS is selected the Message Waiting feature is cancelled after the extension user has listened to messages stored in his mailbox Performance of Pressing the MESSAGE Button Transmitted Command In AA Service Mode In VM Service Mode Switching to VM command Listening message Listening message command H H Mailbox command No 6 XH H Mailbox No Feature Guide 239 1 23 Voice Mail Features Example PBX Sent 6 Ta 102 L Listening message command mailbox number Switching to VM command Pressing the MESSAGE button VPS In AA service mode Mailbox for Extn 102 Extn 102 4 AA Service If the VPS transfers the call using the AA service the PBX will inform the VPS of the status of the called destination with the preprogrammed DTMF status signal so that the VPS can confirm the status of the extension without listening to the system tones e g ringback tone Assign the DTMF status signal to suit the VPS settings DTMF Status Signals and Conditions Geo Default Status Condition Command RBT ringback ton
262. ill be monitored A maximum of 32 extensions can be registered Only extensions that have been registered here can be assigned to NDSS buttons Network Monitor Extensions Table Index No Network Extn No Network Extn Name 001 2001 Branch 1 T Durden 002 2002 Branch 1 M Singer 003 4001 Branch 2 R Paulson 032 When using the PBX Access Code numbering method the relevant access code must be added before the extension number registered here NDSS Button Customisation Monitor PBX At any extension attached to a monitor PBX customise a flexible button as an NDSS button for an extension registered above Then go off hook press this button once and go on hook again This activates the monitoring function The monitored PBX will begin to transmit information about the status of that extension and the monitor PBX will begin to receive the information The button light will display the status of the extension connected to another PBX Removing or Editing a Registered Extension Monitor PBX To monitor a new extension when 32 extensions are already being monitored it is necessary to remove the registration of an existing extension The NDSS Monitor Release feature is used to stop monitoring a certain extension When this feature is performed at a monitor PBX e Ifno other PBXs are monitoring the selected extension the monitored PBX stops transmitting status information for that extension Feature Gu
263. ime callers can leave a message after hearing a greeting message Message TAM messages are played back and or automatically transferred by phone or by e mail For PC Console Only Incoming Group Screen Names extension numbers and the status e g busy of each extension can be monitored on a single screen Calls can also be made and received on this screen Conditions e Hardware Requirements KX T7633 or KX T7636 DPT and USB Module KX T7601 e System Requirements Microsoft Windows 98 Second Edition 2000 or XP Windows Me is not supported Internet Explorer 5 0 or later Minimum Requirements CPU Intel Pentium II 350 MHz RAM 64 MB HDD 100 MB available space when installing Display XGA 1024 768 Peripheral Devices Sound Board for recording and replaying features Speaker for listening to voice messages USB port CD ROM drive Feature Guide 1 31 Computer Telephony Integration CTI Features Installation Manual References KX TDA30 2 6 4 First Party Call Control CTI Connection KX TDA100 KX TDA200 2 7 4 First Party Call Control CTI Connection KX TDA600 2 9 4 First Party Call Control CTI Connection PT Programming Manual References 601 Terminal Device Assignment Feature Guide References 3 1 Capacity of System Resources Feature Guide 337 1 32 Cellular Phone Features 1 32 Cellular Phone Features 1 32 1 Cellular Phone Features SUMMARY Description This PBX provid
264. ime Table is not assigned and there are no extensions logged in Example of a There are five assistants in a shop When the answering agent number is 2 and the queuing call number is 0 If two of the assistants are talking on the phone the next caller will hear a busy tone to prevent the caller from thinking that there is no one in the shop or that the shop is closed Conditions Intercept Routing Overflow in an Incoming Call Distribution Group es Ifthe Overflow time expires and the overflow destination is unavailable a Ifthe trunk call arrives through the ELCOT LCOT or T1 LCOT GCOT card 1 If the call was once in a queue and an outgoing message OGM was sent to it or the call reached an incoming call distribution group by using the DISA feature gt 1 16 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA The line is disconnected 2 In all other cases Redirection is ignored and the Overflow timer activates again b If the call arrives through another card Redirection is ignored and the Overflow timer activates again Busy on Busy e If atrunk call arrives through the ELCOT LCOT or T1 LCOT GCOT card a busy tone will not be sent to the caller PT Programming Manual References 625 Destination for Overflow Time Expiration 626 Overflow Time 627 Destination When All Busy 628 Queuing Call Capacity 632 Maximum Number of Agents Feature Guide References 1 2 2 4 Queuing Feature Feature Guide 59 1 2
265. imit the extension user cannot make further trunk calls An extension assigned as the manager may increase the limit or clear the previous call charge 1 8 2 Budget Management 6 Call Charge Management An extension assigned as a manager can perform the following a Clear the call charges for each extension and verification code b Clear the call charges of all extensions and verification codes c View the call charges Call Charge Reference for each trunk extension or verification code d Set the call charge rate for each trunk group e Print out the total call charges for all extensions and verification codes f Set a budget for each extension and verification code Examples of Call Charge Reference KKK IKK IK IK KKK KI KKK KKK KKK KK IKK RIKKI KKK IK KIKI KK IKK RIA IR Charge Meter Print Out Total amp All CO HK IKK KI KIKI KK KKK KK KKK IK IK IKK RIK KK IK IKK IKK III RIKKI KIRK Total Charge 00175 95 CO Line 001 00194 00 002 00073 00 003 00161 00 004 00033 00 HK IKK KI KKK IKK IKK KKK KKK KKK IKK IKI KKK KK IK IK IK KIKI IKI D Charge Meter Print Out All Extensions HK KKK KKK KK IKK KKK KK KK KI KKK KK IKI KKK KK IKK IK RIK IKI KIKI 775 00194 00 102 00073 00 776 104 00194 00 105 00073 00 106 00161 00 00161 00 107 00033 00 Note extension or verification code number Conditions General e Cal
266. ing Features Feature Storing Method amp Reference Hot Line 1 6 1 7 Hot Line Personal Programming Personal Operation with the Feature Number System Programming PC Programming only Incoming Call Log Incoming call information is automatically stored 1 17 2 Incoming Call Log 2 Valid Input Input Display while Entering Description 0 9 0 9 Store the digits and PAUSE Pause P Store a pause by pressing the PAUSE button gt 1 5 4 7 Pause Insertion FLASH RECALL F Store a flash recall signal EFA mode by pressing Hooking the FLASH RECALL button at the beginning of the number 1 10 7 External Feature Access EFA INTERCOM Secret 14 Conceal all or part of the number by pressing the INTERCOM button at the beginning and at the end of the number to be concealed It is programmable whether the concealed part will appear on SMDR TRANSFER Transfer T Store a transfer command by pressing the TRANSFER button at the beginning of the number used only for a One touch Dialling gt 1 11 1 Call Transfer Example Storing T 305 Transferring a call to extension 305 ka Secret Dialling Example When storing the number 9 123 456 7890 and concealing the telephone number 123 456 7890 Available only when in system personal programming mode Enter 9 INTERCOM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
267. ing time Waiting Calls Now 00006 Max Waiting Time 05 10 The longes EXIT LOG SPRVS Average EXIT Since 29 JAN 09 10AM Total Calls Overflow Calls Lost Calls 700996 200131 200039 02 12 CLEAR Waiting Monitoring starting date and time Total number of incoming calls Total number of overflowed calls The number of lost calls Average queuing time lt Log in Log out Monitor Remote Control Mode with DSS Button light gt 31 Jan 08 13AM FRI 601 Sales Section Waiting Calls Now Max Waiting Time EXIT 05 10 200006 a 1 D aya aya any With aa SCH aa aa ama ay T a aya an ao HH OH any aya ayn aa qa qa qaqa aya am ay Log in Log out Monitor DSS buttons of the incoming call _ gt Pressing the button changes distribution group members show their status Log in Log out Remote Control the status as follows Light pattern Status Status Light pattern Green on Log in Ready gt Log out Red on Slow Green Flashing Log in Not Ready Log in Ready Green on Red on Log out ig Off Extension in another incoming call distribution group Feature Guide 63 1 2 Receiving Group Features 64 Conditions Available Extension as a Supervisor Extension a One supervisor extension can be assigned for each incoming call distribution group but it need not belong to
268. ion 1 The outside caller dials the DISA phone number of PBX 1 Idle Line Access number of PBX 1 9 and telephone number 01 23 4567 2 PBX 1 modifies the call adds 952 and the Idle Line Access number of PBX 2 9 and sends the call to PBX 2 which has PBX code 952 through the TIE line trunk group TRG 2 according to the ARS programming of PBX 1 3 PBX 2 sends the modified call to the outside party 23 4567 according to its ARS programming Feature Guide 295 1 29 Networking Features 3 TIE Line Routing and Modification Table 3 1 To Make a TIE Line Call The TIE Line Routing and Modification Table is referenced by the PBX to identify the trunk route when an extension user makes a TIE line call It is necessary to make unified tables with all PBXs in the TIE line network The routing pattern appropriate for each call is decided by the dialled number There are two system programmes for the tables TIE Line Routing Table used to assign the leading numbers PBX code or extension number and trunk group hunt sequence TIE Modify Removed Number of Digits Added Number used to remove digits from and add a number to the dialled number of the TIE line call This modification may be needed depending on the TIE line network configuration Programming Examples Your PBX is PBX 1 and there are four PBXs in your TIE line network To identify the trunk route as illustrated you should make the following tables a Ex
269. ion By default all conversations which take place on trunks extension lines and doorphone lines are protected by privacy Automatic Privacy Privacy Release allows a PT PS user to suspend Automatic Privacy for an existing trunk call on the S CO button in order to establish a three party call System programming is required to enable or disable this feature Conditions e CO Button A flexible button can be customised as the S CO button e Privacy Release Time Privacy is released for five seconds to allow the conversation to be joined e This feature overrides Data Line Security 1 10 5 Data Line Security and Executive Busy Override Deny 1 7 2 Executive Busy Override PT Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 19 2 Flexible Buttons User Manual References 1 4 5 Multiple Party Conversation Feature Guide 155 1 14 Paging Features 1 14 Paging Features 1 14 1 Paging Description An extension user can make a voice announcement to many destinations simultaneously The message is announced over the built in speakers of PTs and or external speakers external pagers which belong to the paging group With the KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 up to two external pagers can be connected with the KX TDASO one external pager can be connected The paged person can answer the page from a nearby telephone It is possible to page with a call on hold in order to transfer the call Paging Den
270. ion Time 512 Permission for Door Open Access Feature Guide References 2 2 1 Class of Service COS User Manual References 1 9 1 If a Doorphone Door Opener is Connected Feature Guide 163 1 16 Optional Device Features 1 16 3 Trunk Answer From Any Station TAFAS Description When a call is received at the floating extension number assigned to the external pager a ring tone is sent through the pager Any extension user can then answer the call Conditions e Hardware Requirement A user supplied external pager e Floating Extension Number A floating extension number must be assigned for an external pager default 600 It is possible to access an external pager by dialling its floating extension number e Pager Volume It is possible to change the volume of an external pager through system programming Installation Manual References KX TDA30 2 10 1 Connection of Peripherals KX TDA100 KX TDA200 2 11 1 Connection of Peripherals KX TDA600 2 13 1 Connection of Peripherals PT Programming Manual References 700 External Pager Floating Extension Number User Manual References 1 3 4 Answering a Call via an External Speaker Trunk Answer From Any Station TAFAS 164 Feature Guide 1 16 Optional Device Features 1 16 4 Background Music BGM Description A PT user can listen to BGM through the built in speaker while on hook and idle BGM External BGM can also be broadcast in the office through
271. ion of the Extensions 2 9 3 Digital EXtra Device Port Digital XDP Connection PT Programming Manual References 600 EXtra Device Port XDP Mode User Manual References 1 7 11 Setting the Parallelled Telephone to Ring Parallelled Telephone 142 Feature Guide 1 10 Conversation Features 1 10 10 Calling Party Control CPC Signal Detection Description The Calling Party Control CPC signal is an on hook indication disconnect signal sent from the analogue trunk when the other party hangs up To maintain efficient utilisation of trunks the PBX monitors their state and when CPC signal is detected from a line disconnects the line and alerts the extension with a reorder tone Conditions e CPC signal detection is programmable for incoming trunk calls and for outgoing trunk calls e If your telephone company sends other signals similar to CPC it is recommended not to enable CPC signal detection on outgoing trunk calls e Ifa CPC signal is detected during a Conference call 1 13 1 2 Conference that line is disconnected but the remaining parties stay connected e Ifa CPC signal is detected during a call between a caller using the DISA feature 1 16 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA and an extension or an outside party the line is disconnected PT Programming Manual References 413 LCOT CPC Signal Detection Time Outgoing 414 LCOT CPC Signal Detection Time Incoming Feature Guide 143 1 11 Transf
272. ions It is programmable whether the last remaining logged in extension can log out e Log in Log out Button A flexible button can be customised as the Log in Log out button with the following parameters Light Pattern Parameter Usage Red on Off No parameter Used with an ICD Group button or with the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group or with x All Floating extension number of a Used to log in to or out of the specified Log out Log in Status specified incoming call incoming call distribution group Status distribution group 60 Feature Guide 1 2 Receiving Group Features Light Pattern Red on Off Parameter Usage All Used to log in to or out of all incoming After Log out After Log in call distribution groups to which the Operation Operation extension user belongs e Ifan ICD Group button is assigned it also shows the log in log out status of the corresponding group The light pattern is the same as the Log in Log out button that includes the group number es Wrap up Timer Two wrap up timers can be programmed an ICD Group member wrap up timer and an extension wrap up timer System programming selects which timer is used When the ICD Group member wrap up timer is selected the timer is only activated after calls to the extension through an ICD Group When the extension wrap up timer is selected the timer is activa
273. irected to the operator gt 1 1 1 7 Intercept Routing No Destination PT Programming Manual References None Feature Guide 19 1 1 Incoming Call Features 1 1 1 2 Direct In Line DIL Description Provides automatic direction of an incoming trunk call to a preprogrammed destination Each trunk has a destination for each time mode day lunch break night Method Flowchart A trunk call is received Does the call have its CLI information and is CLI mode enabled for the trunk and the time mode No Yes CLI works Is the CLI destination assigned No Is the DIL destination of the time mode assigned Vv The call is routed to the The call is routed to the The call is routed to the CLI destination DIL destination operator Intercept Routing No Destination Calling Line Identification CLI Distribution If the CLI routing is enabled and the caller s identification number is assigned in the Caller ID Table the call will not be routed to the DIL destination but routed to the CLI destination Programming Example of DIL Table The table can be programmed for each trunk CLI Destination Trunk No Day Lunch ws Day Lunch 01 Enable Disable Se 101 100 02 Enable Disable ve 102 100 450 DIL 1 1 Destination 20 Feature Guide 1 1 Incoming Call Features Note Tenant numbe
274. is e Ifan ISDN port is in P P configuration this feature can be used only when the network supports the explicit linkage option e Call Transfer with Announcement and Call Transfer without Announcement is possible gt 1 11 1 Call Transfer e The call charges after completing this feature will not be recorded by the PBX PT Programming Manual References None User Manual References 1 4 1 Transferring a Call Call Transfer 222 Feature Guide 1 20 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN Service Features 1 20 1 8 Three party Conference 3PTY by ISDN Description During a conversation using an ISDN line an extension user can add another party and establish a three party conference call using the ISDN service of the telephone company instead of the PBX feature Conditions e This feature complies with the following European Telecommunication Standard ETS specification ETS 300 188 Three Party 3PTY supplementary service e The availability of this feature depends on the contract with the telephone company e This feature can be enabled or disabled on an ISDN port basis PT Programming Manual References None User Manual References 1 4 5 Multiple Party Conversation Feature Guide 223 1 20 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN Service Features 1 20 1 9 Malicious Call Identification MCID Description An extension user can ask the telephone company to trace a malicious caller during
275. ises that the user is finished dialling when the key is pressed programmable the dialled number is a preprogrammed telephone number the inter digit timer expires Some supplementary services are provided by the key protocol 1 20 1 12 ISDN Service Access by Keypad Protocol Extension Number An extension number can be assigned to each ISDN port Network Type BRI only Each BRI port can be set to the requirements of each country area 420 BRI Network Type L1 Active Mode and L2 Data Link Mode BRI only The active mode of Layer 1 L1 and the data link mode of Layer 2 L2 can be selected individually Permanent or Call by Call on an ISDN port basis 425 BRI Layer 2 Active Mode TEI Assignment Mode BRI only The Terminal Endpoint Identifier TEI assignment mode can be selected on an ISDN port basis 427 BRI TEI Mode Bearer Mode The bearer mode can be assigned on an extension basis Automatic ISDN Configuration ISDN BRI port configuration can be set automatically through system programming The following items will be set by making and receiving a call using the subscriber number assigned for each ISDN BRI port LI Active Mode L2 Data Link Mode Access Mode Point to Point Point to Multipoint TEI Assignment Mode Fix 00 63 Automatic PT Programming Manual References 420 BRI Network Type 424 BRI Layer 1 Active Mode 425 BRI Layer 2 Active Mode 426 BRI
276. k group for making calls Incoming calls from trunks in the assigned trunk group arrive at this button Loop CO L CO Used to access an idle trunk for making calls Incoming calls from any trunk arrive at this button Direct Station Selection DSS Used to access an extension with one touch Network Direct Station Selection NDSS Used to access an extension at another PBX within the same network One touch Dialling Used to access a preprogrammed party or feature with one touch Incoming Call Distribution ICD Group Used to access a specified incoming call distribution group for making or receiving calls Message Used to leave a message waiting indication or call back the party who left the message waiting indication FWD DND External Internal Both Used to perform the FWD or DND feature for the extension The feature is applied to trunk calls intercom calls or both Group FWD External Internal Both Used to perform the FWD feature for a specified incoming call distribution group The feature is applied to trunk calls intercom calls or both Account Code Entry Account Used to enter an account code Conference Used to establish a multiparty conversation Terminate Used to disconnect the current call and make another call without hanging up External Feature Access EFA Used to send a flash recall signal to the telephone company or host PBX to
277. ks e ATRS Barring level can be changed by some features The priority of features when multiple features are used is as follows 1 Dial Tone Transfer gt 1 8 4 Dial Tone Transfer 2 Budget Management gt 1 8 2 Budget Management 3 TRS Barring Override by System Speed Dialling 4 Walking COS Verification Code Entry gt 1 8 5 Walking COS 1 8 6 Verification Code Entry Feature Guide 117 1 8 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring Features 5 Extension Dial Lock PT Programming Manual References 300 TRS Barring Override by System Speed Dialling 301 TRS Barring Denied Code 302 TRS Barring Exception Code 501 TRS Barring Level 509 TRS Barring Level for System Speed Dialling 602 Class of Service Feature Guide References 1 5 5 3 Trunk Access 1 6 1 5 Speed Dialling Personal System 1 8 3 Extension Dial Lock 1 9 1 Automatic Route Selection ARS 2 2 1 Class of Service COS 2 2 4 Time Service 3 1 Capacity of System Resources 118 Feature Guide 1 8 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring Features 1 8 2 Budget Management Description Limits the telephone usage to a preprogrammed budget on an extension basis If the amount of the call charge reaches the limit an extension user cannot make further trunk calls An extension assigned as the manager may increase the limit or clear the amount of the call charge Conditions If the limit is reached TRS Barring Level 7 is ap
278. l Block PT Programming Manual References 005 Extension Personal Identification Number PIN Feature Guide References 1 16 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA 2 2 1 Class of Service COS 122 Feature Guide 1 8 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring Features User Manual References 1 2 7 Calling without Restrictions 1 2 9 Setting Your Telephone from Another Extension or through DISA Remote Setting Feature Guide 123 1 8 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring Features 1 8 6 Verification Code Entry 124 Description An extension user can enter a verification code when calling from his own or any other extension to change the TRS Barring level 1 8 1 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring or to identify the call for accounting and billing purposes A verification code personal identification number PIN is required to use this feature Conditions WARNING There is a risk that fraudulent telephone calls will be made if a third party discovers a personal identification number PIN verification code PIN or extension PIN of the PBX The cost of such calls will be billed to the owner renter of the PBX To protect the PBX from this kind of fraudulent use we strongly recommend a Keeping PINs secret b Selecting complex random PINs that cannot be easily guessed c Changing PINs regularly e When a trunk call is made using Verification Code Entry the Class of Service of t
279. l Charge Reference by Call Charge Reference Button A display telephone user can check the total call charge for his own extension using the Call Charge Reference button A flexible button can be customised as the Call Charge Reference button Pay Tone Service KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only e Itis possible to select whether the PBX starts counting the call charge from when the PBX detects the answer signal from the telephone company 268 Feature Guide 1 25 Administrative Information Features e Itis possible to enable the PBX to send the flash recall signal to the telephone company after a conversation in on hook status to receive the call charge information PT Programming Manual References 010 Charge Margin 011 Charge Tax 012 Charge Rate per Unit 130 Decimal Point Position for Currency 131 Currency 491 Pay Tone Signal Type KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Feature Guide References 1 8 6 Verification Code Entry 1 19 2 Flexible Buttons 3 1 Capacity of System Resources User Manual References 1 10 1 Using the Telephones in a Hotel type Environment Hospitality Features 3 2 2 Manager Programming Feature Guide 269 1 26 Hospitality Features 1 26 Hospitality Features 1 26 1 Hospitality Features SUMMARY Description This PBX has several features that support its use in a hotel type environment where extensions correspond to guest rooms Feature Description amp Ref
280. l Hold the party on hold and the third party are connected to the extension using separate lines PT Programming Manual References 417 LCOT Flash Recall Time Feature Guide References 1 19 2 Flexible Buttons User Manual References 1 9 4 If a Host PBX is Connected Feature Guide 137 1 10 Conversation Features 1 10 8 Trunk Call Limitation Description Trunk calls are limited by the following features Feature Description Extension to Trunk Call If a call between an extension user and an outside party is established Duration the call duration can be restricted by a system timer selected for each trunk group Both parties will hear warning tones at five second intervals starting 15 seconds before the time limit When the time limit expires the line will be disconnected COS programming determines whether this feature is enabled or disabled Whether this feature applies to outgoing calls only or to both outgoing and incoming calls is determined through system programming Trunk to Trunk Call except If a call between two outside parties is established the call duration Unattended Conference Call can be restricted by a system timer selected for each trunk group Both Duration parties will hear warning tones at five second intervals starting 15 seconds before the time limit When the time limit expires the line will be disconnected If both parties involved in the trunk to trunk call were established by an exte
281. l PS can be assigned as the first extension of the ICD Group This provides the ICD Group with a dedicated message box that is not shared with an actual extension gt 1 24 6 Virtual PS Feature Guide 181 1 16 Optional Device Features 182 Conditions General Hardware Requirement An SVM card The maximum number of voice messages not including greeting messages that can be recorded for an extension can be set between 1 and 100 through system programming Default 10 It is not possible to back up the SVM Log recorded voice messages or greeting messages If the PBX is initialised all this information is cleared When the card to which an extension belongs is changed through system programming all the recorded voice messages and greeting messages for the extension will be cleared The voice messages for an extension will be cleared when the extension is checked out using the Hospitality feature gt 1 26 1 Hospitality Features SUMMARY However greeting messages will not be cleared An extension is able to receive calls even while a voice message is being recorded in that extension s message box If an extension user tries to access a card that two users are already accessing the user will hear a busy tone If an extension user tries to clear a voice message shown on the display while the message box is already in use the extension user will hear a notification tone Voice message recording will stop when a
282. l References 1 7 3 Receiving Call Waiting Call Waiting Off hook Call Announcement OHCA Whisper OHCA Feature Guide 113 1 8 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring Features 1 8 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring Features 1 8 1 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring 114 Description TRS Barring can prohibit an extension user from making certain trunk calls by COS programming It is applied when the user goes off hook a trunk is seized and then a dialled number is sent to the trunk Each COS is programmed to have a TRS Barring level for each time mode day lunch break night There are seven levels available Level 1 is the highest level and level 7 is the lowest That is level 1 allows all trunk calls and level 7 prohibits all trunk calls Levels 2 through 6 are used to restrict calls by combining preprogrammed Denied and Exception Code Tables Denied Code Tables An outgoing trunk call made by an extension with a level between 2 and 6 is first checked against the applicable Denied Code Tables If the leading digits of the dialled number not including the Trunk Access number are not found in the table the call is made There are five Denied Code Tables one for each of Levels 2 through 6 respectively Complete every table by storing numbers that are to be prohibited These numbers are defined as denied codes Exception Code Tables These tables are used to override a programmed denied code A ca
283. ling The predialled number can be stored in the Personal Speed Dialling by pressing the AUTO DIAL STORE button 1 6 1 5 Speed Dialling Personal System In this case the extension will enter into the personal programming mode automatically so that a name can be assigned for the stored number User Manual References 3 1 2 Settings on the Programming Mode Feature Guide 79 1 5 Making Call Features 1 5 2 Automatic Extension Release Description After going off hook if an extension user fails to dial any digits within a preprogrammed time period the user will hear a reorder tone This operation applies to intercom calls only This feature is also known as Automatic Station Release Conditions e APT PS user hears a reorder tone for a preprogrammed time period and then the PT PS returns to idle status automatically However an SLT user hears a reorder tone until he goes on hook e This feature works in one of the following cases When making an intercom call a If the first digit is not dialled within a preprogrammed time period b After a digit is dialled if subsequent digits are not dialled within a preprogrammed time period PT Programming Manual References None 80 Feature Guide 1 5 Making Call Features 1 5 3 Intercom Call Description An extension user can call another extension user Conditions Extension Number Name Assignment Extension numbers and names are assigned to all extensions The
284. ll Pickup Directed Group A user can pick up a specified extension s call or a call in a specified call pickup group 1 4 1 3 Call Pickup Feature Guide 1 4 Answering Features 1 4 1 2 Line Preference Incoming Description A PT user can select the method used to answer incoming calls from the following three line preferences Each of these line preferences can be assigned on each extension through personal programming Preferred Line Assignment Incoming Type Description No Line Select a line by pressing the desired Line Access button to answer an incoming call after you go off hook Prime Line Answer a call arriving at a Flexible CO or ICD Group button on which the Prime Line is assigned simply by going off hook This works even when multiple calls are received simultaneously Ringing Line default Answer the longest ringing call at one s telephone simply by going off hook when multiple calls arrive Conditions Prime Line e The priority of the incoming call is as follows 1 The call arriving at a button on which the Prime Line is assigned 2 The call arriving at the INTERCOM button PT Programming Manual References None User Manual References 3 1 2 Settings on the Programming Mode Feature Guide 75 1 4 Answering Features 1 4 1 3 Call Pickup Description An extension user can answer a call ringing at any other extension
285. ll denied by the applicable Denied Code Tables is checked against the applicable Exception Code Tables and if a match is found the call is made There are five Exception Code Tables for Levels 2 through 6 respectively Complete every table by storing numbers that are exceptions to the denied codes These numbers are defined as exception codes TRS Barring Override by System Speed Dialling If the call is made using System Speed Dialling the call can override the TRS Barring Each COS is programmed to have a TRS Barring level for System Speed Dialling Once this feature is set it permits all extension users to make System Speed Dialling calls with the level for System Speed Dialling Any extension which sets Extension Dial Lock can also make a call using System Speed Dialling 300 TRS Barring Override by System Speed Dialling Feature Guide TRS Barring Level TRS Barring level is determined by the applicable levels of Denied Code Tables and Exception Code Tables 1 8 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring Features Denied Code Tables Exception Code Tables Level 1 Not Programmable Not Programmable Level 2 Table for Level 2 Tables for Levels 2 through 6 Level 3 Tables for Levels 2 and 3 Tables for Levels 3 through 6 Level 4 Tables for Levels 2 through 4 Tables for Levels 4 through 6 Level 5 Tables for Levels 2 through 5 Tables for Levels 5 through 6 Level 6 Tables for Levels 2 through
286. llular phones can be automatically recognised as PBX extensions when calling through DISA When the Caller ID of a received trunk call matches an entry in the System Speed Dialling Table the calling telephone is given Walking COS authorisation as assigned to the corresponding CLI destination extension Therefore the CLI destination setting in the System Speed Dialling Table is used here to specify the target extension that the calling telephone will be recognised as for Walking COS Programming Example of DIL Table CLI Destination Trunk No Day Lunch m Day Lunch 01 Disable Disable S Gei DISA DISA CLI must be set to Disable to allow incoming calls to be received by DISA Programming Example of System Speed Dialling Table System Speed Dialling Location Telephone No Name CLI Destination 000 912341115678 J Smith 200 001 In this example calls received on trunk 01 are routed to the DISA OGM with floating extension number 501 If the number of the received call after modification according to the Caller ID table is 12341115678 the call originator is recognised as extension 200 and the Walking COS feature is automatically activated System programming is required to enable this feature SMDR The call information for DISA is recorded as the one of the DISA floating extension numbers 1 25 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR Feature Guid
287. m Configuration Software Programming Examples of DID DDI Table and DIL Table DID DDI table can be programmed for each DID DDI number and a tenant Time Table number is assigned to each DID DDI number DIL table can be programmed for each trunk and a tenant Time Table number is assigned to each trunk lt DID DDI Table gt Location DID DDI No Tenant Time DID DDI Destination Table Ne Day Lunch Break Night 001 123 4567 1 105 100 VPS 105 100 VPS 002 123 2468 1 102 100 VPS 102 100 VPS lt DIL Table gt Trunk No Tenant Time Table No DIL Destination Day Lunch Break Night 01 1 101 100 VPS 101 100 VPS 02 2 102 100 VPS 102 100 VPS Explanation If a trunk call with a DID number 123 4567 is received at 20 00 1 Tenant Time Table number 1 will be used 2 The call is received during night mode in Time Table 1 3 The call will be routed to the extension 100 VPS Holiday Mode The holiday mode activates automatically using the Automatic Switching mode Up to 24 holidays start and end dates can be stored and one time mode can be selected for all holidays Time Service Button A flexible button can be customised as the following buttons a Day Night button b Day Night Lunch button c Day Night Break button d Day Night Lunch Break button Each of these buttons is used for switching between modes For example pressing the
288. m Data Control 2 3 7 Floating Extension Description Virtual extension numbers can be assigned to resources to make them appear as extensions These numbers are defined as floating extension numbers and can be assigned as a destination of incoming calls etc This feature is also known as Floating Station Resource Description Default Device External Pager Used as the destination for TAFAS feature gt 600 1 16 3 Trunk Answer From Any Station TAFAS Outgoing Message Used to send messages for DISA feature gt 5 two digit OGM 1 16 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA OGM number Built in Simplified Used to access message boxes associated with SVM card 1 Voice Message extensions 1 16 8 Built in Simplified Voice 591 SVM KX TDA30 Message SVM SVM card 2 only 592 Analogue Remote Used to access the PC programming mode 599 Maintenance through a modem on a PC ISDN Remote Used to access the PC programming mode 699 Maintenance through the ISDN interface on a PC Group Incoming Call Used to call an incoming call distribution group gt 6 two digit Distribution Group 1 2 2 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group ro SE Features SUMMARY group PS Ring Group Used to call a PS ring group gt 1 24 2 PS Ring _ Group VM DPT Group Used to call a VM DPT group 500 VM DPT Group 1 VM DTMF Group Used to call a VM DTMF group Conditions e Itis possible
289. message will begin playing automatically After the last voice message in a message box has finished playing the voice messages will begin playing from the most recent voice message again When all voice messages have been played this time the extension user will hear dial tone 4 and the line will be disconnected automatically SVM Remote Access from Trunk An extension user can remotely access his message box through a trunk by calling his own extension and using the Walking COS feature This allows the user to for example check the voice messages left in his message box when he is out of the office Accessing the Message Box of Another Extension An extension user can access the message box of another extension by using the Walking COS feature to for example record a greeting message in a message box for an Incoming Call Distribution ICD Group as described below In addition if the user s telephone has a Message button for another extension the user can easily access the message box of that extension and listen to the voice messages left by callers Message Box for Incoming Call Distribution ICD Group When a call is redirected to an SVM card from an ICD Group using Intercept Routing Overflow 1 2 2 6 Overflow Feature or Call Forwarding FWD the greeting message for the first extension assigned to that ICD Group will be played and the voice message from the caller will be recorded in that extension s message box A virtua
290. mmed DISA security mode as follows Security Mode a eee sa Trunk Call Without PBX Code With PBX Code All Security Trunk Security Vv Vv No Security Vv Vv Y v w Available If trunk call is available Account Code Entry 1 5 4 3 Account Code Entry is also available Note DISA AA service and Operator Call 2 2 5 Operator Features are available for any security mode Security Mode Override by Verification Code Entry If the caller performs Verification Code Entry 1 8 6 Verification Code Entry while hearing a DISA message the security mode can be temporarily changed to No Security mode Entry method Verification Code Entry feature number verification code verification code PIN After changing mode the new mode remains in force for the duration of the call DISA Intercept Routing Busy DND If the destination called by the outside party is busy or in DND mode and if 1 the busy destination does not set Call Waiting FWD or Idle Extension Hunting or 2 the destination is in DND mode and Idle Extension Hunting is not available one of the following can be selected through system programming a Busy Tone Busy tone is sent to the caller b Intercept Routing Intercept Routing Busy DND will work and the call will be redirected to the preprogrammed destination c Outgoing Message OGM An outgoing message OGM will be sent to the caller The message for busy DND mode can be
291. mming and personal programming Personal programming only No programming The extension which is connected to the lowest numbered extension port can perform both personal programming and system programming regardless of the COS The extension s assigned as the manager COS can perform manager programming During programming the PT is considered to be busy Only one system programmer or one manager programmer is allowed to perform system or manager programming at one time The maximum number of simultaneous programmers that each PBX supports is as follows one system programmer 63 personal programmers one manager programmer 63 personal programmers 64 personal programmers System Programming Password Level To access system programming a valid password must be entered For more details see Section 2 3 3 Password Security in this Feature Guide Personal Programming Data Default Set A user can return all of the items programmed on the telephone to default PT Programming Manual References 2 1 PT Programming 516 Programming Mode Limitation Feature Guide References 2 2 1 Class of Service COS 2 2 6 Manager Features 3 1 Capacity of System Resources User Manual References 3 1 Customising Your Phone Personal Programming 3 2 Manager Programming Feature Guide 361 2 3 System Data Control 3 3 Customising Your System System Programming 362 Feature Guide 2 3 System Data Control 2 3
292. mple PBX 1 PBX 2 PBX 3 s j 4 TIE Line x TIE Line e e Zi 8 Extn 1011 Exin 21012 Extn 2011 Extn 3011 Dials 3011 Dials 2011 Explanation To use this method it is necessary to change the first one or two digits of extension numbers of either PBX e g 10XX for PBX 1 20XX for PBX 2 to allow calls to be routed properly 284 Feature Guide 1 29 Networking Features Case 1 Extension 1012 of PBX 1 dials extension number 2011 Extension 1012 of PBX 1 is connected to extension 2011 of PBX 2 Case 2 Extension 1011 of PBX 1 dials extension number 3011 Extension 1011 of PBX 1 is connected to extension 3011 of PBX 3 b PBX Code Method Access with PBX Code Dial the TIE Line Access Number PBX Code Extension Number Example PBX 1 PBX 2 PBX 3 PBX Code 951 PBX Code 952 PBX Code 953 TIE Line KH TIE Line e rr re TEE Extn 1011 Extn 1012 Extn 1011 Extn 1011 Dials 7 953 1011 Dials 7 952 1011 PBX code TIE line access no Extn no Explanation To use this method it is necessary to know each PBX code in order to identify the location of an extension Case 1 Extension 1012 of PBX 1 dials TIE line access number 7 PBX code 952 and extension number 1011 Extension 1012 of PBX 1 is connected to
293. n PIN Display It is possible to select whether to show the extension PIN on the display through system programming By default it is shown as dots PT Programming Manual References 005 Extension Personal Identification Number PIN Feature Guide 275 1 27 Extension Controlling Features User Manual References 3 1 2 Settings on the Programming Mode 3 2 2 Manager Programming 276 Feature Guide 1 27 Extension Controlling Features 1 27 2 Extension Feature Clear Description Extension users can clear all the following features set on their own telephone at once Features After Setting Absent Message Off BGM Off FWD DND Off Call Pickup Deny Allow Call Waiting Disable In Canada the default setting is Enable Call Waiting tone Data Line Security Off Executive Busy Override Deny Allow Log in Log out Log in Message Waiting All messages left by other extensions will be cleared Paging Deny Allow Parallelled Telephone Paired SLT will ring Hot Line Off Timed Reminder Cleared Note The features with can be programmed not to be cancelled by this feature This feature is also known as Station Programme Clear Conditions e Extension Dial Lock 1 8 3 Extension Dial Lock and the extension personal identification number PIN 1 27 1 Extension Personal Identification Number PIN will not be cleared by this feature e For Users in Canad
294. n features With the KX TDA30 e One VM DPT group can be assigned e A maximum of 2 ports eight channels of the VPS can form a group With the KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 e Amaximum of 2 for KX TDA100 200 or 8 for KX TDA600 KX TVS KX TVP systems can be connected to the PBX e A maximum of one VM DPT group per KX TVS KX TVP can be assigned e Amaximum of 12 ports 24 channels of the VPS can form each group Example DPT SLT Port Port oA ee SEN EE ene Pot Ne VM DPT Group Floating extn no 500 default EE VM DTMF Group Floating extn no 250 DPT Port DPT Port j 1 I 1 Extn 101 Extn 102 Extn 103 Extn 104 i I I DPT Port DPT Port SLT SLT SLT Port Port l if 1 i i 1 Extn 117 Extn 118 Extn 119 Extn 120 l 1 1 l if L VPS DPT Digital Integration VPS DTMF Integration Feature Guide 233 1 23 Voice Mail Features 234 VM DTMF Group Assignment The VPS is connected to the SLT ports of the PBX These SLT ports as well as VM DTMF Group settings must be configured to allow DTMF Integration as shown in the following Programming Example of Extension Port and Programming Example of VM DTMF Group VM DPT Group Assignment The VPS is connected to the DPT ports of the PBX These DPT ports as well as VM DPT group settings must be configured
295. n is recorded on SMDR Installation Manual References KX TDA30 2 5 7 MEC Card KX TDA100 KX TDA200 2 3 2 MEC Card KX TDA0105 KX TDA600 2 3 2 EMEC Card KX TDA6105 PT Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 6 1 4 Last Number Redial 1 8 3 Extension Dial Lock 1 25 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR 1 27 4 Timed Reminder User Manual References 1 10 1 Using the Telephones in a Hotel type Environment Hospitality Features 272 Feature Guide 1 26 Hospitality Features 1 26 3 Call Billing for Guest Room Description Separately from SMDR it is possible to output a record of calls along with charges eg telephone charges minibar etc which can be used in billing a guest Charge Items This feature provides three types of programmable charge items Charge Item 1 Charge Item 2 and Charge Item 3 which can be used for billing guests for various services e g telephone charges Each charge item can be customized in the following ways A name that appears on the call billing print out A name that appears on the display telephone of the hotel operator A tax rate Charge Item 1 can also be assigned a margin rate which is useful for charging guests an additional rate for using the telephone services It is possible to print out a bill for a guest The bill will show the following items Example of Call Billing Sheet kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Hotel
296. n lock the Personal Speed Dialling number display to prevent the numbers from being viewed at any extension through personal programming Display Lock In this case the Incoming Outgoing Call Log displays and the SVM Log display are also locked and the voice messages in the user s message box cannot be played back An extension personal identification number PIN is required to use this feature 1 27 1 Extension Personal Identification Number PIN e When an EMEC or MEC card is installed in the PBX the number of entries programmable for each extension is increased System Speed Dialling e TRS Barring Override by System Speed Dialling It is possible to override the TRS Barring using the System Speed Dialling gt 1 8 1 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring e System Speed Dialling Display by AUTO DIAL STORE Button Pressing the AUTO DIAL STORE button on a display DPT while on hook can display the System Speed Dialling Directory es When an EMEC or MEC card is installed in the PBX System Speed Dialling numbers can be assigned separately for each tenant depending on the PBX used KX TDA30 Each tenant can select to use either the original set of common System Speed Dialling numbers or the additional common set KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 Each tenant can select to use either the original set of common System Speed Dialling numbers or the set of System Speed Dialling numbers designated specifically for that tenant
297. ncoming call distribution group ring simultaneously 2 Queuing Feature 1 2 2 4 Queuing Feature If a preprogrammed numbers of extensions in an incoming call distribution group are busy a preprogrammed number of additional calls can wait in a queue While calls are waiting in the queue an outgoing message OGM or Music on Hold can be sent to the waiting callers Feature Guide 1 2 Receiving Group Features 3 VIP Call gt 1 2 2 5 VIP Call It is possible to assign a priority to incoming call distribution groups so that incoming calls can be received in priority order 4 Overflow Feature 1 2 2 6 Overflow Feature A call is redirected to a preprogrammed destination when it cannot be answered or queued Intercept Routing Overflow in an Incoming Call Distribution Group It is also possible to send a busy tone Busy on Busy or disconnect the line 5 Incoming Call Distribution Group Controlling Feature Feature Description amp Reference Log in Log out Member extensions can join the group to handle calls Log in or leave the group for a break Log out They can leave the group temporarily when they are away from their desks to prevent calls being sent to their extensions 1 2 2 7 Log in Log out Supervisory Incoming Call Queue The supervisor extension can monitor various Feature Monitor information about the incoming calls for each incoming call distribution group on his display
298. nd in applicable Exception Code Tables y The call is denied The call is made The user hears reorder tone Conditions WARNING The software contained in the TRS Barring feature to allow user access to the network must be upgraded to recognise newly established network area codes and exchange codes as they are placed into service Failure to upgrade the on premise PBXs or peripheral equipment to recognise the new codes as they are established will restrict the customer and users of the PBX from gaining access to the network and to these codes 116 Feature Guide 1 8 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring Features KEEP THE SOFTWARE UP TO DATE WITH THE LATEST DATA e A COS should be assigned for each extension 602 Class of Service e TRS Barring checks are applied to the following ARS Trunk Access Idle Line Trunk Group S CO Line e itis programmable whether or is checked by the TRS Barring This is useful in preventing unauthorised calls which could be possible through certain telephone company exchanges e itis programmable whether TRS Barring checks the digits dialled after the External Feature Access during a trunk call gt 1 10 7 External Feature Access EFA es Host PBX Access Code Special Carrier Access Code TRS Barring checks for numbers dialled with a Host PBX Access code gt 1 5 4 8 Host PBX Access Code Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PB
299. ne ARS Automatic Route Selection B BGM Background Music BRI Basic Rate Interface C CCBS Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber CF Call Forwarding by ISDN CLI Calling Line Identification CLIP Calling Line Identification Presentation CLIR Calling Line Identification Restriction CNIP Calling Name Identification Presentation CNIR gt Calling Name Identification Restriction COLP Connected Line Identification Presentation COLR Connected Line Identification Restriction CONP Connected Name Identification Presentation CONR gt Connected Name Identification Restriction COS gt Class of Service CPC gt Calling Party Control CS gt Cell Station CT gt Call Transfer by ISDN CTI Computer Telephony Integration DDI gt Direct Dialling In DID Direct Inward Dialling DIL Direct In Line DISA Direct Inward System Access DND Do Not Disturb DPT Digital Proprietary Telephone DSS Direct Station Selection DTMF gt Dual Tone Multi Frequency E EFA External Feature Access Feature Guide F FWD Call Forwarding G G CO Group CO ICD gt Incoming Call Distribution IP PT IP Proprietary Telephone IRNA gt Intercept Routing No Answer ISDN gt Integrated Services Digital Network L L CO Loop CO LCS Live Call Screening LED Light Emitting Diode M MCID Malicious Call Identification MSN Multiple Subscri
300. ne Dial 280 Tones Ring Tones 390 Transfer Recall 144 Transfer Call 144 Transfer One touch 145 Transferring Features 144 TRS Barring Level 115 TRS Barring Override by System Speed Dialling 114 TRS Barring gt Toll Restriction Call Barring Features 114 Trunk Access 94 Trunk Answer From Any Station TAFAS 164 Trunk Busy Out 87 Trunk Call Features 82 Trunk Call Limitation 138 Trunk Group 344 Trunk Group Access 94 Trunk to Trunk Call Duration 138 Two way Recording into the VPS 244 U UCD gt Uniform Call Distribution 49 Unattended Conference 153 Uniform Call Distribution UCD 49 Upgrading Software 377 User to user Signalling Type 1 UUS 1 211 V Verification Code Entry 124 Verification Code Personal Identification Number PIN 124 VIP Call 57 Virtual Private Network VPN 309 VirtualPS 257 VM gt Voice Mail Features 233 Voice Mail VM Group 233 346 Voice Mail DPT Digital Integration 242 Voice Mail DTMF Integration 236 Voice Mail Features 233 Voice Mail Centralised 325 Voice Message Built in Simplified SVM 179 Voice over Internet Protocol VoIP Network 306 VolP gt Voice over Internet Protocol Network 306 VPN gt Virtual Private Network 309 VPS Data Control by the PBX 245 W WalkingCOS 122 Walking COS Through DISA 170 Walking COS DISA Automatic 171 Walking Extension 278 Walking Station gt Walking Extension 278 WhisperOHCA 113 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode 254
301. ne is busy when a call is made an extension user can set the Automatic Callback Busy feature The PBX will monitor the status of the destination or trunk and when it becomes available will send a callback ringing to the calling extension to inform the user After the extension answers the callback ringing the previously dialled extension number is automatically redialled or the trunk is automatically seized Conditions If the callback ringing is not answered within 10 seconds the callback is cancelled If the extension hears a busy tone before dialling the telephone number only the trunk or trunk group is reserved After answering the callback ringing the extension should dial the telephone number An extension can set only one Automatic Callback Busy The last setting is effective Multiple extension users can set this feature to one trunk simultaneously However a maximum of four extension users can set this feature to one extension Callback ringing will be sent to extensions in the order that the feature was set In other words the extension that set the feature first will receive a callback ringing first This feature cannot be used for calls to a VPS or an ISDN extension PT Programming Manual References None User Manual References 1 2 4 When the Dialled Line is Busy or There is No Answer 106 Feature Guide 1 7 Busy Line Busy Party Features 1 7 2 Executive Busy Override Description Allows an extension user
302. nect Timer These timers behave and operate according to the following chain of events 1 When the unattended conference is established the Callback Start Timer will begin 2 When the Callback Start timer expires the Unattended Conference originator s extension will start to receive a callback ringing from the PBX and the Warning Tone Start Timer begins 3 When the Warning Tone Start Timer expires the remaining parties of the conference will start to hear a warning tone the callback ringing will continue to be heard at the Unattended Conference originator s extension and the Disconnect Timer begins 4 When the disconnect Timer expires the conference is disconnected If the Unattended Conference originator returns to the conference before the line is disconnected all timers are cleared es Fora Conference With Six or More Parties The EECHO or ECHO card is required Also the echo cancelling function should be enabled through system programming Installation Manual References KX TDA30 2 5 3 ECHO8 Card KX TDA100 KX TDA200 2 6 5 ECHO16 Card KX TDA0O166 KX TDA600 2 8 6 EECHO16 Card KX TDA6166 Feature Guide 153 1 13 Conference Features PT Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 19 2 Flexible Buttons 3 1 Capacity of System Resources User Manual References 1 4 5 Multiple Party Conversation 154 Feature Guide 1 13 Conference Features 1 13 1 3 Privacy Release Descript
303. nels of a T1 trunk set to LCOT type do not support this feature e Calls to an ICD Group will ring at a virtual PS even if all of the other extensions assigned to the group are busy e Ifall members of an ICD Group are virtual PSs and trunk lines are available but the called parties are all busy neither the queuing or overflow features will operate Therefore it is recommended that at least one PT or SLT is also assigned to an ICD Group e To log in to or out of a group a virtual PS user can access the PBX through DISA enter the Walking COS feature number if required and access log in log out settings e Delayed ringing can be assigned for virtual PSs in the same way as for other extensions e The wrap up time feature is not available for virtual PSs e When forwarding calls to a public trunk system programming selects whether the CLIP number of the calling party or of the virtual PS is sent to the forward destination When calling using a private network the CLIP number of the calling party will always be sent PT Programming Manual References 620 Incoming Call Distribution Group Member 621 Incoming Call Distribution Group Delayed Ringing 622 Incoming Call Distribution Group Floating Extension Number 624 Incoming Call Distribution Group Distribution Method 690 PS Registration Feature Guide References 1 24 6 Virtual PS 1 29 6 Network ICD Group Feature Guide 53 1 2 Receiving Group Features 1 2 2 4 De
304. ng Call Distribution Group Intercept Routing Overflow for the Incoming Call Distribution Group is used 1 2 2 6 Overflow Feature The call is redirected to the overflow destination assigned for the incoming call distribution group 625 Destination for Overflow Time Expiration PS Ring Group Type 2 Floating Extension no for SVM Not available VM Group DTMF DPT Type 2 External Pager TAFAS Type 2 DISA Type 2 Analogue ISDN Remote Maintenance Not available Idle Line Access no Phone no Not available Trunk Group Access no Trunk Group Not available no Phone no Other PBX Extension TIE with no PBX Not available Code Other PBX Extension TIE with PBX Not available Code 30 Feature Guide 1 1 Incoming Call Features This is applied only when a trunk call arrives on a DISA line but the line is busy at that time Once the call reaches the destination extension by using the DISA feature the Intercept Routing feature of the extension is used Different intercept destinations can be programmed for each time mode day lunch break night Available Intercept Destinations Intercept Destination Availability Wired Extension PT SLT ISDN Extension T1 OPX Vv PS Incoming Call Distribution Group PS Ring Group Floating Extension no for SVM VM Group DTMF DPT External Pager TAFAS DISA Analogue ISDN Remote Main
305. ng the desk this feature can be set from the destination extension Busy When the extension user s line is busy No Answer When the extension user does not answer within a preprogrammed time Busy No Answer When the extension user s line is busy or the user does not answer within a preprogrammed time Depending on the type of incoming intercom or trunk calls it is possible to set a different destination for each Intercom Calls to Extension Extension Forwards to e p Another Extension Trunk Calls to m as ee Forwards to Extension Outside Party Intercom Calls to Incoming Call Distribution Group Trunk Calls to Incoming Call Distribution Group 66 Feature Guide Available Forwarding Type All Calls Busy No Answer Busy No Answer Incoming Call Distribution Group Forwards to Another Extension Forwards to Outside Party Available Forwarding Type All Calls Available Destinations 1 3 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND Features Condition for Original Extension Destination KEE Incoming Call Distribution Group Wired Extension PT SLT ISDN Extension T1 Vv Only available when FWD to OPX extension is allowed through COS PS F programming Incoming Call Distribution Group Vv PS Ring Group Vv Floating Extension no for SVM Vv VM Group DTMF DPT
306. nhanced Version is required to use this feature e Each outgoing message OGM can be assigned a name through system programming for programming reference 731 Outgoing Message OGM Name Installation Manual References KX TDA30 2 5 4 MSG2 Card KX TDA100 KX TDA200 2 6 1 OPB3 Card KX TDA0190 2 6 6 MSG4 Card KX TDA0191 KX TDA600 2 8 1 OPB3 Card KX TDA0190 Feature Guide 175 1 16 Optional Device Features 176 2 8 5 MSG4 Card KX TDA0191 PT Programming Manual References 209 DISA Delayed Answer Time 210 DISA Trunk to Trunk Call Prolong Time 211 DISA Intercept Time 470 Trunk Group Intercept Destination 475 DISA Silence Detection 476 DISA Continuous Signal Detection 477 DISA Cyclic Signal Detection 604 Extension Intercept Destination 730 Outgoing Message OGM Floating Extension Number 731 Outgoing Message OGM Name 732 DISA Security Mode Feature Guide References 1 1 1 6 Intercept Routing 1 1 1 7 Intercept Routing No Destination 1 3 1 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND 2 2 1 Class of Service COS User Manual References 1 2 8 To Access Another Party Directly from Outside Direct Inward System Access DISA 1 2 9 Setting Your Telephone from Another Extension or through DISA Remote Setting Feature Guide 1 16 Optional Device Features 1 16 7 Automatic Fax Transfer Description The PBX can distinguish between fax calls and other types of calls arri
307. nly a subset can be performed through PT programming gt 2 3 2 PT Programming In Section 1 Call Handling Features and Section 2 System Configuration and Administration Features programming references that include a three digit number such as 000 indicate that system programming can be performed through PT programming For further details please refer to the On line Help of the Maintenance Console Feature Guide Feature Highlights Networking Features This PBX supports the following networking features TIE Line Service A TIE line is a privately leased communication line between two or more PBXs which provides cost effective communications between company members at different locations gt 1 29 1 TIE Line Service Virtual Private Network VPN VPN is a service provided by the telephone company It uses an existing public line as if it were a private line gt 1 29 3 Virtual Private Network VPN QSIG Network QSIG is a protocol based on ISDN Q 931 and offers enhanced PBX features in a private network of two or more connected PBXs 1 29 4 QSIG Standard Features Voice over Internet Protocol VoIP Network The PBX can connect to another PBX via a private IP network In this case voice signals are converted into IP packets and sent through this network Automatic rerouting of VoIP calls to public trunks is also available in case of network difficulties gt 1 29 2 Voice over Internet Protocol VoIP Network Buil
308. ns on all KX T7710 telephones connected to the PBX can be customised at once through system programming The same extension number telephone number or feature number will be assigned to the same buttons on each KX T7710 useful for hotel room extensions or similar applications This feature is only available for the KX TDA100 KX TDA200 and KX TDA600 Programming Example Button Desired Number MESSAGE X702 Message Waiting To Call Back One touch Dial 01 100 Hotel Operator One touch Dial 02 7601 Wake up Call One touch Dial 03 102 Restaurant The MESSAGE button is programmed by default to call back a caller who left a message waiting indication However the MESSAGE button can be programmed to perform other features The eight One touch buttons have no default setting Conditions e The KX T7710 has two modes NORMAL mode and PBX mode selected by a switch on the telephone This feature is available only when the KX T7710 is in the PBX mode e This feature is available while hearing a dial tone e Please refer to the Quick Reference Guide of the KX T7710 for additional information PT Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 19 2 Flexible Buttons 3 2 Exclusive Features Table User Manual References 1 2 2 Easy Dialling 100 Feature Guide 1 6 Memory Dialling Features 1 6 1 4 Last Number Redial Description Every extension automatically saves recently d
309. nsion e g an extension makes a trunk call then transfers the call to an outside party the time limit applied to the trunk call that was made first will be used Budget Management When the preprogrammed call charge limit has been reached an extension user will hear 3 warning tones at five second intervals It is programmable whether the line is disconnected after the third tone After the call has ended the extension user cannot make further trunk calls until the charge limit has been increased or cleared by an extension assigned as a manager 1 8 2 Budget Management Dialling Digit Restriction during While engaged in an incoming trunk call the dialling of digits can be Conversation restricted If the number of dialled digits exceeds the limitation the line will be disconnected Conditions e During an Unattended Conference Call the Unattended Conference Recall time is applied 1 13 1 2 Conference e When using LCO trunks that do not support Calling Party Control CPC signal detection gt 1 10 10 Calling Party Control CPC Signal Detection the Trunk to Trunk Call Duration timer should not be disabled as automatic end of call detection cannot be performed 473 Trunk to Trunk Call Duration PT Programming Manual References 472 Extension to Trunk Call Duration 473 Trunk to Trunk Call Duration 502 Trunk Call Duration Limitation 138 Feature Guide 1 10 Conversation Features Fe
310. nsion Hunting Group 43 345 Idle Line Access Local Access 94 Idle Line Preference 93 Incoming Call Distribution Group 45 345 Incoming Call Indication Features 38 Incoming CallLog 193 Incoming Call Queue Monitor 63 Incoming Trunk Call Features 16 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN 210 Intercept Routing 30 Intercept Routing DISA Busy DND 170 Intercept Routing DISA No Answer 170 Intercept Routing DISA No Dial 169 Intercept Routing Busy DND 30 Intercept Routing No Answer IRNA 30 Intercept Routing No Destination 33 Intercept Routing Overflow in an Incoming Call Distribution Group 58 Intercom Call 81 Internal Call Block 36 Internal Call Features 34 Interrupt Redial 101 43 345 45 345 233 346 45 345 408 Feature Guide IP Proprietary Telephone IP PT 331 IRNA gt Intercept Routing No Answer 30 ISDN Centrex Service 212 ISDN Extension 226 ISDN Service Access by Keypad Protocol 228 ISDN gt Integrated Services Digital Network 210 Itemised Billing Code 130 L Last Number Redial 101 LCS gt Live Call Screening 244 LED Indication 205 Line Preference Override 93 Line Preference Incoming 75 Line Preference Outgoing 93 Live Call Screening LCS 244 Local Alarm Information 381 Lock Display 102 182 194 Lock Extension Dial 120 Lock Extension PIN 275 Lock Remote Extension Dial 120 Log in Log out 60 Log in Log out Monitor 61 M Malicious Call Identification
311. ny Integration CTI SD Memory Card required for some features only Feature Guide Index Feature Guide 405 Index A AA gt Automated Attendant 169 Absent Message 198 Account Code Entry 84 Advice of Charge AOC 216 Alarm Information Local 381 Alternate Calling Ring Voice 81 Alternate Receiving Calling Mode Ring Voice Override 78 Alternate Receiving Ring Voice 81 ANI gt Automatic Number Identification 188 Answering Features 74 Answering One touch Direct 74 AOC gt Advice of Charge 216 Appendix 383 ARS gt Automatic Route Selection 126 Audible Tone Features 280 Authorisation Code 129 Automated Attendant 169 Automatic Call Hold 146 Automatic Call Park 148 Automatic Callback Busy Camp on 106 Automatic Extension Release 80 Automatic Fax Transfer 177 Automatic Log out 61 Automatic Number Identification ANI 188 Automatic Privacy 155 Automatic Redial 101 Automatic Rerouting of VolP Calls to Public Trunks 307 Automatic Route Selection ARS 126 Automatic Setup 366 Automatic Station Release gt Automatic Extension Release 80 B Background Music BGM 165 Barring 114 BGM gt Background Music 165 BGM External 165 Billing Code Itemised 130 Billing for Guest Room Calls 273 Block Internal Call 36 Boss amp Secretary feature 68 Broadcasting 158 Broadcasting Group 158 Budget Management 119 Built in Simplified Voice Message SVM 179 Busy on Busy 59
312. ny extensions can belong to the same COS by assigning each extension the same COS number allowing the same restrictions and privileges to apply to a group of extensions The following features are controlled on a COS basis a b c d e f g h i i k 1 m n o p q r s t u v w gt 1 gt 1 gt 1 gt 1 gt 1 gt 1 gt 1 gt 1 gt 1 gt 1 gt 1 gt 1 gt 1 gt 1 gt 1 gt 1 gt 1 gt 1 gt 1 gt 1 gt 2 gt 2 gt 2 Conditions e Walking COS Extension users can temporarily use their own COS at another extension with a less privileged COS to access features extensions or trunks that are normally inaccessible due to that extension s COS 342 Feature Guide 1 2 2 Internal Call Block 3 1 2 Call Forwarding FWD 3 1 3 Do Not Disturb DND DND Override 4 1 3 Call Pickup 5 4 3 Account Code Entry 5 5 3 Trunk Access 7 2 Executive Busy Override 7 3 Call Monitor 7 4 3 Off hook Call Announcement OHCA 7 4 4 Whisper OHCA 8 1 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring 8 3 Extension Dial Lock 8 5 Walking COS 10 8 Trunk Call Limitation 11 1 Call Transfer 16 2 Door Open 16 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA 20 1 4 Call Forwarding CF by ISDN P MP 24 5 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode 25 1 Station Message Detail Recording SGMDR SMDR for Outgoing Trunk Calls 2 4 Time Service Time Service Switching 2 6 Manager Feature
313. ogramming is performed the connection will be dropped when power returns e The BRI8 one PFT port and BRI4 one PFT port cards can also be used for Power Failure Connections For details about Power Failure Connections refer to the Installation Manual KX TDA30 e Ports 1 and 2 of the LCOT card installed in the least slot number and ports 1 and 2 of the Super Hybrid ports can be used for Power Failure Connections Note The Power Failure Connections between the LCOT card and Super Hybrid ports are automatically kept so that the conversation is maintained when the power is restored and the Main Board is recovering e The BRI2 one port card can also be used for Power Failure Connections For details about Power Failure Connections refer to the Installation Manual Installation Manual References KX TDA30 2 2 6 Backup Batteries Connection 2 11 1 Power Failure Connections KX TDA100 KX TDA200 2 2 6 Backup Battery Connection 2 12 1 Power Failure Connections KX TDA600 2 2 11 Backup Battery Connection 2 14 1 Power Failure Connections PT Programming Manual References None Feature Guide 379 2 4 Fault Recovery Diagnostics 2 4 2 Power Failure Restart Description When turning the electricity back on the PBX restarts the stored data automatically and the PBX will record the event System Restart in the error log Conditions e Inthe event of a power failure PBX memory is protected by a factory provided lithium
314. ollowing types Type Description Call Forwarding Unconditional CFU Call Forwarding Busy CFB Call Forwarding No Reply CFNR When the CFB or CFNR has been set the network determines to forward the incoming call to the preprogrammed destination after the call reached the PBX once When the CFU has been set the network forwards the call directly to the preprogrammed destination Example Incoming calls are forwarded unconditionally An incoming call is forwarded when the destination in the PBX is busy An incoming call is forwarded when the destination in the PBX does not answer within a preprogrammed time period lt Call Forwarding CF by ISDN P MP gt lt FWD gt ISDN MSN 123 4567 CFU Destination 01 23 4567 S MSN 123 4567 4 987 6543 Outside Party Outside Party Outside Caller 01 23 4567 01 23 4567 Outside Caller 1 Dials 123 4567 Y P Extn 1011 MSN 123 4567 Forward Destination of Trunk Calls 01 23 4567 Dials 123 4567 j Extn 1011 Conditions This feature complies with the following European Telecommunication Standard ETS specification ETS 300 207 Diversion supplementary service The availability of this feature is dependent on the contract with the telephone company The feature requires the MSN service 1 1 1 4 Multiple Subscriber Number MSN Ringing Serv
315. omatic Caller ID Number Modification The Caller ID number is used after modification by the Automatic Caller ID Number Modification gt 1 17 1 Caller ID PT Programming Manual References 001 System Speed Dialling Number 002 System Speed Dialling Name Feature Guide References 1 1 1 2 Direct In Line DIL 1 1 1 3 Direct Inward Dialling DID Direct Dialling In DDI 1 1 1 4 Multiple Subscriber Number MSN Ringing Service 1 6 1 5 Speed Dialling Personal System Feature Guide 29 1 1 Incoming Call Features 1 1 1 6 Intercept Routing Description Provides automatic redirection of incoming trunk calls There are two types of Intercept Routing as follows Feature Description Intercept Routing No Answer If a called party does not answer a call within a preprogrammed time IRNA period Intercept time the call is redirected to the preprogrammed destination Intercept Routing Busy DND If a called party is busy or in DND mode the call is redirected to the preprogrammed destination The intercept destinations used are as follows Type 1 The assigned intercept destination of the extension port 604 Extension Intercept Destination Type 2 The assigned intercept destination of the trunk group that received the call 470 Trunk Group Intercept Destination Original Destination Intercept Destination Wired Extension PT SLT ISDN Type 1 Extension T1 OPX PS Type 1 Incomi
316. on or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries e All other trademarks identified herein are the property of their respective owners e The contents of this manual apply to PBXs with a certain software version as indicated on the cover of this manual To confirm the software version of your PBX refer to the FAQ in the On line Help of the Maintenance Console or 190 Main Processing MPR Software Version Reference in the PT Programming Manual e Some optional service cards PTs and features are not available in some areas In the same respect some optional service cards and features are available exclusively for the KX TDA30 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 or KX TDA600 Please consult your certified Panasonic dealer for more information 3 2 Exclusive Features Table Feature Guide 3 4 Product specifications are subject to change without notice In some cases additional information including updates to this and other manuals is included in the KX TDA Maintenance Console s Information Before Programming Install the latest version of Maintenance Console to view this information Throughout this manual PT displays and other displays are shown in English Other languages may be available depending on the country or area In this manual the suffix of each model number eg KX TDA100NE is omitted unless necessary All system programming can be performed through PC programming 2 3 1 PC Programming However o
317. one number of the transfer destination This is useful for transferring calls to an outside destination 1 6 1 Memory Dialling Features e Automatic Transfer by DSS Button Pressing a DSS button during a conversation with an extension or outside party can automatically transfer the call to the specified destination It is possible through system programming to prevent this feature operating for extension to extension calls e When transferring a call from an analogue trunk users are strongly recommended to perform a screened transfer so that the outside caller is not automatically connected to an extension using Hands free Answerback when the extension user is absent PT Programming Manual References 201 Transfer Recall Time 503 Call Transfer to Trunk 712 Music for Transfer Feature Guide References 2 2 1 Class of Service COS User Manual References 1 4 1 Transferring a Call Call Transfer Feature Guide 145 1 12 Holding Features 1 12 Holding Features 1 12 1 Call Hold Description An extension user can put a call on hold The following features are available depending on the result Feature Description Call Hold General Any extension can retrieve a held call Exclusive Call Hold Only the extension user who held the call can retrieve it The result of the holding operation can be determined through system programming Pressing the HOLD button again just after the first time alternates the
318. onfirmation Tone Description At the end of feature operations the PBX confirms the success of the operation by sending a confirmation tone to extension users Type Description Tone 1 a Sent when the setting is accepted b Sent when a call is received in voice calling mode Alternate Receiving Ring Voice The caller s voice will be heard after the tone c Sent when making a call to a doorphone Tone 2 a Sent from an external paging device or an extension before being paged b Sent when a call is received in Hands free Answerback mode Tone 3 1 a Sent before a conversation is established when using the Paging feature b Sent when a conversation is established with the extension in the following modes after the call making operation e Hands free Answerback mode e Voice calling mode Alternate Receiving Ring Voice Cl Sent when making a call from a doorphone Tone 3 2 Sent just before a conversation is established when accessing the following features by the feature numbers e Call Park Retrieve e Call Pickup e Hold Retrieve e Paging Answer e TAFAS Tone 4 1 Sent when moving from a two party call to a three party call eg Executive Busy Override Conference Privacy Release Two way Record Tone 4 2 Sent when moving from a three party call to a two party call eg Executive Busy Override Conference Privacy Release Two way Record Tone 5 Sent when a call is placed on
319. ons can belong to an incoming call distribution group 1 2 2 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features or idle extension hunting group 1 2 1 Idle Extension Hunting In this case an MSN can be assigned e Ifthe last digit of the MSN is 0 all terminal devices on the same ISDN port receive the call simultaneously if the specification of each terminal device is available To use the MSN whose last digit is 0 as an individual MSN system programming is required for each ISDN port PT Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 1 1 4 Multiple Subscriber Number MSN Ringing Service Feature Guide 227 1 20 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN Service Features 1 20 1 12 ISDN Service Access by Keypad Protocol Description ISDN provides some supplementary services by key protocol and they may require a service access code to be dialled Conditions e This feature complies with the following European Telecommunication Standard ETS specification ETS 300 122 Generic keypad protocol for the support of supplementary service ISDN Service Access es ISDN Service Button A flexible button can be customised as an ISDN Service button A service access code can also be assigned on this button for a quick operation e This feature is not available to an SLT PT Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 19 2 Flexible Buttons 3 1 Capacity of System Resources User
320. onversation Verification Code Entry To identify who made a trunk call for accounting and billing purposes a verification code is used This code can be used at any extension 1 8 6 Verification Code Entry PT Programming Manual References 508 Account Code Mode Feature Guide References 1 19 2 Flexible Buttons 1 25 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR 2 2 1 Class of Service COS User Manual References 1 2 1 Basic Calling Feature Guide 1 5 Making Call Features 1 5 4 4 Dial Type Selection Description The dialling mode rotary or tone can be selected for each analogue trunk through system programming regardless of the originating extension under contract with the telephone company There are the following modes Mode Description DTMF Dual Tone Multi The dialling signal from an extension is converted to tone dialling Frequency DTMF signals are transmitted to the trunk Pulse Dial Rotary The dialling signal from an extension is converted to rotary dialling Rotary pulses are transmitted to the trunk Conditions e Pulse to Tone Conversion It is possible for an extension user to temporarily switch from Pulse mode to DTMF mode so that the user can access special services such as computer accessed long distance calling or voice mail services To switch to DTMF mode wait for a preprogrammed time period Default five seconds after the trunk is connected or press x This feature
321. ook Call Announcement OHCA Receiving Whisper OHCA gt 1 7 4 4 Whisper OHCA PT Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 19 2 Flexible Buttons User Manual References 1 3 5 Using the ANSWER RELEASE Button 1 4 8 Using the Headset Headset Operation 3 1 2 Settings on the Programming Mode Feature Guide 1 10 Conversation Features 1 10 5 Data Line Security Description Setting Data Line Security at an extension protects communications between the extension and the other party from being interrupted by signals such as Call Waiting Hold Recall and Executive Busy Override An extension that is using a connected data device e g a fax machine can set this feature to maintain secure data transmission by preventing tones or interruptions from other extensions during communication PT Programming Manual References None User Manual References 1 7 9 Protecting Your Line against Notification Tones Data Line Security Feature Guide 135 1 10 Conversation Features 1 10 6 Flash Recall Terminate 136 Description The FLASH RECALL button Flash Recall mode or Terminate mode or Terminate button Terminate mode is used when a PT user disconnects the current call and originates another call without hanging up first It performs the same function as going on hook and then going off hook Explanation of Each Mode Flash Recall Mode Disconnects the line The extension user hears the di
322. ording to a preprogrammed hunting type This feature is also known as Station Hunting Type Description Circular Hunting An idle extension is searched for in the order specified in the idle extension hunting group in a circular way Incoming call M Busy Extn Extn gt Extn gt 3 Assigned order gt Terminated Hunting An idle extension is searched for in the order specified in the idle extension hunting group until reaching the last assigned extension Incoming call y Busy Extn Extn gt Extn gt Assigned order gt X Conditions e idle Extension Hunting applies to Intercom trunk and doorphone calls to a single destination e An extension user can belong to only one idle extension hunting group e If all the searched extensions are busy The PBX redirects the call to an overflow destination which can be assigned for each idle extension hunting group and each time mode day lunch break night 2 2 4 Time Service Available Destination Destination Availability Wired Extension PT SLT ISDN Extension T1 OPX Vv PS Vv Incoming Call Distribution Group Vv Feature Guide 43 1 2 Receiving Group Features Destination Availability PS Ring Group Vv VM Group DTMF DP
323. ort The DPT that is connected directly to the PBX PBX is called the master DPT and the DPT connected Masteri Save to the master DPT is called the slave DPT DPT DPT Like XDP mode each telephone can act as a Extn 101 Extn 201 completely different extension with its own extension number If a master DPT is connected to the PBX by a Super DPT DPT SLT Hybrid port not a DPT port a third telephone SLT iia can also be in parallel or XDP mode with the master PBX SE ee DPT DPT DPT SLT Extn 101 Extn 201 Extn 101 in Parallel Mode or Extn 105 in XDP Mode 140 Feature Guide 1 10 Conversation Features Features Descriptions Connections Wireless XDP For this connection refer to 1 24 5 Wireless XDP APT DPT SLT PS Parallel Mode Parallel Mode EE PBX it pr Extn 101 F ps Extn 101 1 ER i Exin 102 t pg Extn 102 Conditions APT SLT If one telephone goes off hook while the other is on a call a three party call is established If one user goes on hook the other user continues the call An extension user cannot originate a call from the SLT if the APT is playing background music BGM receiving a paging announcement over the built in speaker For users in Germany and Austria only Although the APT will ring for incoming calls the
324. ory PS 252 DISA AA Service gt DISA Built in Automated Attendant Number 169 DISA Automatic Walking COS 171 DISA Built in Automated Attendant Number DISA AA Service 169 DISA Intercept Routing Busy DND 170 DISA Intercept Routing No Answer 170 DISA Intercept Routing No Dial 169 DISA Security Mode 169 DISA gt Direct Inward System Access 169 Display Information 208 Index Display Lock 102 182 194 Distribution Group Call 49 DND Override 70 DND gt Do Not Disturb DND Paging 70 157 Do Not Disturb DND 65 70 DoorOpen 163 Doorphone Call 161 E E1 Line Service 229 EFA gt External Feature Access 137 Electronic Station Lockout gt Extension Dial Lock 120 Emergency Call 83 Exception Code Tables 114 Exclusive Call Hold 146 Exclusive Features Table 389 Executive Busy Override 107 Executive Busy Override Deny 107 Extension Controlling Features 275 Extension DialLock 120 Extension Feature Clear 277 Extension Personal Identification Number PIN 275 Extension PIN Lock 275 Extension Port Configuration 340 Extension Release Automatic 80 Extension User Group 344 Extension to Trunk Call Duration 138 External Feature Access EFA 137 External Relay Control 186 External Sensor 184 Eva Device Port XDP 340 F Fault Recovery Diagnostics 378 Fax Transfer Automatic 177 Feature Clear Extension 277 Feature Highlights 5 First Party Call Control 333 Fixed Buttons 199 Flash Recall Terminate 13
325. ough system programming Calling Connected Line Identification Restriction CLIR COLR It is possible for each extension to restrict the sending of its extension number to the QSIG network by pressing the CLIR button COLR button or entering the feature number Feature Guide 313 1 29 Networking Features Calling Connected Name Identification Restriction CNIR CONR It is possible for each extension to restrict the sending of its extension name to the QSIG network When CLIR is activated CNIR becomes active automatically When COLR is activated CONR becomes active automatically Conditions e These features comply with the following European Telecommunication Standard ETS specifications CLIP COLP ETS 300 172 Circuit mode basis services CNIP CONP ETS 300 238 Name identification supplementary services e COLP CLIR COLR CNIP CONP CNIR CONR Assignment for Each Port Each service can be enabled or disabled on each ISDN QSIG port of the PBX e CLIR Button and COLR Button It is possible to switch between CLIP and CLIR by pressing the CLIR button and COLP and COLR by pressing the COLR button A flexible button can be customised as the CLIR or COLR button PT Programming Manual References 003 Extension Number 004 Extension Name Feature Guide References 1 19 2 Flexible Buttons User Manual References 1 7 4 Displaying Your Telephone Number on the Called Party and Caller s Telephone Calling Connected Line Iden
326. ough 9 x P Pause F EFA signal A Host PBX Access code 1 5 4 8 Host PBX Access Code Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX dot Secret dialling X Privacy dial Transferred call If the transfer destination extension enters some digits the entered digits will be added after Incoming Trunk Call Shows lt l gt the caller s identification name number It is also possible to show the DDI DID MSN call information In this case lt D gt DDI DID MSN name number is added before lt I gt Outgoing Intercom Call Shows the dialled extension number followed by EXT Log in Log out Shows the log in or log out status Check in Check out Shows the check in or check out status gt 1 26 2 Room Status Control Timed Reminder Shows the status of a timed reminder either Start No Answer or Answer gt 1 27 4 Timed Reminder Printing Message Shows the selected message 1 25 2 Printing Message Sensor Call Shows calls from an external sensor as follows lt l gt S sensor number 1 16 9 External Sensor Feature Guide 261 1 25 Administrative Information Features 262 Nambari Item Description the Pattern P 6 Ring Shows the ring duration before answering a call in Minutes Seconds 7 Duration Shows the duration of the trunk call in Hours Minutes Seconds 8 Acc Code Shows the accoun
327. outside party and calls between two outside parties If the timer expires the line will be disconnected gt 1 10 8 Trunk Call Limitation Feature Guide 67 1 3 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND Features e Multiple FWD Calls can be forwarded up to four times The following forwarding features are counted as Multiple FWD FWD Busy or Busy No Answer when the destination extension is busy or All Calls Idle Extension Hunting Overflow Intercept Routing Busy DND when the destination extension is busy or in DND mode Incoming Call Distribution Group Overflow Incomingy D call o Original destination In the above illustration forwarding stops at extension E However forwarding can go farther in the following cases If a destination extension rings and then the call is redirected to the forward destination by the FWD No Answer or Busy No Answer feature If a destination extension rings and then the call is redirected to the intercept destination by the Intercept Routing No Answer feature If acall waits in a queue of an incoming call distribution group and then the call is redirected to the overflow destination by the Queuing Time Table gt 1 2 2 4 Queuing Feature In the above cases the forwarding counter resets to zero and the call can be forwarded up to four times again from the destination extension described above Incomingy call P Ori
328. p Call Waiting Feature Activates Programming Conditions Result Group Call Group Call Group Call Waiting Capable Waiting Mode Distribution Method Distribution Method Telephone Distribution UCD UCD PT PS with idle Priority Hunting c Priority Hunting ICD Group button Ring Not available Any telephone All UCD Priority Hunting Ring Ring SEH Incoming calls enter the queue immediately Member extensions do not receive the Call Waiting tone Example e Group Call Waiting mode All e Group call distribution method gt for idle extensions UCD All extensions hear the Call Waiting tone Ring ICD Group Button for Group Call Waiting The way that the Group Call Waiting feature works depends on the Group Call Waiting Distribution method as follows a Ring The Group Call Waiting feature activates for all busy member extensions even when the extensions do not have ICD Group buttons simultaneously for only one incoming call additional calls will wait in a queue b UCD Priority Hunting The Group Call Waiting feature activates on an idle ICD Group button located on busy member extensions in a certain order This order depends on the type UCD or Priority Hunting Calls will arrive at idle buttons until all ICD Group buttons are occupied additional calls will wait in a queue Note In method b if an extension has one or more ICD Group buttons
329. per OHCA are enabled or disabled by the COS of the calling extension e OHCA and Whisper OHCA do not work for some telephone types In such cases the Call Waiting tone will be sent to the called extension Calling Called Extension s Call Waiting Mode Extension s OHCA COS oF Ge Mode Cancel Call Waiting Tone OHCA Whisper OHCA Disable Call Waiting Call Waiting tone Call Waiting tone Call Waiting tone disabled Enable Call Waiting Call Waiting tone OHCA Whisper OHCA or disabled or Call Waiting tone Call Waiting tone e The notification receiving methods Call Waiting tone OHCA and Whisper OHCA are available only when the called extension is having a conversation with another party If the called party is not yet connected with the other party e g still ringing on hold etc the calling extension will hear a ringback tone and will be kept waiting until the called extension becomes available to receive the call waiting notification Feature Guide 109 1 7 Busy Line Busy Party Features e If none of these notification receiving methods Call Waiting tone OHCA or Whisper OHCA are set at the called party s extension the caller will hear a reorder tone Feature Guide References 1 1 3 3 Call Waiting User Manual References 1 2 4 When the Dialled Line is Busy or There is No Answer 1 7 3 Receiving Call Waiting Call Waiting Off hook Call Announcement OHCA Whisper OHCA 110 Feature
330. phone company Making and receiving both public and private calls is possible using the same line Public Private Discrimination a When making a call The public private discrimination number is required before sending the dialled number to the telephone company The public private discrimination number can be dialled manually or automatically by ARS programming 1 9 1 Automatic Route Selection ARS and or TIE line service programming b When receiving a call The telephone company distinguishes the call type If it is a private call the call is received by the TIE line service method If it is a public call the call is received by the Incoming Trunk Call Distribution method DIL DDI MSN which is assigned on the trunk Example Public ISDN lt Public Discrimination gt 0 01 23 4567 Public No A r f e Dials gt lt Private 01 45 6789 1PBX 11 Discrimination gt PBX 2 PBX 3 PBX Code 111 PBX Code 112 PBX Code 113 Head 113 401 5 H Branch ea To ranci ranci Office 4 Private No 1 office Office 1 r Extn 201 Extn 202 Extn 301 Extn 302 Extn 401 Extn 402 A A DDI No 01 45 6789 Dials 9 01 23 4567 Dials 401 TIE Gn au Note Public Call Private Call Conditions e Each BRI PRI port can be set to public or VPN through system programming To use this service select VPN Feature Guide 309
331. ple PBX DPT SLT DPT DPT DPT DPT SLT SLT SLT SLT Port Port Port Port Port Port Port Port Port Port 6 PS Ring Group VM DPT Group DPT Digital Integration VPS VM DTMF Group VPS DTMF Integration A PS ring group is a group of PS extensions that receives incoming calls directed to the group Each group has a floating extension number and name through system programming One PS can belong to multiple groups gt 1 24 2 PS Ring Group PS Ring Group 1 Floating Extn No 301 Name Sales 1 PS Ring Group 2 PT Programming Manual References 402 LCOT BRI Trunk Group Number 603 Extension User Group 346 Feature Guide Floating Extn No 302 Name Sales 2 2 2 System Configuration Software 620 Incoming Call Distribution Group Member 622 Incoming Call Distribution Group Floating Extension Number 623 Incoming Call Distribution Group Name 640 Extension User Groups of a Paging Group 650 Extension User Groups of a Pickup Group 660 VM Group Floating Extension Number 680 Idle Extension Hunting Type 681 Idle Extension Hunting Group Member Feature Guide References 3 1 Capacity of System Resources Feature Guide 347 2 2 System Configuration Software 2 2 3 Tenant Service Description This PBX can be shared with a certain number of tenants 1 Tenant Configuration 1
332. plied gt 1 8 1 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring Budget Management for Verified Call If an extension user makes a trunk call with a verification code the call charge will be added to the total for the verification code not the extension 1 8 6 Verification Code Entry Each verification code can be assigned a call charge limit Budget Management for Walking COS If an extension user makes a trunk call from an extension using the Walking COS feature the call charge will be added to the extension of the extension user not the extension that the call was made on 1 8 5 Walking COS Pay tone service or ISDN Advice of Charge AOC service is required for this feature It is possible to select whether to disconnect the line disconnect mode after a warning tone or only to send a warning tone when the amount of the call charge reaches the preprogrammed limit during a conversation When multiple extension users are using the same verification code or the same extension through the use of Walking COS simultaneously each caller can have access to the total remaining budget of the extension or verification code PT Programming Manual References None User Manual References 3 2 2 Manager Programming Feature Guide 119 1 8 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring Features 1 8 3 Extension Dial Lock Description An extension user can change the TRS Barring level of the telephone 1 8 1 Toll Restric
333. ponding extension to the VPS when a call is forwarded from an extension to the VPS Therefore the caller can leave a message for the called extension without knowing the mailbox number FWD to the VPS Sequence Selection If an extension user sets FWD to the VPS any incoming call will be forwarded to the VPS It is also possible to send the AA command even in the VM service mode when calls are forwarded so that the caller can be directed to an extension rather than a mailbox This can be performed by selecting AA through system programming Transmitted Command Parameter In AA Service Mode In VM Service Mode Answer by Mailbox Switching to VM command Recording message command H Default Recording message command 6 H Mailbox Nol H H Mailbox No AA Switching to AA command 8 Switching to AA command 8 None DTMF commands are not sent Work with default of the VPS Intercept Routing to a Mailbox of the VPS The PBX sends a mailbox number of the corresponding extension to the VPS when a trunk call is intercepted from an extension to the VPS Therefore the caller can leave a message for the called extension without knowing the mailbox number Intercept Routing to the VPS Sequence Selection If an extension user sets Intercept Routing to the VPS the intercepted trunk calls will be redirected to the VPS It is also possible to send the AA command even in the VM service mode when calls are
334. psed time of the call The starting time and the total duration of the call are recorded on SMDR 208 Call Duration Count Starting Time for LCOT If the reverse signal detection has been set 1 5 4 5 Reverse Circuit the PBX will start counting the call after detecting the reverse signal from the telephone company regardless of the above timer e Serial Interface RS 232C Parameters The following communication parameters can be assigned for the Serial Interface RS 232C port a New Line Code Select the code for the PC or printer If the PC or printer automatically feeds lines with carriage return select CR If not select CR LF 800 RS 232C Parameter New Line Code b Baud Rate A baud rate code indicates the data transmission speed from the PBX to the PC or printer 800 RS 232C Parameter Baud Rate c Word Length A word length code indicates how many bits compose a character 800 RS 232C Parameter Word Length d Parity Bit A parity code indicates what type of parity is used to detect an error in the string of bits composing a character Make an appropriate selection depending on the requirements of the PC or printer 800 RS 232C Parameter Parity Bit e Stop Bit Length A stop bit code indicates the end of a bit string which composes a character Select an appropriate value depending on the requirements of the PC or printer 800 RS 232C Parameter Stop Bit Length e Host PBX Access Code Th
335. r PIN Idle Line Access number of PBX 2 9 and telephone number 211 4567 If the specified verification code applies COS 2 of PBX 2 the call is connected to the outside party through PBX 2 because COS 2 is not blocked from accessing TRG 3 of PBX 2 Feature Guide 293 1 29 Networking Features 294 d FWD Call Transfer Intercept Routing to the Trunk Feature Guide Example Telephone Company A e e e eee eee Forwarded Transferred Intercepted to 211 4567 8 Extn 1011 Outside Party 211 4567 l Dials 7 952 1011 Explanation 1 Extension 1011 of PBX 1 dials the TIE line access number 7 PBX code 952 and extension number 1011 2 The call reaches the destination extension 1011 of PBX 2 through the TIE line and the call is forwarded transferred or intercepted to the outside party 211 4567 through the trunk 1 29 Networking Features 2 3 Trunk to TIE to Trunk Access An outside caller can be connected to an outside party through the TIE line by using the DISA feature Example Telephone Company area code 09 e Telephone Company area code 01 Trunk TIE Line Network PBX 1 PBX 2 PBX Code 952 952 9 01 23 4567 TIE Line Vv Outside Caller Outside Party a IS 2 23 4567 Dials DISA phone aa number 9 01 23 Extn 1011 Extn 1011 4567 Explanat
336. r 229 T1 BING Service Feat reS sc cise sissies cocaticatevassntnn secieaenesnnaaeseccnsshvethasaatecckisasvanncecbascctinesbiaass 231 WIS Service EE 231 Voice Mail Features isiis iscsi cscicccceis canis avtas vines sassseessae nasaan EE ES EEe EEN EEEEEREEEES EE dESe EN 233 Voice EI RE e EE 233 Voice Mail DTMF et 236 Voice Mail DPT Digital Integration c ecccceeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeceneneeeesesseeneeeeeeenees 242 Portable Station PS Features 2 2 cesssccscssesccccessscesesnencensenaececessnanseesenanecesesanneceeess 247 Portable Station PS Connection keen 247 re KE EE 249 Feature Guide 124 3 eebe 252 1 24 4 PS Feature Eesen eege ege Eege ENEE 253 1 24 5 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode 254 E GEERT 257 1 25 Administrative Information Features cccccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeessesseesneesseeseeeseeeseeseeeenes 259 1 25 1 Station Message Detail Recording MIDD 259 1 25 2 Printing MGSS EE 266 1 25 3 e e EE 267 1 26 Hospitality Features a sitcnssixassnccniicisiscannsnsas sancnnstnanscuaancaxacsaaannstwnwsssaananuaninadeasiernsanasssiual 270 1 26 1 Hospitality Features SUMMARPY eee eeee eter eeeeeee eee eae eeeeceeeeeeeeaeeeeetaaeeeeea 270 1 26 2 Room Status e E 271 1 26 3 Call Billing for Guest ROOM eege edd Ree ew ses 273 1 27 Extension Controlling Features cccssccccssseseecssseeeeeeeseneeeeseseneeeesesneeseeseseeeeesseneaes 275 1 27 1 Extension Personal Identification Number PIN
337. r 45 12 Margin Tax Rate Assignment It is possible to add a margin and a tax to the call charges The call charge rate per meter indication is programmable on a trunk group basis Calculation Method The margin or tax rate must consist of four digits two digits before and after the decimal xx xx The calculation method used by the PBX varies depending on whether the telephone company sends the meter indication or the actual call charge a Call charge with tax and margin in meter indication Meter indication received from the telephone company x Call Charge Rate XxX 1 Tax Rate 1 Margin Rate b Call charge with tax and margin in charge Charge received from the telephone company x 1 Tax Rate 1 Margin Rate The calculation result is rounded up to the least significant decimal digit Total Call Charge APT user can show the total call charges on the display The call charge is totalled on an extension trunk or verification code basis When a verification code is used the call is charged on the verification code and not the extension that the call was made on Feature Guide 267 1 25 Administrative Information Features 5 Budget Management It is possible to limit telephone usage to a preprogrammed budget on each extension or verification code For example an extension in a rented office has a prepaid limit for telephone usage If the amount of the call charge reaches the l
338. r and VPS trunk group number can also be assigned in the DIL table Tenant number is used to determine the time mode day lunch break night for the corresponding trunk VPS trunk group number is used in Voice Mail DPT Digital Integration Explanation If a trunk call is received from trunk 01 In Day mode CLI is enabled Route to CLI destination In Lunch mode CLI is disabled Route to DIL destination extension 100 PT Programming Manual References 421 BRI DIL DDI MSN Selection 450 DIL 1 1 Destination Feature Guide References 1 1 1 5 Calling Line Identification CLI Distribution 2 2 3 Tenant Service 2 2 4 Time Service 3 1 Capacity of System Resources Feature Guide 21 1 1 Incoming Call Features 1 1 1 3 Direct Inward Dialling DID Direct Dialling In DDI Description Provides automatic direction of an incoming call with a DID DDI number to a preprogrammed destination Each DID DDI number has a destination for each time mode day lunch break night Method Flowchart A trunk call is received Is the DID DDI number found in the DID DDI table The call is routed to the operator Intercept Routing No Destination Does the call have its CLI information and is CLI mode enabled for the time mode No CLI works Yes Is the CLI destination assigned Is the DID DDI destination for the time mode assigned No AA The call is routed to the The
339. redirected to his message box on the SVM card when he cannot answer them The user can set the floating extension number of the SVM card as the destination for redirected calls Then the SVM card answers redirected calls plays back the relevant greeting message and records a voice message Incoming calls can be redirected to an SVM card by the following methods Call Forwarding FWD gt 1 3 1 2 Call Forwarding FWD Intercept Routing No Answer Busy DND gt 1 1 1 6 Intercept Routing Programming Example for Intercept Routing Extension No Assigned SVM Card Intercept Destination NO Day Lunch Break Night 101 1 102 591 591 591 102 1 103 591 591 591 301 Operator E 8 E 931 In this example If a call is received at extension 101 and cannot be answered a In day mode the call will be redirected to extension 102 b In lunch break night mode the call will be redirected to the SVM card and a voice message will be recorded to the message box If a call is received at extension 301 operator the call will only be redirected to the SVM card in night mode If both FWD and Intercept Routing features are set for an extension the FWD setting has priority So for example it is possible for extension 101 to temporarily set FWD settings from his extension to forward calls to an SVM card even during day mode Greeting Message for Each Time Mode When a call is redirected to the SVM c
340. rid port can be detected automatically without any programming An APT connected to a Super Hybrid port can be detected automatically when the XDP mode has been disabled A DSS Console or a Panasonic VPS DPT Digital Integration can also be connected with an SLT in XDP mode APT and SLT in Parallel Mode An APT and an SLT can also be connected to a Super Hybrid port and used in parallel mode Digital XDP A DPT can be connected to another DPT and act as a completely different extension gt 1 10 9 Parallelled Telephone Wireless XDP Parallel Mode A PS can be used in parallel mode with a wired telephone gt 1 24 5 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode DSS Console and Paired Telephone Assignment When a DSS Console is connected a paired extension must be assigned through system programming Only a PT can be a paired extension 340 Feature Guide 2 1 System Configuration Hardware PT Programming Manual References 007 DSS Console Paired Telephone 600 EXtra Device Port XDP Mode Feature Guide 341 2 2 System Configuration Software 2 2 System Configuration Software 2 2 1 Class of Service COS Description Each extension must belong to a Class of Service COS By assigning certain extensions to a COS it is possible to control the behaviour and privileges of extension users allowing or denying certain extensions access to various features extensions and trunks depending on the duties appointed to them Ma
341. riority 2 Location Leading Dial Modification Dial Modification No No TRG Removed TRG Removed No of Added No No of Added No Digits Digits Explanation Calls to destinations with leading number 2 or 3 are automatically routed through the VoIP ports designated as trunk group 2 e IP GW IP Gateway Circuit IP address assignment for the local PBX and other PBXs Programming Example Destination Leading No IP Address 2 200 45 11 35 3 199 176 64 1 Explanation Calls are routed to the IP address of each IP GW card based on the leading number dialled Automatic Rerouting of VoIP Calls to Public Trunks When a VoIP call cannot be completed successfully the PBX can automatically attempt to make the call using a public trunk instead This provides a backup method of making calls in cases when IP network transmission cannot be completed successfully Example Telephone Company Telephone Company P Extn 1000 s 7 20 1011 The leading numbers of extensions accessed through the VoIP network are added as entries to the Quick Dialling table in addition to being registered as Other PBX Extension Numbers as shown below Programming Example Number to dial to call an extension at another PBX using VoIP network 7 TIE line access number 20 PBX Code 1011 extension number Private IP Network em rm vm e e wb e vm re
342. roup Example 17 Extension User Group 4 Extension Extension User Group 1 User Group 2 fone Be l Extn 100 Extn 101 Extn 102 Extn 103 Extn 106 Extn 107 dE PT Programming Manual References 650 Extension User Groups of a Pickup Group 76 Feature Guide 1 4 Answering Features Feature Guide References 2 2 1 Class of Service COS 3 1 Capacity of System Resources User Manual References 1 3 3 Answering a Call Ringing at Another Telephone Call Pickup Feature Guide 77 1 4 Answering Features 1 4 1 4 78 Description Hands free Answerback APT user with a speakerphone can talk to a caller without lifting the handset If the user receives a call while in Hands free Answerback mode a hands free conversation is established using one of the following methods Type Answering Method Intercom Call Established immediately after a beep tone at the called extension and the caller hears a confirmation tone Trunk Call Established after a specified number of rings a called extension hears a beep tone Conditions e Hands free Answerback applies to Intercom calls and trunk calls including calls directed to an incoming call distribution group in UCD or Priority Hunting distribution method 1 2 2 2 Group Call Distribution e Hands free Answerback for Trunk Calls System programming is required to use this feature Hands free Answerback for Calls From an Exten
343. s 3 2 PT Programming 2 2 System Configuration Software PT Programming Manual References 2 1 8 COS Programming 602 Class of Service Feature Guide References 3 1 Capacity of System Resources User Manual References 1 2 7 Calling without Restrictions Feature Guide 343 2 2 System Configuration Software 2 2 2 Group Description This PBX supports various types of groups 1 Trunk Group Trunks can be grouped into a specified number of trunk groups eg for each carrier trunk type etc Several settings can be assigned on a trunk group basis All trunks belonging to a trunk group follow the assignment determined for that trunk group 402 LCOT BRI Trunk Group Number One trunk can belong to only one trunk group on a port or channel basis Port basis ELCOT LCOT DID E amp M ISDN BRI ISDN PRI23 ISDN PRI30 Channel basis E1 T1 2 Extension User Group The PBX supports extension user groups each of which is used to compose the following groups a Tenant 2 2 3 Tenant Service b Call Pickup Group See below c Paging Group See below Every extension must belong to one extension user group but cannot belong to more than one extension user group 603 Extension User Group Assignable Extensions PT SLT PS ISDN Extension T1 OPX Example Extension 1 Extension II Extension Extension User Group 1 User Group 2 User Group 3 User Group 4 i i l l l j l D l
344. s and intervals are programmable through system programming e To use the voice message feature The MSG card is required and the message must be recorded An extension assigned as the manager can record messages 1 16 5 Outgoing Message OGM A different message can be assigned for each time mode day lunch break night 2 2 4 Time Service Installation Manual References KX TDA30 2 5 4 MSG2 Card KX TDA100 KX TDA200 2 6 6 MSG4 Card KX TDA0191 KX TDA600 2 8 5 MSG4 Card KX TDA0191 PT Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 26 2 Room Status Control User Manual References 1 7 1 Setting the Alarm Timed Reminder 1 10 1 Using the Telephones in a Hotel type Environment Hospitality Features Feature Guide 279 1 28 Audible Tone Features 1 28 Audible Tone Features 1 28 1 Dial Tone Description The following distinctive dial tones inform extensions about features activated on their extensions Each dial tone type has two frequencies e g dial tone 1A and dial tone 1B Type Description Tone 1A 1B A normal dial tone is heard when a No features listed for dial tones 2 through 4 has been set or b ARS is used Tone 2A 2B This tone is heard when e There are messages that have previously been listened to and no new messages on the SVM card e Any of the features below are set e Absent Message e BGM es FWD e Call Pickup Deny e Call Waiting es DND
345. s day night lunch and break modes of operation TRS Barring can be arranged separately The destination of incoming calls can be set differently for each mode 1 Time Service Switching Mode Day lunch break night mode can be switched either automatically or manually The switching mode can be assigned for each tenant The switching mode can also be changed by pressing the Time Service Switching Mode Automatic Manual button This can be performed by only an extension assigned as the manager or preprogrammed extension on a COS basis Type Description Automatic The PBX will switch mode according to the preprogrammed Time Table Manual A manager or preprogrammed extension on a COS basis can switch mode by dialling the feature number or pressing the Time Service button Even while in the Automatic Switching mode day lunch break night mode can be changed manually Time Table Each tenant has a Time Table used for the Automatic Switching mode The Start and or End time of each mode can be set for each day of the week The Time Table numbers correspond to the tenant numbers respectively Feature Guide 351 2 2 System Configuration Software 352 Time Table Example Time Schedule Time Table No Tenant No 1 2 3 4 MON Day 1 start 08 00 11 00 08 00 08 00 Lunch start 12 00 NONE 16 00 12 00 Day 2 start 13 00 NONE NONE NONE Break 1 start NONE NONE NONE NON
346. s not answered within 10 seconds PT Programming Manual References None User Manual References 1 2 4 When the Dialled Line is Busy or There is No Answer Feature Guide 319 1 29 Networking Features 1 29 5 QSIG Enhanced Features 1 29 5 1 Network Direct Station Selection NDSS Description When PBxs are networked using ISDN or IP GW cards it is possible to assign flexible buttons as Network Direct Station Selection NDSS buttons These buttons are used to monitor the status of extensions connected to up to seven other PBXs in the network and to make or transfer calls to those extensions with one touch like normal DSS buttons This allows operator functions to be centralised even when there are offices in remote locations NDSS buttons show the status of the monitored extension as follows Light pattern Status Off The monitored extension is idle Red on The monitored extension is busy or has set DND for trunk calls Example Network 1001 busy E 2 2001 busy PBX 1 KR Network ID 1 Monitor DG DO extension i dei 2002 idle Extn 2001 Extn 2002 Extn 4001 ma l IS 4001 idle JE Monitor extension Extn 1001 Extn 2002 Programming Procedure 1 Routing Table Assignment TIE Line Routing and Modification tables must have been programmed in advance for all PBXs in the network to allow calls to be made
347. s off hook with the handset MONITOR button or SP PHONE button However PS users cannot monitor the call with the speakerphone 13 Two way Recording into the VPS A PT user can record a conversation into his own mailbox or another mailbox while talking on the phone The Two way Record button is used to record into one s own mailbox The Two way Transfer button is used to record into someone else s mailbox 244 Feature Guide 1 23 Voice Mail Features Note Before recording a Two way telephone conversation you should inform the other party that the conversation will be recorded 14 VPS Data Control by the PBX The date and time settings of the VPS are controlled by the PBX 15 Remote FWD Setting by the VM Extension FWD settings can be programmed using the VPS This feature may not be supported depending on the software version of the VPS Conditions General Voice Mail VM Transfer Button A flexible button can be customised as the Voice Mail VM Transfer button with the floating extension number of the VM group as the parameter Note that when a user transfers a call to the VPS with the VM Transfer button any caller ID information associated with the original call is not passed to the VPS Extensions that will have a mailbox using a VM in DPT integration must have extension numbers of 2 to 4 digits Live Call Screening LCS If an SLT is connected in parallel to a PT and if LCS is activated
348. scription Queuing Feature When a preprogrammed number of extensions in an incoming call distribution group are busy additional incoming calls can wait in a queue The number of calls which can wait in the queue is programmable While calls are waiting in the queue the calls are handled by the Queuing Time Table which can be assigned for each time mode day lunch break night 2 2 4 Time Service This PBX supports a specified number of Queuing Time Tables which each have a specified number of sequences specific commands which are performed when a caller enters a queue The following commands can be assigned to each sequence when making a Queuing Time Table Command Table Command Description Condition OGM xx An outgoing message is sent to the After the OGM Music on Hold will be caller xx applies to the OGM sent and the next event in the sequence number will be activated bx5s Puts the caller in the waiting queue for If an OGM has not been sent to the b 01 16 x 5 seconds caller the caller hears a ringback tone If an OGM has been sent to the caller the caller hears Music on Hold Sequence c Redirects to sequence c c applies None to the sequence number Overflow Redirects to the overflow destination None Disconnect Disconnects the line None None Redirects to the next sequence If assigned as sequence 01 the Queuing No command Time Table will not be activated Programming
349. setting is effective The CCBS setting is cancelled if there is no callback ringing within 60 minutes or callback ringing is not answered within 10 seconds If an extension user makes a call using the CCBS feature the preassigned CLIP number for the extension will be used even though the extension has set CLIR or the extension has used the CLIP for the incoming call distribution group by pressing the ICD Group button when the CCBS has set gt 1 20 1 2 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP After using the CCBS feature using Last Number Redial will not retrieve the number dialled by CCBS gt 1 6 1 4 Last Number Redial An extension user that has set the CCBS feature cannot receive callback ringing while the extension is holding a call PT Programming Manual References None User Manual References 1 2 4 When the Dialled Line is Busy or There is No Answer Feature Guide 225 1 20 Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN Service Features 1 20 1 11 ISDN Extension Description An ISDN BRI PRI port can be used for either trunk or extension connection When extension connection is enabled ISDN terminal devices e g ISDN telephone G4 fax machine PC or a behind PBX can be connected to the port If the ISDN port is in point to point P P configuration one terminal device can be connected to the port If the ISDN port is in point to multipoint P MP configuration a maximum of eight terminal dev
350. signed the caller will hear a reorder tone Conditions e A single extension or incoming call distribution group can be assigned as both a tenant operator and the PBX operator e Tenant operators can be assigned individually for multiple tenants PT Programming Manual References 006 Operator Assignment Feature Guide References 2 2 3 Tenant Service 3 1 Capacity of System Resources User Manual References 1 2 1 Basic Calling 1 10 1 Using the Telephones in a Hotel type Environment Hospitality Features Feature Guide 355 2 2 System Configuration Software 2 2 6 Manager Features Description An extension assigned as the manager manager extension is allowed to use the specified features COS programming determines the extensions which can use the following manager features ae Manager Feature Description amp Reference Password Manager Manager Password __ Changes the manager password Required Programming Change Call Charge Sets displays clears and prints the call Required Management charge data 1 25 3 Call Charge Services Verification Code Sets a verification code PIN for each Required Personal verification code Identification Number PIN Set 1 8 6 Verification Code Entry Remote PIN Clear Clears the extension PIN of an extension Required remotely and a verification code PIN PIN Lock is also unlocked 1 27 1 Extension Personal Identification Number PIN 1
351. sion That Placed a Trunk Call on Consultation Hold Calls from an extension that placed a trunk call on Consultation Hold can be treated by this feature as either intercom calls or trunk calls depending on system programming If treated as intercom calls the call will be established immediately When transferring a call from an analogue trunk users are strongly recommended to perform a screened transfer so that the outside caller is not automatically connected to an extension using Hands free Answerback when the extension user is absent Secret Monitor The beep tone that the called party hears before answering can be eliminated through system programming Alternate Receiving Calling Mode Ring Voice Override Hands free Answerback overrides the Alternate Receiving mode preset on the telephone and the Alternate Calling mode from the caller Hands free Answerback with Headset The Hands free Answerback feature can also be used with a headset PT Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 5 3 Intercom Call User Manual References 1 3 2 Answering Hands free Hands free Answerback Feature Guide 1 5 Making Call Features 1 5 Making Call Features 1 5 1 Predialling Description A display PT user can check and correct the entered number before it is dialled while on hook The call will be initiated after going off hook Conditions e Storing the Predialled Number in the Personal Speed Dial
352. sion user can dial the preprogrammed emergency numbers after seizing a trunk regardless of the restrictions imposed on the extension Conditions e A specified number of emergency numbers can be stored some may have default values e Emergency numbers may be called even when in Account Code Forced mode gt 1 5 4 3 Account Code Entry in any TRS Barring levels 1 8 1 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring after the preprogrammed call charge limit is reached 1 8 2 Budget Management in Extension Dial Lock 1 8 3 Extension Dial Lock e CLIP Number Notification KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only When dialling an emergency number the preassigned CLIP number for the extension will be sent as a location identification number gt 1 20 1 2 Calling Connected Line Identification Presentation CLIP COLP The SC number assigned to the extension will be sent regardless of the settings such as CLIR or CLIP number assigned to an ISDN port to be used This feature is only available when using a PRI PRI23 line with E911 compatible services PT Programming Manual References 304 Emergency Number Feature Guide References 3 1 Capacity of System Resources Feature Guide 83 1 5 Making Call Features 1 5 4 3 84 Account Code Entry Description An account code is used to identify outgoing trunk calls for accounting and billing purposes The account code is appended to the SMDR call record If for e
353. ssage e The SVM card does not answer calls that are forwarded using the Call Forwarding by QSIG feature 1 29 4 3 Call Forwarding CF by QSIG Installation Manual References 2 5 5 SVM2 Card PT Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 8 5 Walking COS 1 28 1 Dial Tone 3 1 Capacity of System Resources 3 2 Exclusive Features Table User Manual References 1 5 2 Using Voice Messaging Built in Simplified Voice Message SVM KX TDA30 only 3 1 2 Settings on the Programming Mode Feature Guide 183 1 16 Optional Device Features 1 16 9 External Sensor 184 Description External sensing devices such as security alarms or smoke detectors can be connected to the PBX When the PBX receives input from a sensor a call is made to the preset destination alerting the extension user The available destinations of a sensor call are as follows Available Destinations Destination Availability Wired Extension PT SLT ISDN Extension T1 OPX Vv PS A Incoming Call Distribution Group PS Ring Group Floating Extension no for SVM VM Group DTMF DPT External Pager TAFAS DISA Analogue ISDN Remote Maintenance Idle Line Access no Phone no Trunk Group Access no Trunk Group no Phone no Other PBX Extension TIE with no PBX Code Other PBX Extension TIE with PBX Code When the call is answered if distinctive dial ton
354. st numbered group has the highest priority When multiple groups disable the VIP Call mode queuing calls are distributed to extensions uniformly Example In the call centre incoming call distribution groups 1 and 3 enable the VIP Call mode while incoming call distribution groups 2 and 4 disable the VIP Call mode Calls have been distributed by DIL DID DDI CLI The number in the circle is the queuing order Incoming Call Incoming Call Incoming Call Incoming Call Distribution Distribution Distribution Distribution Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4 for VIP for general for special for general CO customers customers customers 3rd Priority 3rd do 2nd a Priority eon Extn Extn Extn 101 102 103 Distribution order 1 OO From Group 1 Group3 Groups 2 and 4 PT Programming Manual References None Feature Guide 57 1 2 Receiving Group Features 1 2 2 6 Overflow Feature Description When waiting calls exceed the waiting queue capacity they may be redirected to a preprogrammed destination or a busy tone may be sent to the callers by the following features 1 Intercept Routing Overflow in an Incoming Call Distribution Group 2 Busy on Busy 1 Intercept Routing Overflow in an Incoming Call Distribution Group Intercept Routing Overflow in an Incoming Call Distribution Group works in one of following conditions a There is no spac
355. sting call and hear a reorder tone SP PHONE Enables a hands free conversation A member extension can inform the caller that he wants to speak or join the conversation by sending a notification The caller will hear a notification tone and the requesting extension s information will be shown on the display for five seconds Conditions Hardware Requirement An EMEC or MEC card Only PTs that are permitted by COS programming can originate broadcasting calls Ring Duration A system timer is available to limit the call ring duration at the members When this limit is reached members telephones will stop ringing If no members have answered the call the caller will hear a busy tone The broadcasting call will reach a member extension regardless of settings such as Call Forwarding except DND If a member extension is busy and has Call Waiting for trunk calls activated when a broadcasting call is made a call waiting tone will be sent to the extension The call information of the caller not members will be recorded on SMDR A caller cannot make a broadcasting call with a call on hold Call Pickup is not available for a broadcasting call gt 1 4 1 3 Call Pickup The broadcasting call will not reach members when the member extension has set DND for intercom calls the member extension is a PS in Wireless XDP Parallel Mode 1 24 5 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode Installation Manual References KX TDA30 2 5 7
356. t code appended to the call gt 1 5 4 3 Account Account Code Code Entry 9 CD Condition Shows other call information with the following codes Code CL Collect call TR Transfer FW FWD to trunk DO Call using DISA or TIE line service RM Remote maintenance modem 2 3 1 PC Programming NA Not answered call RC Received call AN Answered call VR Received call with Call Waiting Caller ID Visual Caller ID VA Answered call with Call Waiting Caller ID Visual Caller ID 10 Cost Shows the call charge Programmable Items Hem Description Outgoing trunk call Controls whether the outgoing trunk calls are shown This setting is common throughout the PBX COS programming is also required 804 SMDR Outgoing Call Printing Incoming trunk call Controls whether the incoming trunk calls are shown 805 SMDR Incoming Call Printing Outgoing intercom call Controls whether the outgoing intercom calls are recorded Log in Log out status Controls whether the log in log out status is recorded ARS dial Controls whether the user dialled number or the modified number is shown The Host PBX Access code followed by the access code can be shown as supplementary information only when the modified number is selected in this setting gt 1 9 1 Automatic Route Selection ARS Caller s identification Controls whether the caller s identification number name number and
357. t in Small Call Centre Features An incoming call distribution group gt 1 2 2 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features can be used as a small call centre with the following features Queuing Feature When a preprogrammed number of extensions in an incoming call distribution group are busy additional incoming calls can wait in a queue While calls are waiting in the queue the calls are handled by the Queuing Time Table which can be assigned for each time mode day lunch break night gt 1 2 2 4 Queuing Feature Log in Log out Incoming call distribution group members can join Log in or leave Log out the groups manually While logged in a member extension can have a preprogrammed time period automatically for refusing calls after completing the last call Wrap up 1 2 2 7 Log in Log out VIP Call It is possible to assign a priority to incoming call distribution groups If an extension belongs to multiple groups and the extension becomes idle queuing calls in the groups will be distributed to the extension in priority order 1 2 2 5 VIP Call Computer Telephony Integration CTI Features Connecting a PC to a DPT or connecting a CTI Server to this PBX allows functions of the PC PBX and extension to be integrated so that for example detailed caller information can be taken from a database and displayed on the PC as a call arrives or the PC can dial numbers for the extension automatically gt 1 31 1 Computer Telephony In
358. table Stations 2 3 2 EMEC Card KX TDA6105 PT Programming Manual References 690 PS Registration 691 PS Termination 692 Personal Identification Number PIN for PS Registration Feature Guide References 2 3 6 Flexible Numbering Fixed Numbering 248 Feature Guide 1 24 Portable Station PS Features 1 24 2 PS Ring Group Description A PS ring group is a group of PS extensions that receives incoming calls Each group has a floating extension number and name One PS can belong to multiple groups Programming Example PS Ring Group 01 PS Ring Group 02 PS Ring Group 03 Floating Extn No 301 302 303 Group Name Sales 1 Sales 2 Sales 3 at A Called oe Caller s Name Number Caller s Name Number PS01 Vv PS02 v PS03 ve PS04 v v PS05 V PS06 V PS07 ke kW Constituent PS Ring Group 1 Floating Extn No 301 Name Sales 1 PS Ring Group 2 Floating Extn No 302 Name Sales 2 PS01 PS04 PS03 ee el PS05 PS06 Pas PS02 Conditions es PS Ring Group A maximum of 32 groups can be created Feature Guide 249 1 24 Portable Station PS Features e Available PS The KX TD7580 KX TCA155 KX TCA255 KX TD7680 and KX TD7690 can join PS ring groups e Incoming trunk call information is shown on a PS display when a trunk call arrives at a PS ring group which the PS joins The display information can be selected on a PS ring group basis
359. ted after all calls to or from the extension including a retrieved call on hold Only calls from ICD Groups cannot be received during the wrap up time Other calls are received as normal The wrap up timer does not work for ISDN extensions or PS Ring Groups es Wrap up Button A flexible button can be customised as the Wrap up button It shows the current status as follows Light pattern Status Slow red flashing Wrap up Red on Not Ready Off Ready Wrap up mode cancel e When a PS in Wireless XDP Parallel Mode completes a call neither the PS nor its wired telephone can have Wrap up time gt 1 24 5 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode e Automatic Log out A member extension may be logged out automatically if the Unanswered time expires a preprogrammed number of times consecutively The number of consecutive unanswered calls can be assigned for each incoming call distribution group If the extension is a member of more than one incoming call distribution group the unanswered number is counted across all corresponding incoming call distribution groups It is possible to return to log in mode manually The Automatic Log out feature does not work for extensions in an incoming call distribution group using the Ring distribution method 1 2 2 2 Group Call Distribution e Log in Log out Monitor The supervisor extension can monitor and control the log in log out status of the incoming call distribution group members
360. tegration CTI PC Phone PC Console Features This PBX supports PC Phone and PC Console These Panasonic CTI applications provide advanced features combining telephone and PC such as the ability to display detailed caller information including a photograph on the screen of the PC when a call is received or to dial a telephone number automatically just by selecting a name 1 31 2 PC Phone PC Console Feature Guide 5 Voice Mail Features This PBX supports Voice Processing Systems VPS with DTMF Integration as well as DPT Digital Integration attached locally and over a network 1 23 Voice Mail Features Parallelled Telephone Features By connecting telephones in parallel you can increase the number of telephones connected to the PBX without adding additional extension cards 1 10 9 Parallelled Telephone Parallel Mode An SLT can be connected to an APT or DPT that is connected to a Super Hybrid port of the PBX The SLT shares the same extension number with the APT or DPT EXtra Device Port XDP Mode An SLT can be connected to a DPT that is connected to a Super Hybrid port of the PBX Unlike parallel mode XDP mode allows each telephone to act as an independent extension with its own extension number Digital XDP A DPT can be connected to another DPT that is connected to a DPT port or a Super Hybrid port of the PBX Similar to XDP mode each DPT acts as an independent extension with its own extension number Portable St
361. tenance Idle Line Access no Phone no Trunk Group Access no Trunk Group no Phone no Other PBX Extension TIE with no PBX Code SIS SIS IS EQ IS IS IS ISS Ys Other PBX Extension TIE with PBX Code Conditions es Intercept Routing Busy DND on off Intercept Routing Busy and Intercept Routing DND can be enabled or disabled separately through system programming If disabled one of the following is activated depending on the trunk card type that a call arrives through a ELCOT LCOT or T1 LCOT GCOT Card The incoming trunk call will ring at the original destination while the caller hears a ringback tone b Other Trunk Cards A busy tone will be sent to the caller e Ifthe intercept destination cannot receive the call a Intercept Routing No Answer Intercept timer will restart at the original destination until the call is answered b Intercept Routing Busy DND The call will be sent back to the original destination when the call arrives through the ELCOT LCOT or T1 LCOT GCOT card When the call arrives through other trunk cards the caller will hear a busy tone e idle Extension Hunting If an extension is a member of an idle extension hunting group calls to that extension will not be redirected by Intercept Routing Busy DND If the extension is busy or in DND mode calls to that extension will be redirected to the next extension in the idle extension hunting group Feature G
362. tension 180 Feature Guide 1 16 Optional Device Features Message Notification If a new voice message has been left in a message box and distinctive dial tones are enabled the user will hear dial tone 4 when going off hook If a message box contains only voice messages that have previously been listened to dial tone 2 is heard instead In addition if the user s telephone has a Message button or Message Ringer Lamp the corresponding button or lamp will light when a voice message has been left Pressing the lit button while on hook shows the caller s information SVM Log When a caller leaves a voice message on an SVM card the following information is also recorded as available a Caller s Name b Caller s Telephone Number c Time recording started d Voice Message Status New is displayed for voice messages which have not previously been listened to Old is displayed for voice messages which have previously been listened to This information can be viewed with the display of a PT or PS Please note that the information shown on the display may vary depending on the information that was received and the type of telephone used Only users of a 6 line display PT can view all of the above information Checking Voice Messages Left by Callers When an extension user accesses his message box the most recent unplayed voice message is played first When one voice message finishes playing the next most recent voice
363. tension Number Method Access without PBX Code TIE Line Network i Ok Extn 4xxx Extn 3xxx b 2nd 3xxx If you dial TRG 2 4xxx a 2xxx b 3xxx E C 4xxx EEN ce E Bros 2 3 4 Other PBX Extn 1xxx S EE Extn 2xxx Extension Number PBX Ist Sxxx PBX TIE in the Flexible d Numbering Plan Caeira a ee TIE Line Routing and Modification Table of PBX 1 Priority 1 Priority 2 i i Dial Modification Dial Modification Location Leading No No TRG Removed TRG Removed No of Added No No of Added No Digits Digits 01 2 1 0 02 3 1 0 2 0 03 4 2 0 296 Feature Guide 1 29 Networking Features Explanation Location 01 The hunt sequence by dialling 2XXX The 1st route trunk group TRG 1 gt Sending no to PBX 2 2XXX Location 02 The hunt sequence by dialling BXXX The 1st route trunk group TRG 1 Sr Sending no to PBX 2 3XXX The 2nd route trunk group TRG 2 Sending no to PBX 4 3XXX Location 03 The hunt sequence by dialling 4XXX The 1st route trunk group TRG 2 gt Sending no to PBX 4 4XXX Feature Guide 297 1 29 Networking Features b PBX Code Method Access with PBX Code TIE Line Network PBX 3 PBX Code 953 PBX 4 PBX Code 954 If you dial a 7 952 xxxx b 7 953 xxxx c 7 954 xxxx 7 TIE Line Access Extn xxxx SS oe Extn 1xxx Number in the b 2nd
364. tercept Time DISA Built in Automated Attendant Number DISA AA Service After listening to the outgoing message OGM the caller may dial a single digit DISA AA number The destination for each DISA AA number can be assigned for each message It is also possible to assign other DISA floating extension numbers as the destination Multistep DISA AA Service If the caller dials a second digit within a preprogrammed time period DISA 2nd Dial Time for AA the DISA AA service is not employed Outgoing Message OGM When a call arrives on a DISA line a prerecorded DISA message will greet and guide the caller Any extension assigned as the manager can record outgoing messages OGMs gt 1 16 5 Outgoing Message OGM Programming Example Outgoing Floating Extn Automated Attendant No Busy DND Message No S S OGM No E o 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 essage No 01 501 100 301 200 103 202 101 102 400 104 205 04 02 502 05 1 730 Outgoing Message OGM Floating Extension Number DISA Security Mode and Available Features If the DISA AA service is not employed the caller may access the PBX features by entering the feature numbers To prevent others from accessing the PBX features it is possible to assign DISA security Feature Guide 169 1 16 Optional Device Features 732 DISA Security Mode The features available depend on the preprogra
365. th an outside party on the S CO button a PT PS user can allow another extension to join the conversation 1 13 1 3 Privacy Release Conditions e This PBX supports a maximum of 32 parties being engaged in simultaneous conference calls eg A eight party conferences 8 three party conferences 2 four party conferences 10 three party conferences 152 Feature Guide 1 13 Conference Features 1 13 1 2 Conference Description An extension user can establish a conference call by adding additional parties to an already existing two party conversation This PBX supports three party through eight party conference calls Conferences with more than four parties are only possible when a PT user originates the conference Unattended Conference The conference originator can leave the conference and allow other parties to continue Establishing an Unattended Conference allows the originator to return to the conference Unattended Conferences can only be established by PT users Conditions e When an extension is establishing a conference call the original party is put on hold e CONF Conference Button For a PT which does not have the CONF button a flexible button can be customised as the Conference button es Unattended Conference Call Duration The length of time that a conference call can remain unattended is restricted by the following timers Callback Start Timer Warning Tone Start Timer Discon
366. the PC or the CTI Server The features that are available through CTI depend on the CTI application software used on connected PCs There are two types of CTI as follows 1 First Party Call Control 2 Third Party Call Control 1 First Party Call Control A PC is connected to a DPT using a USB port USB Module attached to the DPT The PC monitors the status of the DPT and controls the DPT PBX USB DPT PC 2 Third Party Call Control A CTI Server is connected to the PBX using the USB port of the PBX or the LAN port of the CTI LINK card as a CTI interface PCs monitor the status of the PBX and control the PBX via the CTI Server When a call is received the CTI Server can be used to decide call routing and to send information about the call to the destination extension user s PC So for example if the call is from a customer that customer s account information can be shown automatically on the screen of the PC at the same time as the call is received depending on the CTI software used In Third Party Call Control the PC does not control extensions directly Feature Guide 333 1 31 Computer Telephony Integration CTI Features PBX CTI Server CTl Interface LAN Conditions General e Capable telephone DPT KX T7600 series PT USB module IP PT e CTlapplication software must be installed on the connected PC In addition some features may require a KX TDA6920 KX TDA0920 or KX TDA3920 SD Memory Card for
367. the external pagers this can be turned on and off by an extension assigned as the manager Conditions BGM e Hardware requirement A user supplied external music source such as a radio e The music through the PT is interrupted when going off hook e KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 only Each user can set cancel BGM and also select the music source e KX TDA30 only Each user can only set cancel BGM the user cannot make a music selection BGM External e Hardware requirement A user supplied external pager e External pagers can be used with the following priorities TAFAS Paging BGM gt 1 14 1 Paging 1 16 3 Trunk Answer From Any Station TAFAS Installation Manual References KX TDA30 2 10 1 Connection of Peripherals KX TDA100 KX TDA200 2 11 1 Connection of Peripherals KX TDA600 2 13 1 Connection of Peripherals PT Programming Manual References None User Manual References 1 7 8 Turning on the Background Music BGM 2 1 4 Turning on the External Background Music BGM Feature Guide 165 1 16 Optional Device Features 1 16 5 Outgoing Message OGM 166 Description An extension assigned as the manager manager extension can record outgoing messages OGMs for the following features Feature Usage amp Reference Direct Inward System Access When a call arrives on a DISA line the caller will hear a message DISA 1 16 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA Q
368. the preset parking zone as follows Light pattern Status Slow red flashing Parked in the preset parking zone Off No parked call Call Park Automatic Park Zone Button Pressing the Call Park Automatic Park Zone button parks a call in an idle parking zone automatically A flexible button can be customised as the Call Park Automatic Park Zone button Call Park Retrieve Deny If an extension user cannot call certain extensions on a COS basis 1 1 2 2 Internal Call Block he cannot retrieve the parked call which the extensions made PT Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 19 2 Flexible Buttons 3 1 Capacity of System Resources User Manual References 1 4 2 Holding a Call 148 Feature Guide 1 12 Holding Features 1 12 3 Call Splitting Description During a conversation an extension user can call another extension while putting the original party on Consultation Hold The extension user can then alternate between the two parties and or connect the original party with the third party Conditions e Consultation Hold a condition that a party is in when an extension is calling other parties in order to perform Call Transfer Conference or Call Splitting In Consultation Hold the original call is treated as if it is on hold allowing the extension to call a third party all on one line In Call Hold the party on hold and the third party are connected to the extension
369. thod for a trunk port e MSN Modification It is possible to modify a received MSN to make it shorter which may be convenient when programming the MSN table The modification method removed number of digits added number can be programmed on a trunk port basis Modification Example Removed number of digits 6 Modified MSN 876543 21 1021 Added number 10 J A Received MSN 87654321 gt TEE 6 digits e When using point to multipoint configuration with a BRI do not connect another ISDN terminal device in parallel with the PBX As only two channels can be used at one time with the BRI the other ISDN terminal device may monopolise both channels 26 Feature Guide 1 1 Incoming Call Features PT Programming Manual References 421 BRI DIL DDI MSN Selection 426 BRI Configuration Feature Guide References 1 1 1 5 Calling Line Identification CLI Distribution 2 2 3 Tenant Service 2 2 4 Time Service 3 1 Capacity of System Resources Feature Guide 27 1 1 Incoming Call Features 1 1 1 5 28 Description Calling Line Identification CLI Distribution Directs an incoming trunk call to a preprogrammed destination when the caller s identification number eg Caller ID matches the number in the System Speed Dialling Table that is used as the Caller ID Table Each Caller ID number telephone number for each System Speed Dialling number can have its own destination CLI Feature Description
370. through system programming Called Party s Name Number or Caller s Name Number e Calling Multiple PSs Simultaneously There are two methods to call multiple PSs simultaneously using the floating extension number assigned to the following groups Method Assignment Merit Demerit Incoming Call Assign all desired PSs to All PS users in the The CS may often Distribution Group one incoming call group can use the be busy as each PS distribution group and set Log in Log out in the group uses the group call distribution feature Wrap up one channel when a method for the group to feature and ICD call arrives at the Ring Group button for the group group gt 1 2 2 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features PS Ring Group Assign all desired PSs to Only one channel is PS users in the one PS ring group used when a call group cannot use arrives at the group the Log in Log out and Wrap up features e When a PS joins a PS ring group the following personal settings are disregarded a When the PS ring group is called Delayed Ringing Display information when the incoming calls arrive The settings e g display priority are disregarded The setting which is assigned on the PS e g FWD The status of the PS e g busy b Log in log out setting from the PS ring group from the incoming call distribution group which the PS ring group belongs to gt 1 2 2 7 Log in Log out Note 250
371. through system programming Feature Guide 359 2 3 System Data Control 360 Installation Manual References KX TDA30 2 5 8 RMT Card 3 1 Overview 3 2 Connection 3 3 Installation of the KX TDA30 Maintenance Console KX TDA100 KX TDA200 2 3 1 MPR Card 2 3 3 RMT Card KX TDA0196 2 6 7 CTI LINK Card KX TDA0410 3 1 Overview 3 2 Connection 3 3 Installation of the KX TDA Maintenance Console KX TDA600 2 3 1 EMPR Card 2 3 3 RMT Card KX TDA0196 2 8 7 CTI LINK Card KX TDA0410 3 1 Overview 3 2 Connection 3 3 Installation of the KX TDA600 Maintenance Console PT Programming Manual References 801 External Modem Control 810 Remote Programming 811 Modem Floating Extension Number 812 ISDN Remote Floating Extension Number Feature Guide References 1 1 1 2 Direct In Line DIL 1 1 1 3 Direct Inward Dialling DID Direct Dialling In DDI 1 1 1 4 Multiple Subscriber Number MSN Ringing Service Feature Guide 2 3 System Data Control 2 3 2 PT Programming Description A PT user can perform the following programming a Personal Programming Customising the extension according to his needs b System Programming Customising the PBX according to organisational needs c Manager Programming Customising specified frequently changing items e g Charge Management and Remote Extension Dial Lock Conditions COS programming determines what programming can be performed System progra
372. tification Presentation CLIP COLP 1 7 5 Preventing Your Telephone Number Being Displayed on the Caller s Telephone Connected Line Identification Restriction COLR 1 7 6 Preventing Your Number Being Displayed on the Called Party s Telephone Calling Line Identification Restriction CLIR 314 Feature Guide 1 29 Networking Features 1 29 4 3 Call Forwarding CF by QSIG Description The PBX forwards the call to a destination extension in another PBX in QSIG network The destination can be set on your own PBX on an extension basis as the forward destination of trunk calls gt 1 3 1 2 Call Forwarding FWD If the same trunk group is used for the incoming call and the forwarded call the following situation will be possible Example QSIG Extension 1000 of PBX 1 dials extension EEGENEN number 2000 and the call is sent to extension 2000 of PBX 2 through QSIG network ee len e zm vm e zm zm em e om rm em zm mm rm mm vm em mm de vm em ml The call is forwarded to the forward destination of trunk calls of extension 2000 which is extension 1001 of PBX Forwarded to 1001 1 IS E The call between PBX 1 and PBX 2 is Extn 1000 Extn 1001 Extn 2000 released and the call is connected Forward Destination directly to the forward destination of Dials 2000 of Trunk Calls 1001 l extension 2000 Litas pose nce Roe AAA AAA MRA eee eee eee AA RA eee eee AA Vebwe ciate
373. tion TRS Call Barring Barring so that other users cannot make inappropriate trunk calls An extension personal identification number PIN is used to unlock the telephone 1 27 1 Extension Personal Identification Number PIN This feature is also known as Electronic Station Lockout Conditions e This feature also restricts changing the FWD destination gt 1 3 1 2 Call Forwarding FWD es Remote Extension Dial Lock Overrides Extension Dial Lock If an extension assigned as the manager sets Remote Extension Dial Lock on an extension that has already been locked by the extension user the user cannot unlock it If a manager extension unlocks an extension that has been locked by the extension user the extension will be unlocked This feature is also known as Remote Station Lock Control e TRS Barring Level COS programming determines the TRS Barring level for Extension Dial Lock PT Programming Manual References 510 TRS Barring Level for Extension Dial Lock Feature Guide References 2 2 1 Class of Service COS User Manual References 1 5 4 Preventing Other People from Using Your Telephone Extension Dial Lock 2 1 1 Extension Control 120 Feature Guide 1 8 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring Features 1 8 4 Dial Tone Transfer Description An extension assigned as the manager can change the TRS Barring level 1 8 1 Toll Restriction TRS Call Barring Barring for an extension user temporarily
374. tion extension 100 Conditions e To use this feature DID DDI service must be assigned as the distribution method for a trunk port e DID DDI Number Modification It is possible to modify a received DID DDI number which may be convenient when programming the DID DDI table The modification method removed number of digits added number can be programmed on a trunk port basis Modification Example Removed number of digits 6 Modified DID DDI number 876543 21 1021 Added number 10 A Received DID DDI number 87654321 Een 1 Remove the 2 Add 10 l first 6 digits Feature Guide 23 1 1 Incoming Call Features 24 es inter digit Time When the Inter digit time expires the PBX stops receiving the DID DDI number and starts to check the DID DDI table Refer to the Programming Example of DID DDI Table above Even if the Inter digit time does not expire the PBX stops receiving the DID DDI number when the received number is found in the DID DDI table The PBX then routes the call to the corresponding destination If the received number matches several entries in the table the call is directed to the destination of the first matching entry Example If a call is received in Lunch mode Received Number Destination Explanation 123 4567 Extn 100 The PBX finds the match in location 0001 in the table after receiving 7 So the call is routed to extension 100 123 456 Extn 101 The Int
375. tn 1011 PBX 1 PBX 2 953 The call is received at Dials 7 953 1011 1 ee EE extension 1011 of PBX 3 Note When a TIE line call is sent to a PBX from another PBX first the PBX modifies the number sent to the PBX according to the assignment for each trunk port of the PBX the removed number of digits from and or added number to the number sent to the PBX is determined by the assignment Then the PBX starts to check the number whether the number has the PBX code of the PBX Feature Guide 301 1 29 Networking Features 4 TIE Line Routing Flowchart Making a TIE Line Call from an Extension A TIE line call is made as follows PBX Code Method 7 abc xxxx Extension No Method dexx Is the dialled number identified as a TIE line access no or an other PBX extension no in the flexible numbering plan of the own PBX Not treated as a TIE line call Yes TIE line access no 7 Other PBX extension no de Is the leading number abc or de found in the TIE Line Routing and Modification Table of the own PBX No Reorder tone Selects the corresponding trunk group and the dialled number is modified if a removed number of digits and or added number is assigned Is the trunk group available Reorder tone Is there an idle trunk in the trunk group Busy tone Yes Routes to other PBX or trunk 302 Feature G
376. to interrupt an existing call to establish a three party conference call Executive Busy Override Deny It is possible for extension users to prevent their calls from being intercepted by another extension user Conditions e COS programming determines the extension users who can use Executive Busy Override and set Executive Busy Override Deny e This feature does not work when the busy extension is in one of the following conditions a Executive Busy Override Deny or Data Line Security 1 10 5 Data Line Security has been set b While being monitored by another extension 1 7 3 Call Monitor c While receiving OHCA gt 1 7 4 3 Off hook Call Announcement OHCA or Whisper OHCA gt 1 7 4 4 Whisper OHCA d During a Conference call gt 1 13 1 Conference Features e During a doorphone call gt 1 16 1 Doorphone Call f While Live Call Screening LCS or Two way Record is activated 1 23 3 Voice Mail DPT Digital Integration g During Consultation Hold e This feature is not available for a trunk to trunk call via DISA PT Programming Manual References 505 Executive Busy Override 506 Executive Busy Override Deny Feature Guide References 2 2 1 Class of Service COS User Manual References 1 2 4 When the Dialled Line is Busy or There is No Answer 1 7 7 Preventing Other People from Joining Your Conversation Executive Busy Override Deny Feature Guide 107 1 7 Busy Line Busy Party Features
377. to use a feature Example Call Pickup feature number Pattern 1 with x x41 Pattern 2 without x 41 For default of the flexible numbers refer to the Flexible Numbering Table available while a dial tone is heard 2 3 6 Flexible Numbering Fixed Numbering Extension Number From 101 from 201 for KX TDA30 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 or from 1001 from 2001 for KX TDA600 Determines the number from which default extension numbers begin Operator 0 9 The feature number for Operator Call can be selected Local Access 0 1 9 The feature number for Idle Line Access can be selected Remote Maintenance Number Remote Maintenance Dial Number Enter the complete telephone number of the PBX including the country code When necessary this number will be used to access the PBX from a remote location for maintenance purposes Note that the programmable items may vary depending on the version of KX TDA Maintenance Console being used Feature Guide 365 2 3 System Data Control 2 3 5 Automatic Setup Description There are two automatic setup features as follows 1 Automatic ISDN Configuration 2 Automatic Time Adjustment 1 Automatic ISDN Configuration The ISDN BRI port configuration can be set automatically through system programming The following items will be set by making and receiving a call using the subscriber number assigned for each ISDN BRI port a L1 Active Mo
378. ts e Additional number up to two digits default two digits b Feature Numbers A number of up to four digits consisting of 0 through 9 X and c Other PBX Extension Numbers Other PBX Extension Number TIE 1 through 16 A number of up to three digits consisting of O through 9 X and Flexible Numbering Table available while a dial tone is heard Feature Default Pattern 1 Pattern 2 with without KX TDA30 KX KX TDA600 TDA100 KX TDA200 Extension Numbering Scheme 1 Leading 1 2 10 20 10 Number Extension Numbering Scheme 2 Leading 2 3 11 21 11 Number Extension Numbering Scheme 3 Leading 3 4 12 22 12 Number Feature Guide 2 3 System Data Control Feature Default Pattern 1 Pattern 2 with without KX TDA30 KX KX TDA600 TDA100 KX TDA200 Extension Numbering Scheme 4 Leading 4 None 13 23 13 Number Extension Numbering Scheme 5 Leading None 14 24 14 Number Extension Numbering Scheme 6 Leading None 15 25 15 Number Extension Numbering Scheme 7 Leading None 16 26 16 Number Extension Numbering Scheme 8 Leading None 17 27 17 Number Extension Numbering Scheme 9 Leading None 18 28 18 Number Extension Numbering Scheme 10 None 19 29 None Leading Number Extension Numbering Scheme 11 None 20 30 20 Leading Number Extension Numbering Scheme 12 None 21 31 21 Le
379. tside party the call will be transferred to the outside party gt 1 3 1 2 Call Forwarding FWD COS programming determines the extensions that are able to transfer a call to an outside party COS can also prohibit transferring to an extension of another PBX via the TIE line service using the PBX Code method Access with PBX Code 1 29 1 TIE Line Service Transfer Recall for Call Transfer without Announcement If the transfer destination does not answer within the preprogrammed Transfer Recall time the call will be redirected to the Transfer Recall destination assigned to the extension which transferred the call If the destination is not assigned the call will return to the extension Available destination Destination Availability Wired Extension PT SLT ISDN Extension T1 OPX Vv PS w Incoming Call Distribution Group Vv PS Ring Group Floating Extension no for SVM Feature Guide 1 11 Transferring Features Destination Availability VM Group DTMF DPT External Pager TAFAS DISA Analogue ISDN Remote Maintenance Idle Line Access no Phone no Trunk Group Access no Trunk Group no Phone no Other PBX Extension TIE with no PBX Code Other PBX Extension TIE with PBX Code e One touch Transfer One touch Transfer can be performed by pressing a One touch Dialling button that has been assigned the TRANSFER command and the teleph
380. tton Usage ANSWER 4 Used to answer an incoming call or place the current call on Kaz hold and answer another call with one touch RELEASE A Used to disconnect the line during or after a conversation or M to complete a Call Transfer Feature Guide 1 19 Proprietary Telephone PT Features Button Usage Used to make or receive a trunk call or can be reassigned to a different trunk or to another feature button Flexible CO Trunk Used to access an extension with one touch Every button is Flexible DSS Direct Station Selection programmed to correspond to an extension DSS buttons can also be reassigned to other features PF Programmable Feature adi access a preprogrammed feature with one touch no Conditions e Certain buttons are equipped with a light to show line or feature status Feature Guide 201 1 19 Proprietary Telephone PT Features 1 19 2 Flexible Buttons 202 Description Flexible buttons are customised by either system or personal programming The following types of flexible buttons are provided on PTs DSS Consoles Add on Key Modules and or PSs a Flexible CO buttons b Flexible Direct Station Selection DSS buttons c Programmable Feature PF buttons Button Usage Button Usage Single CO S CO Used to access a specified trunk for making or receiving calls Group CO G CO Used to access an idle trunk in a specified trun
381. ture In this table the Routing Plan refer to 4 Routing Plan Table Assignment is selected for each number The additional remain number of digits must be assigned only when for example is needed after a dialled number The is added after the assigned number of digits of dialled number excluding a leading number 321 ARS Leading Number 322 ARS Routing Plan Table Number ARS Leading Number Table Location Leading Additional Remain Routing Plan No No No of Digits Table No oo 7 n 0002 03 4 0003 5 If a dialled number matches a leading number the number will be modified according to the corresponding Routing Plan Table and the modified number will be sent to the trunk when the assigned additional remain number of digits are dialled If a dialled number matches multiple leading number entries the leading number entry with the lowest numbered location will have priority Feature Guide 127 1 9 Automatic Route Selection ARS Features Example Corresponding Dialga Number Routing Plan Table No Description 039 123 4567 1 039 is found in location 0001 and seven digits assigned additional remain number of digits in location 0001 were dialled The Routing Plan Table 1 is selected just after the seventh digit 039 654 321 1 039 is found in location 0001 and the Inter digit time expired before the seventh digit is received The Routing Plan Table
382. ture Description amp Reference Intercom Call A call from one extension to another 1 5 3 Intercom Call Doorphone Call When a call from a doorphone reaches its destination the recipient can talk to the visitor 1 16 1 Doorphone Call Available Destination The destinations of doorphone calls can be assigned for each time mode day lunch break night 2 2 4 Time Service on a doorphone port basis Calling from Destination Extension Doorphone Wired Extension PT SLT ISDN Extension T1 OPX Vv Vv PS Y Y Incoming Call Distribution Group Y Vv PS Ring Group Y Vv Floating Extension no for SVM VM Group DTMF DPT vi External Pager TAFAS Vv Vv DISA Analogue ISDN Remote Maintenance Vv Idle Line Access no Phone no Vv Vv Trunk Group Access no Trunk Group no Phone no Vv Vv Other PBX Extension TIE with no PBX Code Vv Y Other PBX Extension TIE with PBX Code Vv Vv v Available 34 Feature Guide 1 1 Incoming Call Features PT Programming Manual References 720 Doorphone Call Destination Feature Guide 35 1 1 Incoming Call Features 1 1 2 2 Internal Call Block Description Internal calls can be restricted on a COS basis This is done by specifying which COS destinations are blocked for each COS Programming Example Called Party Caller CoS 1 COS 2 COS 3 COS 1 COS 2 Vv Vv
383. tus The forwarding type and destination for trunk calls can also be set FWD DND for intercom calls The FWD DND status for intercom calls to that extension can be switched temporarily without clearing the FWD destination During setting the LED of the button shows the current intercom call FWD DND status The forwarding type and destination for intercom calls can also be set FWD No Answer timer The length of time until unanswered calls are forwarded can be modified This setting is applied to both intercom and trunk call forwarding FWD for Virtual PS If the extension is the first registered extension in an Incoming Call Distribution Group the extension user can set the FWD destination and forwarding status on off for up to 4 virtual PSs preregistered to the group 1 24 6 Virtual PS These settings are only available when FWD DND buttons are set through system programming to FWD DND Setting mode Conditions e When FWD DND buttons are set to FWD DND Cycle Switch mode pressing the FWD DND button cycles the FWD DND setting In this mode when intercom calls are set to be handled differently from trunk calls forwarding type forward destination DND on off a b c in idle mode the light patterns of the FWD DND Both button including FWD DND button fixed button and the Group FWD Both button will indicate the setting for either trunk calls or intercom calls but not both the FWD and DND icons on a PS display re
384. ty Wired Extension PT SLT ISDN Extension T1 OPX Vv PS Vv Incoming Call Distribution Group PS Ring Group Floating Extension no for SVM VM Group DTMF DPT External Pager TAFAS DISA Analogue ISDN Remote Maintenance Idle Line Access no Phone no Trunk Group Access no Trunk Group no Phone no Other PBX Extension TIE with no PBX Code Other PBX Extension TIE with PBX Code Only available when the networking type of the trunk is assigned as private Conference Call The caller can allow members to speak and can control the conversation using the following buttons Pressing the other buttons during the conversation will be ignored Button Function DSS Establishes a conversation with the corresponding member extension or remove the extension from the conversation 158 Feature Guide 1 15 Broadcasting Features Button Function CONF Conference Establishes a conversation with the current members in the order assigned in the broadcasting group Pressing this button again will add the next available member in the group to the conversation TRANSFER Removes the member who joined the conversation last The member can still listen to the announcement FLASH RECALL Flash Recall Removes the member who joined the conversation last The member mode will be disconnected from the broadca
385. uests are given extension personal identification numbers PINs it is possible for calls made from other extensions e g an extension in a hotel restaurant to be charged to the guest s room extension by using the Walking COS feature 1 8 5 Walking COS Conditions e Hardware Requirement An EMEC or MEC card e Ifthe total number of call records exceeds 90 of available memory call records from the extension with the largest number of records will be automatically printed out and the records printed out will be combined in memory into one aggregate record to save space PT Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 6 1 4 Last Number Redial 1 8 3 Extension Dial Lock 1 25 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR 1 27 4 Timed Reminder 3 1 Capacity of System Resources User Manual References 1 10 1 Using the Telephones in a Hotel type Environment Hospitality Features Feature Guide 1 27 Extension Controlling Features 1 27 Extension Controlling Features 1 27 1 Extension Personal Identification Number PIN Description Each extension user can have his own PIN through system programming or personal programming Extension PIN Personal Identification Number to set features or access his own telephone remotely The following features cannot be used without the PIN a Live Call Screening LCS 1 23 3 Voice Mail DPT Digital Integration b Display Lock gt 1 6 1 5 Speed Dialling
386. ueuing Feature If assigned in the Queuing Time Table of the incoming call distribution group any caller who is waiting in a queue will hear a message 1 2 2 4 Queuing Feature Timed Reminder When answering the Timed Reminder Alarm the user will hear a message 1 27 4 Timed Reminder Conditions Hardware Requirement KX TDA30 The MSG card KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 The OPB card and MSG card Number of Messages and Recording Time A maximum of 64 with the KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 or 32 with the KX TDA30 messages can be recorded The total recording time in the PBX is eight minutes A floating extension number is assigned to each outgoing message OGM default 5 two digit OGM number One MSG card allows four with the KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 or two with the KX TDA30 messages to play simultaneously The MSG card expansion does not increase the total recording time or the number of messages It increases the number of messages that can be played simultaneously Example Up to 4 with the KX Up to 8 with the KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 or 2 with the TDA600 or 4 with the KX TDA30 messages can KX TDA30 messages can be played simultaneously be played simultaneously to callers to callers K V PBX PBX MSG MSG MSG Card Card Card Total message recording time Total message recording time 8 minutes max 8 minutes max F
387. uide 1 29 Networking Features Receiving a Call through a TIE Line lt Extension Number Method lt PBX Code Method Access without PBX Code gt Access with PBX Code gt A call is received through a A Call is received through a TIE line as follows TIE line as follows 1021 0511033 The received number is modified as The received number is modified as programmed for each trunk port programmed for each trunk port Removed number of digits 1 Removed number of digits 3 Added number None Added number 9 Received number 1021 Received number 0511033 A L Modified number A 1021 1021 Modified number 6511033 9511033 l l Remove the first 1 digit 1 Remove the first 3 digits 2 Ada 9 Does the modified number have the own PBX code 951 Yes 9511033 Goes to A Removes the own PBX is in the code 951 flowchart of Making a TIE Line Call from an Extension 1021 1033 Checks the modified number with the flexible numbering plan of the own PBX Operator Call No Extension No Extension No Idle Line Others of the Own PBX of Other PBX Access No Directs the call Goes to or to the operator Trunk Group CH is in the flowchart of Access No Making a TIE Line Call from an Extension Does the corresponding extension exist Is the trunk group o
388. uide 31 1 1 Incoming Call Features PT Programming Manual References 203 Intercept Time 470 Trunk Group Intercept Destination 604 Extension Intercept Destination 625 Destination for Overflow Time Expiration Feature Guide References 1 3 1 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND 32 Feature Guide 1 1 Incoming Call Features 1 1 1 7 Intercept Routing No Destination Description Provides automatic redirection of incoming trunk calls that do not have a destination assigned The intercept destination is an operator tenant PBX Conditions e Intercept Routing No Destination on off The Intercept Routing No Destination feature can be enabled or disabled through system programming If disabled a reorder tone will be sent to the caller However the Intercept Routing No Destination feature always functions for calls through the ELCOT LCOT or T1 LCOT GCOT card even when disabled e If an operator tenant PBX is not assigned The extension connected to the lowest numbered jack will be the intercept destination e Intercept Routing No Destination also applies to calls from doorphones PT Programming Manual References 006 Operator Assignment Feature Guide References 2 2 5 Operator Features Feature Guide 33 1 1 Incoming Call Features 1 1 2 Internal Call Features 1 1 2 1 Internal Call Features SUMMARY Description The following types of internal calls are available Fea
389. ure Guide References 1 1 1 3 Direct Inward Dialling DID Direct Dialling In DDI 1 1 1 4 Multiple Subscriber Number MSN Ringing Service 1 2 2 7 Log in Log out 1 5 4 8 Host PBX Access Code Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX 1 11 1 Call Transfer 1 16 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA 1 29 1 TIE Line Service 2 2 1 Class of Service COS 3 1 Capacity of System Resources Feature Guide 265 1 25 Administrative Information Features 1 25 2 Printing Message Description An extension user can select a message to be output on SMDR Up to eight messages can be preprogrammed in the Printing Message table and are available to all extensions connected to the PBX A message can contain the symbol which requires a number to be entered in its place when the message is selected at an extension Depending on the content of the preprogrammed messages this feature can be used to record a variety of information which can be output on SMDR to for example a connected PC Example If message 1 is preprogrammed as Started work and message 2 as Finished work employees can sign in by selecting message 1 when starting work and sign out by selecting message 2 when finishing A connected PC can then be used to generate employee work records Conditions e Up to seven s can be stored for each message PT Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1 25 1 Station Message Detail Re
390. use is not permitted by COS or the port is not in service a reorder tone will be heard at the extension Conditions e Hardware Requirement KX TDA30 An external relay device and DPH card KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 An external relay device OPB card and EIO card e KX TDA30 only The port of the DPH4 card to which the relay is connected must be assigned through system programming as a relay port not a door opener port e Some devices may be unable to communicate correctly with the PBX Confirm compatibility with the manufacturer of a device before installing it e Each external relay port has a COS assigned This and the COS of an extension determine the extension users who can use External Relay Control e The length of time that a relay is turned on can be specified separately for each relay through system programming e Ifthe same or another extension tries to access an external relay that has already been switched on the timer for that relay is reset Installation Manual References KX TDA30 2 5 1 DPH4 Card 2 5 2 DPH2 Card 2 9 1 Connection of Doorphones Door Openers External Sensors and External Relays KX TDA100 KX TDA200 2 6 1 OPB3 Card KX TDA0190 2 6 4 E104 Card KX TDA0164 2 10 1 Connection of Doorphones Door Openers External Sensors and External Relays KX TDA600 2 8 1 OPB3 Card KX TDA0190 2 8 4 ElO4 Card KX TDA0164 2 12 1 Connection of Doorphones Door Openers External Sensors and External Rel
391. vailable for Idle Line Access should be assigned PT Programming Manual References 103 Idle Line Access Local Access 500 Trunk Group Number User Manual References 3 1 2 Settings on the Programming Mode Feature Guide 93 1 5 Making Call Features 1 5 5 3 94 Description Trunk Access The following methods can be used to access a trunk Method Description Accessing method Idle Line Access Local Access Selects an idle trunk automatically from the assigned trunk groups Dial the Idle Line Access number or press a L CO button Trunk Group Access Selects an idle trunk from the corresponding trunk group Dial the Trunk Group Access number and a trunk group number or press a G CO button S CO Line Access Selects the desired trunk directly Dial the S CO Line Access number and the trunk number or press the S CO button Conditions e COS programming determines the trunk groups available for making calls e Trunk numbers can be referred on a trunk port basis es Button Assignment A flexible button can be customised as a G CO L CO or S CO button as follows Type Parameter Loop CO L CO programming are applied No parameter all assigned trunk groups through system Group CO G CO A specified trunk group Single CO S CO A specified trunk It is possible to assign the same trunk to the S CO button
392. ved Alternate Receiving Voice 1 5 3 Intercom Call Hands free Answerback 1 4 1 4 Hands free Answerback Consultation Hold Call Hold gt 1 12 1 Call Hold Call Transfer gt 1 11 1 Call Transfer Executive Busy Override 1 7 2 Executive Busy Override e Sensor call information is output on SMDR Installation Manual References KX TDA30 2 5 1 DPH4 Card 2 5 2 DPH2 Card 2 9 1 Connection of Doorphones Door Openers External Sensors and External Relays KX TDA100 KX TDA200 2 6 1 OPB3 Card KX TDA0190 2 6 4 ElO4 Card KX TDA0164 2 10 1 Connection of Doorphones Door Openers External Sensors and External Relays KX TDA600 2 8 1 OPB3 Card KX TDA0190 2 8 4 ElO4 Card KX TDA0164 2 12 1 Connection of Doorphones Door Openers External Sensors and External Relays PT Programming Manual References None Feature Guide 185 1 16 Optional Device Features 1 16 10 External Relay Control 186 Description By turning external device relays on and off the PBX can control external devices such as alarms When an extension user enters the External Relay Control feature number the specified relay turns on for a preprogrammed length of time When this timer expires the relay turns off automatically This gives the PBX simple control over other equipment allowing an extension user to for example activate an alarm from his extension If the relay cannot be accessed for example because
393. ving on DISA lines and automatically transfer fax calls to preprogrammed destinations When a call arrives on a DISA line an OGM is played gt 1 16 5 Outgoing Message OGM At the same time the PBX begins fax signal detection If a fax signal is detected the PBX recognises that the call is a fax call and transfers the call to the fax destination assigned to that OGM through system programming This allows a single trunk to be used seamlessly for both voice and fax calls with only voice calls arriving at user extensions This feature is only available for the KX TDA30O Available Automatic Fax Transfer Destinations Destination Availability Wired Extension Vv PS v Incoming Call Distribution Group Vv PS Ring Group Floating Extension no for SVM VM Group DTMF DPT External Pager TAFAS DISA Analogue ISDN Remote Maintenance Idle Line Access no Phone no Trunk Group Access no Trunk Group no Phone no Other PBX Extension TIE with no PBX Code Other PBX Extension TIE with PBX Code A PS destination can be used to forward fax calls to a fax machine at another PBX connected by TIE line A virtual PS can be specified as the destination of fax calls Then the extension number of the fax machine at the other PBX can be specified as the FWD ALL Calls destination for calls to that virtual PS gt 1 24 6 Virtual PS Conditions e Hardware Requirement An
394. wer Time Feature Guide References 1 1 1 6 Intercept Routing 1 2 1 Idle Extension Hunting 1 2 2 6 Overflow Feature 2 2 1 Class of Service COS User Manual References 1 5 1 Forwarding Calls Feature Guide 69 1 3 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND Features 1 3 1 3 70 Do Not Disturb DND Description An extension user can make use of the DND feature If this feature is set calls will not arrive at the extension but will arrive at another extension using the Idle Extension Hunting feature 1 2 1 Idle Extension Hunting or the Intercept Routing Busy DND feature 1 1 1 6 Intercept Routing When a destination cannot be found the calling extension will hear the DND tone while the calling outside party will hear a busy tone Conditions DND for Trunk Calls Intercom Calls The DND feature can be set for trunk calls for intercom calls or for both of them by the extension user DSS button in DND Mode The DSS button light will turn red if the assigned extension has set DND DND Override An extension in DND mode can be called by other extension users who are allowed to override DND in their COS Paging DND It is programmable whether the PBX pages extensions in DND mode through system programming gt 1 14 1 Paging Intercept Routing Busy DND If a call arrives at an extension in DND mode the call can be redirected to a preprogrammed destination by the Intercept Routing Busy DND feature Idle Ext
395. wo way Transfer button Voice Mail VM Transfer button PT Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2 2 1 Class of Service COS User Manual References 1 2 4 When the Dialled Line is Busy or There is No Answer 108 Feature Guide 1 7 Busy Line Busy Party Features 1 7 4 Second Call Notification to Busy Extension 1 7 4 1 Second Call Notification to Busy Extension SUMMARY Description When attempting to call a busy extension ringing or having a conversation an extension user can send a Call Waiting indication to the busy extension Call Waiting The notification receiving method depends on the called extension s personal setting and the telephone type Notification Receiving Method Description amp Reference Call Waiting Tone Sends the Call Waiting tone to the busy extension gt 1 7 4 2 Call Waiting Tone Off hook Call Announcement Talk with the busy extension using the built in speaker and microphone OHCA of the called extension while the existing call is made using the handset 1 7 4 3 Off hook Call Announcement OHCA Whisper OHCA Send a spoken message to a busy extension that will be heard directly by only the called extension user through the handset without interrupting the ongoing conversation 1 7 4 4 Whisper OHCA Conditions e Each extension user can choose to receive Call Waiting tone OHCA Whisper OHCA or none of these e OHCA and Whis
396. works only on trunks set to Pulse mode DTMF mode cannot be changed to Pulse mode e Itis possible to select the pulse rate for a trunk port that has been set to Pulse mode There are two pulse rates Low 10 pps and High 20 pps e Itis possible to assign the minimum duration of the DTMF signal sent to a trunk port that has been set to DTMF mode PT Programming Manual References 410 LCOT Dialling Mode 411 LCOT Pulse Rate 412 LCOT DTMF Minimum Duration Feature Guide 85 1 5 Making Call Features 1 5 4 5 Reverse Circuit Description A circuit in the PBX can detect the reverse signal from the telephone company when an extension user tries to make a trunk call This detects the start a called party goes off hook and end the called party goes on hook of an outgoing trunk call When a trunk call is received the circuit can also detect the reverse signal after an outside caller goes on hook If Reverse Circuit Detection is disabled the total duration of the call is not accurately recognised by the PBX The duration of a call can be verified on SMDR using this feature gt 1 25 1 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR It is possible to select whether the PBX detects the reverse signal for outgoing trunk calls only or for both outgoing and incoming trunk calls or for no trunk calls detection disabled through system programming Conditions e This feature is not available for the following ELCOT or LCOT cards KX TD
397. x is created for that extension This message box is used to store greeting messages and voice messages for the extension Each PT SLT and PS can be assigned its own message box Example PBX Message Box for Extn 301 Le Message Box for Message Box for Message Box for Message Box for 2 CH Extn 101 Extn 102 Extn 103 Extn 210 1 I SVM Card 2 Floating Extension No 592 default I I f 2 CH I I I Message Recording Limit Up to 125 messages greeting messages and voice messages for extensions with a maximum total recording time of 60 minutes default can be recorded per card This memory is shared between the message boxes of all extensions assigned to that card The recording quality which can be selected through system programming determines the total recording time as follows Recording Quality Recording Time High about 40 minutes Middle about 60 minutes default Low about 120 minutes If the sum length of all recorded voice messages exceeds 90 of total space on the SVM card or 115 or more voice messages have been recorded on the card the display informs all extension users belonging to that card that the card is almost full Users will hear dial tone 3 when going off hook Feature Guide 179 1 16 Optional Device Features Floating Extension No and Destination An extension user can set incoming calls to be
398. xample a firm uses an account code for each client the firm can determine what calls were made for the client and can submit a bill to the client according to the client s account code on the SMDR call record There are two methods of entering account codes as follows One of the methods is selected for each extension on a COS basis Mode Description Option A user can enter an account code if needed at any time desired Forced A user must always enter an account code before seizing a trunk Conditions An account code can be stored into Memory Dialling e g One touch Dialling Account Button A flexible button can be customised as the Account button The Account button is used in place of the feature number for entering an account code This button is useful because it can be used at any time while feature number entry is allowed only when hearing a dial tone before seizing a trunk Extension users can enter an account code at any time during a call including after the call has been disconnected and a dial tone is heard However if an account code is entered after there is no longer a reorder tone the call will not be stored in the SMDR record If more than one account code is entered the code entered last is printed out on SMDR Even in Forced mode emergency numbers can be dialled out without an account code 1 5 4 2 Emergency Call PT users can also enter an account code for incoming trunk calls during a c
399. xed Numbering 3 1 Capacity of System Resources Feature Guide 3 4 Revision History KX TDA0920 SD Memory Card for Software Upgrade to Enhanced Version only Features e 1 29 5 1 Network Direct Station Selection NDSS e 1 31 1 Computer Telephony Integration CTI SD Memory Card required for some features only Feature Guide 395 3 4 Revision History 3 4 3 KX TDA100 KX TDA200 KX TDA600 PMPR PLMPR Software File Version 3 xxxx New Contents e 1 2 2 2 Group Call Distribution Automatic Call Distribution ACD e 1 2 2 3 Outside Destinations in Incoming Call Distribution Group e 1 16 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA DISA Automatic Walking COS DISA Call Transfer from Outside Destination e 1 24 6 Virtual PS e 1 29 1 TIE Line Service TIE Call by Own PBX Extension Number e 1 29 2 Voice over Internet Protocol VoIP Network Automatic Rerouting of VoIP Calls to Public Trunks e 1 29 5 2 Centralised Voice Mail e 1 29 6 1 PS Roaming by Network ICD Group e 1 32 1 Cellular Phone Features SUMMARY Changed Contents e 1 2 2 1 Incoming Call Distribution Group Features SUMMARY ICD Group button e 1 2 2 7 Log in Log out Wrap up Timer e 1 3 1 1 Call Forwarding FWD Do Not Disturb DND SUMMARY e 1 4 1 4 Hands free Answerback e 1 5 5 2 Line Preference Outgoing e 1 6 1 6 Quick Dialling e 1 11 1 Call Transfer One touch Transfer 396 Feature Guide 3 4 Revision History e 1 13 1 2 Conference e 1 1
400. xtension One touch Two way Transfer Button When all of the VPS ports are busy a Pressing the Two way Record button sends a warning tone b Pressing the Two way Transfer button followed by an extension number sends a warning tone Feature Guide 245 1 23 Voice Mail Features PT Programming Manual References 201 Transfer Recall Time Feature Guide References 1 19 2 Flexible Buttons 1 23 1 Voice Mail VM Group 2 3 6 Flexible Numbering Fixed Numbering User Manual References 1 9 5 If a Voice Processing System is Connected 3 1 2 Settings on the Programming Mode 3 2 2 Manager Programming 246 Feature Guide 1 24 Portable Station PS Features 1 24 Portable Station PS Features 1 24 1 Portable Station PS Connection Description This PBX supports the connection of a PS e g KX TCA255 KX TD7690 It is possible to use the PBX features using the PS like a PT Conditions General The PS registration is required through the system programming To avoid unexpected registration to another PBX the Personal Identification Number PIN for the PBX is necessary to register a PS The registration can be cancelled Handover Even if a PS user moves during a conversation the PS will automatically switch between cells without disconnecting the call Handover Handover is available in any of the following cases a During a conversation with an extension or outside party b While a call is ringing at the
401. xtensions made 146 Feature Guide es SLT Hold Mode 1 12 Holding Features It is possible to choose how to hold a line and transfer a call with an SLT in the following methods through system programming Hold Transfer to Trunk Transfer to Extension Flashing the hookswitch Flashing the hookswitch Flashing the hookswitch Mode 1 Going on hook Trunk Access No Extension No Flashing the hookswitch Flashing the hookswitch Flashing the hookswitch EE Hold Feature No Trunk Access No Extension No Default Going on hook Flashing the hookswitch Flashing the hookswitch Flashing the hookswitch Mode 3 Hold Feature No Hold Feature No Extension No Going on hook Trunk Access No Flashing the hookswitch Flashing the hookswitch Flashing the hookswitch Mode 4 Hold Feature No Hold Feature No Hold Feature No Going on hook Trunk Access No Extension No If the following occurs frequently with an SLT choose Mode 2 Mode 3 or Mode 4 a When an SLT user receives a call reorder tone is heard or nobody answers the call b When an SLT user goes off hook reorder tone is heard instead of a dial tone If a call is not terminated after going on hook the above cases occur To avoid these problems choose Mode 2 Mode 3 or Mode 4 Every call will be terminated unless the Hold feature number is entered after flashing the hookswitch in Mode 2 Mode 3 an
402. y An extension user can choose not to receive paging announcements Paging Group Each paging group consists of extension user groups and external pagers One extension user group or external pager can belong to several paging groups gt 2 2 2 Group Example Paging Group 01 Paging Group 02 Paging Group 03 Paging Group 04 Wm O Extension Extension Extension vil User Group 2 User Group 3 a faire User Group 1 fy VIS wan Extn 100 Extn 101 i Extn 102 Extn 103 l Extn 104 Extn 105 Pager 2 Programming Example Extension User Group No External Pager No Paging Group No 001 002 003 ees 1 2 01 vi 02 Vv Vv 03 vw e wi 04 D vw 05 vi Vv Vv Ss Vv Vv w Constituent 156 Feature Guide 1 14 Paging Features 1 640 Extension User Groups of a Paging Group 2 641 External Pagers of a Paging Group Conditions Extensions which cannot be paged are PSs SLTs Ringing or busy PTs PTs in Paging Deny mode PTs in Paging DND mode These extensions cannot be paged but can answer the page External Pager Priority External pagers can be used with the following priorities TAFAS Paging BGM gt 1 16 3 Trunk Answer From Any Station TAFAS 1 16 4 Background Music BGM Volume Control Paging volume from the PTs and the external pagers can be changed through system programming Paging DND When
403. ystem 4 e Extended ai 2 2 None System Cyclic Tone Tenant Exclusive Feature Guide 2 2 System Configuration Software Tenant No Operator ARS Mode Music Source System Speed Dialling Floating extn no Extended 3 200 of PONN Tenant Exclusive 1 Follows the system assignment of a PBX operator 006 Operator Assignment 2 Follows the system assignment of the ARS mode 820 ARS Mode 3 Follows the system assignment of the music source for the Music on Hold 711 Music on Hold 4 Follows the system assignment for System Speed Dialling 001 System Speed Dialling Number Conditions e Tenant to Tenant Call Block The following features can be restricted based on the COS for each extension not based on the tenant by the Internal Call Block feature 1 1 2 2 Internal Call Block Calling extensions or doorphone s in the restricted tenant s Picking up calls ringing in the restricted tenant s Retrieving a call held within the restricted tenant s Example Tenant 2 Extension User Group 3 Je Tenant 1 Extension User Group 1 P HR waan Ee Extension l User Group 2 l P SSS a a Extension I User Group 4 SS SS a ea ea Extension User Group 5 User Group 6 Ne Extension Dy xX Feature Guide 349 2 2

"2.3.2 PT Programming" in the

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

&quot;2.3.2 PT Programming&quot; in the

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

"2.3.2 PT Programming" in the